Microsoft Dynamics™ GP

Manufacturing Core Functions

Copyright Copyright © 2007 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

Complying with all applicable copyright laws is the responsibility of the user. Without limiting the
rights under copyright, no part of this document may be reproduced, stored in or introduced into
a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the express written
permission of Microsoft Corporation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the licensee of the software
with which this document was provided may make a reasonable number of copies of this
document solely for internal use.

Trademarks Microsoft, and Microsoft Dynamics are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries. FairCom and c-tree Plus
are trademarks of FairCom Corporation and are registered in the United States and other
countries.

The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be trademarks or registered
marks - in the United States and/or other countries - of their respective owners.

Unless otherwise noted, the example companies, organizations, products, domain names, e-mail
addresses, logos, people, places, and events depicted herein are fictitious. No association with
any real company, organization, product, domain name, e-mail address, logo, person, place, or
event is intended or should be inferred.

Intellectual property Microsoft may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual
property rights covering subject matter in this document. Except as expressly provided in any
written license agreement from Microsoft, the furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property.

Warranty disclaimer Microsoft Corporation disclaims any warranty regarding the sample code contained in this
documentation, including the warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Limitation of liability The content of this document is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft
Corporation assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear
in this manual. Neither Microsoft Corporation nor anyone else who has been involved in the
creation, production or delivery of this documentation shall be liable for any indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary or consequential damages, including but not limited to any loss of anticipated
profit or benefits, resulting from the use of this documentation or sample code.

License agreement Use of this product is covered by a license agreement provided with the software product. If you
have any questions, please call the Microsoft Dynamics GP Customer Assistance Department at
800-456-0025 (in the U.S. or Canada) or +1-701-281-6500.

Publication date April 2007

Contents
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................. 2
Manufacturing documentation...................................................................................................................2
What’s in this manual...................................................................................................................................2
Symbols and conventions ............................................................................................................................3
Resources available from the Help menu..................................................................................................4
Send us your documentation comments ...................................................................................................5

Part 1: Manufacturing cards ................................................................................................. 8

Chapter 1: Machines and labor codes ............................................................................... 9
Machine and labor code terms....................................................................................................................9
Entering a machine record.........................................................................................................................10
Changing a machine definition record .................................................................................................... 11
Changing machine operating costs .......................................................................................................... 11
Changing a machine ID .............................................................................................................................12
Deleting a machine record .........................................................................................................................12
Entering a labor code..................................................................................................................................13
Changing a labor record ............................................................................................................................14
Changing labor code costs.........................................................................................................................15
Updating all machines or labor codes .....................................................................................................15
Adding pay codes to labor codes .............................................................................................................17
Removing a pay code from a labor code .................................................................................................17
Deleting a labor code..................................................................................................................................18

Chapter 2: Work centers ............................................................................................................. 19

Work center terms .......................................................................................................................................19
How sites and work centers are related ..................................................................................................20
Entering a work center record...................................................................................................................20
Assigning an employee to a work center ................................................................................................22
Assigning a machine to a work center.....................................................................................................23
Timing for work center changes ...............................................................................................................24
Unassigning an employee or a machine..................................................................................................25
Defining or modifying an outsourced work center ...............................................................................25
Rules for changing the outsourcing status of a work center ................................................................27
Adjusting work center capacity ................................................................................................................27
Rules for deleting work centers ................................................................................................................28
Deleting a work center record...................................................................................................................29
Rules for deleting sites in Manufacturing ...............................................................................................29
Work center calendars ................................................................................................................................30
Defining a work center calendar ..............................................................................................................31
Adjusting a work center calendar ............................................................................................................32
Designating alternate work centers..........................................................................................................32
Specifying preferred alternate work center order ..................................................................................33
Deleting alternate work centers ................................................................................................................34

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS i

C O N T E N T S

Skill sets and work centers ........................................................................................................................34

Assigning skill requirements to work centers ........................................................................................34
Next steps.....................................................................................................................................................35

Chapter 3: Operations ................................................................................................................... 37

Operations terms.........................................................................................................................................37
Creating an operation.................................................................................................................................38
Modifying operation definitions ..............................................................................................................39
Attaching drawings to operation codes...................................................................................................39
Deleting operation codes ...........................................................................................................................40

Chapter 4: Drawings ....................................................................................................................... 41

Drawings terms ...........................................................................................................................................41
Drawings and drawing groups.................................................................................................................41
Adding a drawing to a drawing group ...................................................................................................41
Attaching a drawing to a record ...............................................................................................................43
Deleting a drawing .....................................................................................................................................43
Removing a drawing from a drawing group..........................................................................................43
Viewing a drawing directly .......................................................................................................................43
Viewing a drawing attached to a record..................................................................................................44

Part 2: Item extensions ............................................................................................................ 48

Chapter 5: Item extensions overview ............................................................................. 49
Inventory and Manufacturing documentation.......................................................................................49
Item terms ....................................................................................................................................................50
Item statuses ................................................................................................................................................50
Replenishment methods ............................................................................................................................51
Fulfillment methods ...................................................................................................................................52
Standard costing..........................................................................................................................................52

Chapter 6: Item classes................................................................................................................ 55

Specifying accounts for an item class.......................................................................................................55
Specifying a fulfillment method for an item class..................................................................................58
Setting up shipping history for an item class .........................................................................................58
Defining overhead for a standard cost item class ..................................................................................59

Chapter 7: Manufacturing accounts ................................................................................ 61

Overview of accounts.................................................................................................................................61
Actual and standard cost items.................................................................................................................62
Specifying Manufacturing accounts.........................................................................................................62

Chapter 8: Item engineering data....................................................................................... 65

About item classes and Manufacturing...................................................................................................65
Entering item engineering data ................................................................................................................66
Assigning an effective date to an item.....................................................................................................68
Setting the unit of measure for shipping weight....................................................................................68
Specifying item status ................................................................................................................................68
Identifying an item requiring incoming inspection...............................................................................69

ii M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C O N T E N T S

About items and MRP................................................................................................................................70

Attaching a drawing to an item ................................................................................................................71
Calculating lead time for an item unit .....................................................................................................71
Calculating lead time for quantities .........................................................................................................72
How available to promise dates are calculated for Manufacturing ....................................................73
Limitations of available to promise dates for Manufacturing..............................................................74
Starting to track shipping history for an item ........................................................................................75
Manufacturing alternates...........................................................................................................................75
Specifying alternates for an item ..............................................................................................................76
Removing an alternate from an item .......................................................................................................76
Removing items ..........................................................................................................................................77
How Manufacturing affects reconciling inventory................................................................................77

Chapter 9: Standard costing revaluations.................................................................. 79

Standard costing windows ........................................................................................................................79
Comparison of rolling up and revaluing.................................................................................................80
Entering pending changes for material costs..........................................................................................81
Overriding a pending standard cost change...........................................................................................82
Rolling up material and overhead cost changes ....................................................................................83
Verifying rollup results ..............................................................................................................................84
Using scenarios to make standard cost changes ....................................................................................85
Proposing changes to material fixed overhead ......................................................................................87
Proposing changes to material variable overhead .................................................................................87
Interpreting the tree view ..........................................................................................................................88
Revaluing affected inventory items .........................................................................................................88
Revaluing all inventory items ...................................................................................................................89
Specifying the standard quantity for a finished item ............................................................................89

Part 3: Bill of Materials ............................................................................................................ 92

Chapter 10: Bill of Materials overview .......................................................................... 93
Bill of materials terms.................................................................................................................................93
Differences between types and categories ..............................................................................................95
Bill of materials types .................................................................................................................................96
Bill of materials categories.........................................................................................................................97
Issue-from and issue-to sites .....................................................................................................................97
Rules for backflushed components ..........................................................................................................98
Lead time calculations................................................................................................................................99

Chapter 11: Position numbers ............................................................................................ 101

Position number incremental spacing ...................................................................................................101
Position numbers in Manufacturing windows.....................................................................................102
Position number guidelines.....................................................................................................................103
Assigning existing position numbers to components .........................................................................104
Position number examples ......................................................................................................................104
Position number limits .............................................................................................................................105

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS iii

C O N T E N T S

Changing position numbers of components.........................................................................................106

Changing a bill of materials to a phantom bill of materials ...............................................................107

Chapter 12: Bill of Materials entry ................................................................................. 109

Understanding the Bill of Materials Entry window ............................................................................109
Creating a bill of materials....................................................................................................................... 110
Adding a component to a bill of materials............................................................................................ 113
Changing component details .................................................................................................................. 113
Deleting a component from a bill of materials ..................................................................................... 114
Modifying a component bill of materials .............................................................................................. 114
Removing a bill of materials.................................................................................................................... 115
Requirements for bill of materials components ................................................................................... 115
Backflushing bill of materials components ........................................................................................... 116
Shrinkage for bill of materials components .......................................................................................... 116
How floor stock costs are applied .......................................................................................................... 117
Component fixed quantity ...................................................................................................................... 117
Specifying an alternate component in a bill.......................................................................................... 118
Verifying alternate assignments.............................................................................................................. 118
Bills of materials and component effective dates ................................................................................. 119
Effects of engineering changes on bills..................................................................................................120
Adding user-defined information to bills .............................................................................................120
Accounting for by-products in a bill of materials ................................................................................121
Component quantities and rounding ....................................................................................................121

Chapter 13: Links to routings ............................................................................................. 123

Linking component usage to a routing sequence.................................................................................123
Modifying bill of materials and routing links ......................................................................................125
Unlinking components and routing sequences ....................................................................................126
Viewing link information.........................................................................................................................127

Chapter 14: Bill of Materials copies .............................................................................. 129

Copying a bill of materials ......................................................................................................................129
Removing copied component requirements.........................................................................................131

Chapter 15: Bill of Materials inquiries ........................................................................ 133

Types of bill of materials queries ............................................................................................................133
Viewing components in bills of materials .............................................................................................133
Scanning bills of materials for specific items ........................................................................................134
Calculating component requirements....................................................................................................135
Viewing cost information.........................................................................................................................135

Chapter 16: Reference designators ............................................................................... 137

Entering a reference designator ..............................................................................................................137
Modifying or deleting a reference designator ......................................................................................138
Viewing a reference designator...............................................................................................................139

Chapter 17: Revisions and archived bills .................................................................. 141

Revision levels and Archived bills of materials ...................................................................................141
Creating a new revision level for a bill ..................................................................................................142

iv M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C O N T E N T S

Viewing past revisions of a bill of materials .........................................................................................142

Removing Archived bills of materials ...................................................................................................143

Chapter 18: Mass updates ...................................................................................................... 145

Overview of mass updates for bills of materials..................................................................................145
Terminology for mass updates to bills of materials.............................................................................146
Adding an item to multiple bills of materials.......................................................................................146
Removing an item from multiple bills of materials .............................................................................149
Updating an item in multiple bills of materials ...................................................................................150
Replacing an item in multiple bills of materials...................................................................................151
Default values for replacement items ....................................................................................................153
Changing default values for mass updates...........................................................................................153

Chapter 19: Engineering Data Management Integration ........................... 157

Viewing design files..................................................................................................................................157
Selecting companies for integration.......................................................................................................157
Exporting inventoried items ...................................................................................................................158
Selecting item classes to export...............................................................................................................158
Selecting item numbers to export ...........................................................................................................159
Exporting inventoried items ...................................................................................................................159
Importing engineering BOMs .................................................................................................................160

Part 4: Sales extensions ...................................................................................................... 164

Chapter 20: Sales extensions overview ..................................................................... 165
Sales and Manufacturing documentation .............................................................................................165
Sales terms .................................................................................................................................................166

Chapter 21: Sales order entry ............................................................................................. 167

Tasks using the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window.....................................................167
Manufacturing orders generated from sales.........................................................................................168
Implications of generated manufacturing orders ................................................................................169
Creating a manufacturing order for a sales line ...................................................................................170
Modifying default manufacturing order details ..................................................................................172
Generating a quote-status manufacturing order..................................................................................173
Adjusting dates for sales items ...............................................................................................................173
Adding customer part number information.........................................................................................174
Calculating the shipping weight of an order ........................................................................................175
Effects of sales orders on MRP ................................................................................................................175
Limiting effects of sales allocations on MRP.........................................................................................176

Chapter 22: Order fulfillment.............................................................................................. 177

Requirements for order fulfillment history...........................................................................................177
Setting up document types for order fulfillment .................................................................................178
Entering order fulfillment history details .............................................................................................179
Viewing order fulfillment history...........................................................................................................181
Modifying entire order fulfillment information...................................................................................182
Deleting an order fulfillment entry ........................................................................................................183

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS v

C O N T E N T S

Changing freight or miscellaneous charges ..........................................................................................183

Generating a history report for a document range ..............................................................................184
Generating a history report for a single order ......................................................................................184
Assigning serial numbers for a sales order ...........................................................................................185
Assigning lot numbers for a sales order ................................................................................................186
Viewing bin information for an order....................................................................................................187
Viewing serial number assignments for an order ................................................................................187
Viewing lot number assignments for an order .....................................................................................188

Part 5: Sales Configurator ............................................................................................... 192

Chapter 23: Sales Configurator overview ............................................................... 193
Sales Configurator terms .........................................................................................................................193
Requirements for using the Sales Configurator ...................................................................................194

Chapter 24: Options and promotions .......................................................................... 195

Creating an option category ....................................................................................................................195
Creating an option exclusion or inclusion.............................................................................................197
Modifying an option category ................................................................................................................198
Removing an item from an option category .........................................................................................198
Deleting an option category ....................................................................................................................198
Generating a basic option category report ............................................................................................199
Sales Configurator option category assignments.................................................................................199
Assigning an option category to an item...............................................................................................199
Changing the order of option assignments...........................................................................................200
Unassigning option categories................................................................................................................201
Generating an item option assignment report......................................................................................201
Creating an option promotion ................................................................................................................202
Modifying a promotion............................................................................................................................203
Deleting a promotion ...............................................................................................................................203
Deleting all promotions for an option ...................................................................................................203

Chapter 25: Bills and routings ............................................................................................ 205

Creating a super bill of materials............................................................................................................205
Fulfillment methods for configured items ............................................................................................207
Modifying a super bill of materials ........................................................................................................208
Routings for configured items ................................................................................................................208
How super bills and routings work together .......................................................................................209

Chapter 26: Pricing and sales transactions ........................................................... 211

Sales Configurator pricing calculations................................................................................................. 211
Effects of Multicurrency Management on pricing ...............................................................................212
Effects of promotions on pricing.............................................................................................................212
How option items affect material costs .................................................................................................213
Configuring an item .................................................................................................................................213
Blank Sales Configurator fields...............................................................................................................215
Adding a newly-configured item to a sales order................................................................................215

vi M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C O N T E N T S

Adding a previously-configured item to a sales order........................................................................217

Deleting a configured bill of materials ..................................................................................................218
Viewing options for a sales line item .....................................................................................................218
Modifying a configured bill of materials...............................................................................................219
Adjusting markdown amounts...............................................................................................................220
Viewing a configured-item drawing ......................................................................................................221

Chapter 27: Configurator manufacturing orders.............................................. 223

Material costs for configured manufacturing orders...........................................................................223
Verifying dates for configured items......................................................................................................224
Tracking a configured-item manufacturing order ...............................................................................224
Unlinking manufacturing and sales orders ..........................................................................................225

Part 6: Manufacturing reports.................................................................................... 228

Chapter 28: Reports overview ............................................................................................ 229
Manufacturing report options.................................................................................................................229
Manufacturing report terms....................................................................................................................229

Chapter 29: Manufacturing reports............................................................................... 231

Creating a report option...........................................................................................................................231
Adding a range restriction to a report option.......................................................................................232
Deleting a range restriction from a report option ................................................................................233
Generating a Manufacturing report .......................................................................................................233
Viewing manufacturing reports in the report list ................................................................................234
Adding a report option to the report list ...............................................................................................234
Removing a report option from the report list .....................................................................................234
Changing report page orientation ..........................................................................................................235
Deleting a report option...........................................................................................................................235

Glossary ..................................................................................................................................................... 237

Index ............................................................................................................................................................... 245

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS vii

viii M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
INTRODUCTION
Introduction
You can use Manufacturing to organize and track the daily workings of the
manufacturing process, such as taking orders, purchasing raw materials, building
finished goods, fulfilling orders, and selling the finished goods.

This introduction is divided into the following sections:

• Manufacturing documentation
• What’s in this manual
• Symbols and conventions
• Resources available from the Help menu
• Send us your documentation comments

Manufacturing documentation
Manufacturing documentation is divided into five manuals. Refer to the following
table for an overview of what is included in each of the manuals.

Manual Modules or other major pieces

Manufacturing Setup manual System setup
User setup
Manufacturing Core Manufacturing Cards
Functions manual Extensions to Inventory Control
Bills of Materials
Extensions to Sales Order Processing
Sales Configurator
Manufacturing Reports
Manufacturing Production Routings
Functions manual Manufacturing Orders
Outsourcing
Work in Process
Manufacturing Management Quality Assurance
Functions manual Engineering Change Management
Job Costing
Manufacturing Planning Sales Forecasting
Functions manual Master Production Scheduling
Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP)
Material Requirements Planning (MRP)

The online help file includes all of the information in the manuals, except
installation information. The online help also includes field-by-field descriptions of
the windows. You can access online help by pressing F1 whenever a Manufacturing
window is active, or by choosing Help >> About this window.

If a Microsoft Dynamics™ GP window—such as the Sales Transaction Entry window—is

the active window when you access help, online help for Microsoft Dynamics GP will be
displayed. You can close that help, open any Manufacturing window, and try again to access
Manufacturing-specific help.

What’s in this manual

This manual is designed to give you an understanding of how to use the features of
Manufacturing, and how it integrates with the Microsoft Dynamics GP system.

2 M A N U FA C TU R IN G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 IN T RO D U C T IO N

To make best use of Manufacturing, you should be familiar with systemwide

features described in the System User’s Guide, the System Setup Guide, and the
System Administrator’s Guide.

Some features described in the documentation are optional and can be purchased
through your Microsoft Dynamics GP partner.

To view information about the release of Microsoft Dynamics GP that you’re using
and which modules or features you are registered to use, choose Help >> About
Microsoft Dynamics GP.

The manual is divided into the following parts:

• Part 1, Manufacturing cards, includes information about defining basic

Manufacturing cards: machine definitions, labor codes, work centers, and
operations. Information about attaching drawings or electronic files to
Manufacturing records also is included.

• Part 2, Item extensions, includes information about additional windows and

fields you can use to enter item information. It also includes information about
using standard costing with Manufacturing.

• Part 3, Bill of Materials, describes how you can create and use bills of materials
to organize your components into lists of items you use to build products.

• Part 4, Sales extensions, contains information about the windows

Manufacturing adds so you can enter more information about your sales. The
extensions to Sales Order Processing also include features that help you
generate manufacturing orders automatically from sales orders.

• Part 5, Sales Configurator, includes information about setting up and using the
Sales Configurator to enter customers’ selections from lists of options you
create. Pricing is calculated based on those options, and can be used to generate
and schedule manufacturing orders automatically.

• Part 6, Manufacturing reports, describes how you can use Manufacturing’s

Universal Report Filter to print Manufacturing reports.

Symbols and conventions

For definitions of unfamiliar terms, see the glossary in the manual or refer to the
glossary in Help.

Symbol Description
The light bulb symbol indicates helpful tips, shortcuts and
suggestions.

The warning symbol indicates situations you should be especially

aware of when completing tasks.

The multicurrency symbol points out features or procedures that

apply if you’re using Multicurrency Management.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 3

I N T R O D U C T I O N

This manual uses the following conventions to refer to sections, navigation and
other information.

Convention Description
Creating a batch Italicized type indicates the name of a section or procedure.
File >> Print or File > The (>>) or (>) symbol indicates a sequence of actions, such as
Print selecting items from a menu or toolbar, or pressing buttons in a
window. This example directs you to go to the File menu and choose
Print.
TAB or ENTER All capital letters indicate a key or a key sequence.

Resources available from the Help menu

The Microsoft Dynamics GP Help menu gives you access to user assistance
resources on your computer, as well as on the Web.

Contents
Opens the Help file for the active Microsoft Dynamics GP component, and displays
the main “contents” topic. To browse a more detailed table of contents, click the
Contents tab above the Help navigation pane. Items in the contents topic and tab
are arranged by module. If the contents for the active component includes an
“Additional Help files” topic, click the links to view separate Help files that
describe additional components.

To find information in Help by using the index or full-text search, click the
appropriate tab above the navigation pane, and type the keyword to find.

To save the link to a topic in the Help, select a topic and then select the Favorites tab.
Click Add.

Index
Opens the Help file for the active Microsoft Dynamics GP component, with the
Index tab active. To find information about a window that’s not currently displayed,
type the name of the window, and click Display.

About this window

Displays overview information about the current window. To view related topics
and descriptions of the fields, buttons, and menus for the window, choose the
appropriate link in the topic. You also can press F1 to display Help about the current
window.

Lookup
Opens a lookup window, if a window that you are viewing has a lookup window.
For example, if the Checkbook Maintenance window is open, you can choose this
item to open the Checkbooks lookup window.

Show Required Fields

Highlights fields that are required to have entries. Required fields must contain
information before you can save the record and close the window. To change the
way required fields are highlighted, choose Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >>
Tools >> Setup >> User Preferences >> Display, and specify a different color and
type style.

4 M A N U FA C TU R IN G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 IN T RO D U C T IO N

Printable Manuals
Displays a list of manuals in Adobe Acrobat .pdf format, which you can print or
view.

Orientation Training
Accesses online tutorials that show you how to complete basic procedures within
Microsoft Dynamics GP. Additional tutorials are available through the
CustomerSource Web site.

What’s New
Provides information about enhancements that were added to Microsoft Dynamics
GP since the last major release.

Microsoft Dynamics GP Online

Opens a Web page that provides links to a variety of Web-based user assistance
resources. Access to some items requires registration for a paid support plan.

Customer Feedback Options

Provides information about how you can join the Customer Experience
Improvement Program to improve the quality, reliability, and performance of
Microsoft® software and services.

Send us your documentation comments

We welcome comments regarding the usefulness of the Microsoft Dynamics GP
documentation. If you have specific suggestions or find any errors in this manual,
send your comments by e-mail to the following address: bizdoc@microsoft.com.

To send comments about specific topics from within Help, click the Documentation
Feedback link, which is located at the bottom of each Help topic.

Note: By offering any suggestions to Microsoft, you give Microsoft full permission to use
them freely.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 5

6 M A N U FA C TU R IN G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
PART 1: MANUFACTURING CARDS
 Part 1: Manufacturing cards
This part of the documentation describes how to set up basic Manufacturing cards.
Most of the cards described here will need to be defined only once, but you can refer
to this information at other times for instructions on modifying or viewing existing
entries.

The following information is discussed:

• Chapter 1, “Machines and labor codes,” describes how to define machines used
in your production processes and how to set up labor codes for production
employees.

• Chapter 2, “Work centers,” contains information about setting up work centers

and work center calendars. Information about specifying alternate work centers
and adjusting work center capacity also is included.

• Chapter 3, “Operations,” describes how to define operations for work centers.

• Chapter 4, “Drawings,” includes information about setting up your

Manufacturing system so users can view electronic files while working with
Manufacturing.

8 M A N U FA C TU R IN G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
Chapter 1: Machines and labor codes
Before using Manufacturing, you must enter information about the different
components of your operation. First you’ll need to define machines and labor codes.
These basic definitions will be used throughout the system as you create routings
and work centers, and as you track your manufacturing costs.

You must enter machine definition records for any device, implement or tool used
in your manufacturing process that requires scheduling or that adds to the cost of
your manufacturing process. If all products must be processed through a certain
machine—maybe a shrink-wrapping machine for packaging—you should enter a
definition record for the shrink-wrapping machine. If a machine or tool doesn’t
significantly affect your schedule or your costs, however, you don’t need to create a
definition for it.

You also must define labor codes. If you have Microsoft Dynamics GP Human
Resources with Payroll registered, you can link labor codes to positions. If you have
Microsoft Dynamics GP Payroll registered, you also can link labor codes to pay
codes. You can assign costs for each labor code so those costs can be included in
standard costing formulas.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Machine and labor code terms

• Entering a machine record
• Changing a machine definition record
• Changing machine operating costs
• Changing a machine ID
• Deleting a machine record
• Entering a labor code
• Changing a labor record
• Changing labor code costs
• Updating all machines or labor codes
• Adding pay codes to labor codes
• Removing a pay code from a labor code
• Deleting a labor code

Machine and labor code terms

Refer here for information about some of the terms related to machine and labor
codes.

If you’re using outsourcing, you must set up a machine ID or a labor code for outsourcing.
Refer to Chapter 15, “Outsourcing overview,” and Chapter 16, “Outsourcing setup,” in the
Manufacturing Production Functions documentation.

Machine A machine can be any tool, device or implement that you use in your
manufacturing process.

Labor code A labor code is used to associate a job function with a specific pay
code. For instance, jobs requiring fewer skills often have lower labor code numbers
or identifiers—PROD1, PROD2, PROD3, for example—and are compensated at
lower rates. Jobs requiring more skills or education have higher labor code numbers
and higher pay rates.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 9

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

Often, within a labor code, there are several pay levels. For example, an entry-level
Labor Code 3 worker usually is paid less than an experienced Labor Code 3 worker.

Shop rate The shop rate is a standard pay rate for each labor code. It is the
amount used to estimate labor costs for a manufacturing order and to calculate
standard costing information.

Entering a machine record

Use the Machine Definition window to enter basic cost and overhead information,
as well as warranty information, and the location and ID number for the machine.

To enter a machine record:

1. Open the Machine Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Machines)

2. Enter or select a machine ID. The ID can be up to ten characters.

3. To enter information about the purchase of the machine, enter or select the
vendor ID.

If you’ve specified the vendor for the machine but the vendor record wasn’t already
defined in the system, a message appears and you’ll have the option to define the new
vendor. If you choose Cancel to return to the Machine Definition window, you’ll need to
define the vendor record later. If you choose Define, the Vendor Maintenance window
will open so you can define the vendor record.

4. In the Machine Applied field, enter or select the account to which applied
machine costs will be posted.

5. Enter or select the accounts to which fixed and variable overhead amounts will
be posted.

6. You can enter the current operating costs of the machine. Enter the cost of
operating the machine and the cost of operation per piece the machine
produces.

10 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A PT E R 1 MA CHI N ES A N D LA BOR C O DES

You must enter an operating cost for the machine if you’re defining fixed or
variable overhead for the machine as a percentage of operating costs.

The amounts you enter here should be calculated and made with the assistance of a cost
or managerial accountant.

7. Enter information about the fixed overhead costs of the machine.

Mark Amount or Percent to indicate whether the fixed overhead cost will be
determined by a percentage of costs or a specified amount.

Enter the percentage or amount, and select Hour or Piece to indicate if the costs
are to be calculated on a per-hour or per-piece basis.

8. Enter information about the variable overhead costs of the machine.

Mark Amount or Percent to indicate whether the variable overhead cost will be
determined by a percentage of costs or a specified amount.

Enter the percentage or amount, and select Hour or Piece to indicate if the costs
are to be calculated on a per-hour or per-piece basis.

9. Choose Save.

Changing a machine definition record

Use these steps to change machine definition records. Some changes, however,
require special consideration. Refer to Changing machine operating costs and Changing
a machine ID for more details about those procedures.

To change a machine definition record:

1. Open the Machine Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Machines)

2. Enter or select a machine ID.

3. Make changes, as needed.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

Changing machine operating costs

Changing the operating costs of a machine will affect how manufacturing costs—
including standard manufacturing costs—will be calculated.

To change machine operating costs:

1. Open the Machine Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Machines)

2. Enter or select a machine ID.

3. Enter the new cost information for the machine.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 11

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

4. Enter information in the Pending section if you know the operating costs of a
machine will change on a specific date—for instance, due to a change in the
electrical rate.

You can enter a new operating cost for the machine and the date the new
operating cost will be in effect. You also can enter the new cost per piece and the
date the new cost per piece will increase.

5. Choose Save and close the window.

6. To complete the revaluation, use the Standard Cost Rollup window.

Refer to Chapter 9, “Standard costing revaluations,” for more information.

If the machine operating costs change while a manufacturing order using that machine
has an Open status, the cost change won’t be applied to the Work in Process Machine
account. However, the cost change will be reflected in the value of Work in Process
Finished Goods posted to inventory. The price difference will be accounted for in the
variances that will be calculated and reported.

Changing a machine ID
You might need to assign a new machine ID to a previously defined machine. To
change the machine ID, you must delete the existing machine record and then enter
a new record and assign a new machine ID to it.

To change a machine ID:

1. Open the Machine Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Machines)

2. Enter or select the ID for the machine you need to change.

It’s a good idea to print the Machine Detail report for this machine before you delete it.
The report summarizes the information that you’ve entered in the Machine Definition
window for this machine, and will be a handy reference when you recreate the machine
record.

3. Choose Delete.

If the machine has been assigned to a work center, a message will indicate that
the machine has been assigned to work centers and you’ll have the option to see
a list of those work centers. You can’t delete a machine that’s assigned to a work
center, so choose Yes to see a list of the work centers the machine has been
assigned to. Use the Work Center Setup window to remove this machine from
those work centers, if needed.

Refer to Unassigning an employee or a machine on page 25.

4. Enter a new machine record. Refer to Entering a machine record on page 10 and to
the Machine Detail report for this machine.

Deleting a machine record

You might need to delete a machine record if you quit using it in production. Be
sure the machine you want to delete isn’t assigned to any work centers.

12 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A PT E R 1 MA CHI N ES A N D LA BOR C O DES

To delete a machine record:

1. Open the Machine Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Machines)

2. Enter or select the ID of the machine to delete.

3. Choose Delete and close the window.

If the machine has been assigned to a work center, a message will indicate that
the machine has been assigned to work centers and you’ll have the option to see
a list of those work centers. You can’t delete a machine that’s assigned to a work
center, so choose Yes to see a list of the work centers the machine has been
assigned to. Use the Work Center Setup window to remove this machine from
those work centers, if needed.

Refer to Unassigning an employee or a machine on page 25.

Entering a labor code

Labor codes are identifiers you can use for groups of employees. Many
manufacturing companies use labor codes to distinguish between groups of
employees who have different sets of skills or tenure. Labor codes often are
associated with different pay rates. If you’re using Microsoft Dynamics GP Payroll,
you can use the pay codes defined in Payroll and associate them with labor codes.

You also can set up labor codes to be used to calculate the costs associated with
outsourced services.

Use the Labor Codes Definition window to enter labor code information.

To enter a labor code:

1. Open the Labor Code Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Labor Codes)

2. Enter or select a labor code and enter a brief description of the labor code.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 13

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

3. If the labor code will be used to track the costs associated with outsourcing,
mark Use Labor Code for Outsourcing.

This option is available only if you’re using a labor cost bucket to track
outsourcing costs, and if you marked the Allow Outsourced Labor Code option
in the WIP Preference Defaults window. Refer to Setting up data collection options
in Chapter 4, “Manufacturing production functions setup,” in the
Manufacturing Setup documentation.

4. Enter pay codes.

Refer to your Payroll documentation for more information about creating pay codes.
Refer to Adding pay codes to labor codes on page 17 for more information about
assigning pay codes to labor codes.

5. Enter a shop rate, and select whether it should be applied per-hour or per-piece.

6. Enter fixed overhead amounts.

Mark Amount or Percent to indicate if fixed labor overhead costs are

determined by a percentage of labor costs or a specified amount.

Enter the percentage or amount.

7. Enter variable overhead amounts.

Mark Amount or Percent to indicate if variable labor overhead costs are

determined by a percentage of labor costs or a specified amount.

Enter the percentage or amount.

8. Enter or select the labor costing accounts to which these overhead amounts will
be posted.

9. Choose Save and close the window.

Changing a labor record

Changes to labor code records might include changes to the basic criteria for the
labor code, such as the shop rate and the comments about the code.

Changing the costs associated with a labor code will affect costing calculations.
Refer to Changing labor code costs.

To change a labor code:

1. Open the Labor Code Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Labor Codes)

2. Enter or select the labor code to change.

3. Make changes, as needed.

14 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A PT E R 1 MA CHI N ES A N D LA BOR C O DES

You cannot remove the designation for outsourcing if the labor code is included in any
operation, or planning or active routing—that is, the labor code can’t be included on
any routing for any item and can’t be part of any open manufacturing order. Also, you
can’t mark the Use Labor Code for Outsourcing option if the labor code already is the
setup labor code for any planning or working routing.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

Changing labor code costs

You can use fields in the Pending section of the Labor Code Definition window to
enter information about changes to the labor code rate and overhead that you know
will take effect on a specific date. A scheduled change—such as a change in the shop
floor rate—can be entered ahead of time using these fields.

To change labor code costs:

1. Open the Labor Code Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Labor Codes)

2. Enter or select a labor code.

3. In the Pending Shop Rate field, enter the shop rate.

4. Select Hour or Piece from the list to identify how the rate will be calculated.

5. Enter the date the new rate will take effect.

6. To change the fixed overhead rate information, mark the Fixed Overhead option
to reflect how the fixed overhead will be calculated—as an amount or as a
percentage.

Enter an amount or percentage and the date the change to the fixed overhead
rate will be effective.

7. To change the variable overhead rate information, mark the Variable Overhead
option to reflect how the variable overhead will be calculated—as an amount or
as a percentage.

Enter an amount or percentage and the date the change to the variable overhead
rate will be effective.

8. Choose Save.

9. To complete the revaluation, you must use the Standard Cost Rollup window,
available through the Go To button of the Item Maintenance window.

Refer to Chapter 9, “Standard costing revaluations,” for more information.

Updating all machines or labor codes

You can use the Labor Code/Machine Overhead Defaults window to enter default
settings for overhead amounts and accounts, and then roll them down to existing
labor codes or machine IDs. This can make updating machine and labor code
information faster and easier.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 15

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

To update all machines or labor codes:

1. Open the Labor Code/Machine Overhead Defaults window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Labor/Machine OH)

2. Enter fixed labor overhead amounts.

Mark Amount or Percent to indicate if fixed labor overhead costs are

determined by a percentage of labor costs or a specified amount.

Enter the percentage or amount, and select Hour or Piece to indicate if the costs
are to be calculated on a per-hour or per-piece basis.

3. Enter variable labor overhead amounts.

Mark Amount or Percent to indicate if variable labor overhead costs are

determined by a percentage of labor costs or a specified amount.

Enter the percentage or amount, and select Hour or Piece to indicate if the costs
are to be calculated on a per-hour or per-piece basis.

4. Enter or select the labor costing accounts to which labor overhead amounts will
be posted. As you select each posting account, the description of the account
will be displayed in the window.

5. Enter fixed machine overhead amounts.

Mark Amount or Percent to indicate if fixed machine overhead costs are

determined by a percentage of machine costs or a specified amount.

Enter the percentage or amount, and select Hour or Piece to indicate if the costs
are to be calculated on a per-hour or per-piece basis.

6. Enter variable machine overhead amounts.

Mark Amount or Percent to indicate if variable machine overhead costs are

determined by a percentage of machine costs or a specified amount.

Enter the percentage or amount, and select Hour or Piece to indicate if the costs
are to be calculated on a per-hour or per-piece basis.

16 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A PT E R 1 MA CHI N ES A N D LA BOR C O DES

7. Enter or select the machine costing accounts to which machine overhead

amounts will be posted. As you select each posting account, the description for
the account will be displayed in the window.

8. Choose Save.

A message will appear and you’ll have the option to apply changes to existing
records. If you choose No, your entries in this window will be saved but won’t
be reflected in existing machine and labor code definitions. If you choose Yes,
the settings for calculating overhead and the posting accounts will be updated
for all machine records and all labor codes.

If you have machines or labor codes that require settings other than the default settings
and you roll down changes to existing records, you’ll need to review those machine and
labor code records and adjust them, as needed.

Adding pay codes to labor codes

Use the Labor Code Definition window to link pay codes to labor code definitions.

Refer to your Payroll documentation for more information about creating pay codes.

To add pay codes to labor codes:

1. Open the Labor Code Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Labor Codes)

2. Enter or select a labor code.

3. Select a primary pay code. You also can select one or two alternate pay codes.

4. Choose Save.

Removing a pay code from a labor code

Use the Labor Code Definition window to remove pay codes from labor codes.

To remove a pay code from a labor code:

1. Open the Labor Code Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Labor Codes)

2. Enter or select a labor code.

3. In the field that has the pay code information to remove, select the text and
press DELETE on your keyboard, or backspace over the code.

4. Choose Save.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 17

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

Deleting a labor code

Use the Labor Code Definition window to remove a labor code.

To delete a labor code:

1. Open the Labor Code Definition window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Labor Codes)

2. Enter or select a labor code.

3. Choose Delete.

You can’t delete a labor code if is part of any planning or active routing, or if the labor
code is included in any routing for a manufacturing order that is not closed.

18 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
Chapter 2: Work centers
Work centers include the employees and machines that are grouped together as a
unit for completing tasks in a production process. Some companies use the term
“load center” to mean the same thing. If you’re using Capacity Requirements
Planning (CRP), you can schedule work into your work centers. CRP information
can help you see the capacity for each work center and determine which work
centers have extra capacity that you can use other ways.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Work center terms

• How sites and work centers are related
• Entering a work center record
• Assigning an employee to a work center
• Assigning a machine to a work center
• Timing for work center changes
• Unassigning an employee or a machine
• Defining or modifying an outsourced work center
• Rules for changing the outsourcing status of a work center
• Adjusting work center capacity
• Rules for deleting work centers
• Deleting a work center record
• Rules for deleting sites in Manufacturing
• Work center calendars
• Defining a work center calendar
• Adjusting a work center calendar
• Designating alternate work centers
• Specifying preferred alternate work center order
• Deleting alternate work centers
• Skill sets and work centers
• Assigning skill requirements to work centers
• Next steps

Work center terms

Refer here for information about some of the terms related to work centers.

Outsourced work center A work center with capacity supplied by an outside

supplier or contractor. For example, if your business manufactures farm machinery,
you might have an outside vendor that paints the machinery for you once it is
assembled.

Alternate work center A second work center, usually equipped with similar
staff and machines, that can assist the primary work center, when needed.

Employee efficiency percentage A ranking of how an employee performs a

given task. You can use this information in different ways, depending on how your
organization handles its employee efficiencies.

Some organizations complete time studies of various tasks and set task goals for
workers based on those figures. Employees earn efficiency ratings based on their
ability to meet task goals.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 19

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

For example, Acme Widgets has determined that the widget assembly task can be
completed in two minutes—or at the rate of 30 pieces per hour. An employee who
can meet that goal is assigned an efficiency of 100%. An employee who can
assemble 20 widgets per hour has a 67% efficiency. If an employee can achieve more
than the goal—can build more than 30 widgets per hour—that employee would
have an efficiency level greater than 100%.

In some organizations, the top producer is assigned a value of 100% (or less) and all
other employees are ranked in comparison to the top producer.

Hours per shift The amount of time in the shift.

Machine hours The number of hours in a day or in a shift that a machine is

available to perform tasks.

Machine efficiency How well a machine performs a given task compared to a

control number.

Machine utilization The percentage of available machine capacity that is

currently being used. For example, if a machine is capable of producing 100 items
per shift and is only being used to produce 80 items per shift, the machine
utilization is 80% of capacity.

How sites and work centers are related

You can define sites in Inventory Control. The sites are inventory sites where items
can be stored. Work centers are specialized sites where manufacturing processes
occur.

Before you can create a work center, you must use the Site Maintenance window in
Inventory Control to create the site. Then you can create a work center based on the
site information. You can create one work center for each site. A work center will
have the same identifier as its associated site. For example, if you create the NORTH
site and then create a work center based on that site, the work center ID also will be
NORTH.

Because sites and work centers are so closely related, special rules apply whenever
you attempt to delete a site or a work center. For more information, refer to the
following topics:

• Rules for deleting work centers on page 28

• Rules for deleting sites in Manufacturing on page 29

Entering a work center record

Before you can assign machines or employees to a work center, you must use the
Work Center Setup window to create a basic definition for a work center.

Work center information is important because it represents your company’s

capacity for work. That information will play a bigger role later on when you want
to compare available work capacity with the work you have scheduled in Capacity
Requirements Planning (CRP). Besides assigning employees and machines to work
centers, you also can specify the efficiency—the statistical measure of the
employee’s performance compared to routing sequence times—of employees and
machines.

20 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A P T E R 2 WO R K C E N T E R S

The Display Date field in the Work Center Setup window is important because it
determines when the work center definition you’re creating will be effective. Some
companies want the work center records to reflect every change to the work center
definition; for instance, if an employee is on vacation or if a machine is offline for
repairs. Other companies don’t want that level of detail. Refer to Timing for work
center changes on page 24 for more information.

A work center is a specialized site. Before you begin this procedure, you must use the Site
Maintenance window to set up the site that will be a work center. Refer to Inventory Control
documentation for more information.

If you like, you can associate the work center with a department. For more
information about setting up departments, refer to your Payroll documentation.

To enter a work center record:

1. Open the Work Center Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Setup)

2. Enter a work center ID. The identifier for the work center must match the
identifier for the associated site.

If you enter a work center ID and there is no corresponding site ID, a message
appears and you’ll have the option to create the site ID.

3. Enter a brief description of the work center. Often, the work center description
is a word or phrase that describes the work that will be completed in that work
center. The description field is required.

If the work center tasks are completed by an outside supplier, this is an outsourced work
center. Complete this procedure and then refer to Defining or modifying an outsourced
work center on page 25.

4. To associate a work center with a department, enter or select a department

name.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 21

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

5. Enter the start time, hours per shift and number of shifts. The hours per shift
multiplied by the number of shifts can’t be greater than 24.

If you’re using Capacity Requirements Planning, (CRP), be sure the hours per
shift you enter is the number of actual working hours per shift. For example, if
employees have two 15-minute breaks in an eight-hour shift, the working hours
per shift is 7.5 hours.

6. Enter the date this work center definition should become effective in the
Display Date field. Refer to Timing for work center changes on page 24 for more
information.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

Assigning an employee to a work center

Use the Work Center Setup window to assign employees to work centers.

To assign an employee to a work center:

1. Open the Work Center Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Setup)

2. Enter or select the work center to add employees to.

It’s possible to have several records for a single work center, each with a different
effective date. Be sure the work center record you select has the appropriate Display
Date.

3. In the first blank line of the employee scrolling window, enter or select an
employee ID.

4. Enter the number of hours the employee will work in each shift, and the
employee’s efficiency percentage. Entries in the scrolling window will be saved
as they are entered.

As you add employees to the work center, the effective capacity of the
employees in the work center will be calculated.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add additional employees to the work center. If the work
center has more than one shift, enter employees from all shifts who are part of
the work center to the work center record.

The amount in the Effective Capacity field is calculated automatically by

multiplying each employee’s hours by his or her efficiency percentage. CRP
uses this information to determine the workload that can be handled by the
work center, but you can edit the amount.

6. In the Overloaded % field, enter the maximum percentage of the effective

capacity to schedule into this work center.

22 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A P T E R 2 WO R K C E N T E R S

For example, a work center might have an effective employee capacity of 100
hours, but you’ve found that the work center employees respond well to
slightly larger workloads, so you schedule an overload of 105%. When the work
that can be assigned to the work center is calculated in CRP, 105 hours of work
per day will be assigned to the work center.

A work center will be flagged when the work center’s load exceeds the overloaded
percentage.

7. You can enter the percentage of overtime that is acceptable for the employees in
this work center. This field is for reference only, and the amount you enter here
won’t be taken into consideration when CRP information is calculated.

8. Choose Save and close the window.

Assigning a machine to a work center

Use the Work Center Setup window to assign machines to a work center.

To assign a machine to a work center:

1. Open the Work Center Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Setup)

2. Enter or select the work center to add machines to.

It’s possible to have several records for a single work center, each with a different
effective date. Be sure the work center record you select has the appropriate Display
Date.

3. In the first blank line of the machines scrolling window, enter or select a
machine ID.

4. Enter the number of hours the machine will run in each shift, and the utilization
percentage of the machine. Entries in the scrolling window will be saved as they
are entered.

As you add machines to the work center, the effective capacity of the machines
in the work center will be calculated.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add additional machines to the work center.

The amount in the Effective Capacity field is calculated automatically by

multiplying each machine’s hours by its efficiency percentage. CRP uses this
information to determine the workload that can be handled by the work center,
but you can edit the amount.

6. In the Overloaded % field, enter the maximum percentage of the effective

capacity that you want to schedule into this work center.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 23

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

For example, a work center’s machines might have an effective machine

capacity of 10 hours, but during hot summer months you’ve found that the
machine often overheats. You might schedule an overload of 90%, to keep the
load a little lighter during those months. When work that can be assigned to the
work center is calculated, it will assign 9 hours of work per day.

A work center will be flagged when the work center’s load exceeds the overloaded
percentage.

7. You can enter the percentage of overtime that is acceptable for the machine in
this work center. This field is for reference only, and the amount you enter here
won’t be taken into consideration when CRP information is calculated.

8. Choose Save and close the window.

Timing for work center changes

There are several ways you can change your work center records: you can adjust an
employee’s efficiency percentage to reflect the employee’s additional experience,
you can add or remove machines or employees, and you can change the number of
shifts that are run in a work center.

Sometimes, changes should be reflected immediately. If you find that an employee’s

efficiency rating has increased from 70% to 90%, for example, you’d want to have
that change in the work center’s capacity reflected immediately.

On the other hand, you might want to delay the effective date for some work center
changes. For example, if you plan to take a machine offline for a week of repairs and
maintenance on the 10th of the month, you should enter the information as a
pending change. That way, CRP can “see” that the machine capacity of the work
center has changed when it tries to schedule work for that period. Likewise, you
could make another pending work center change for when the machine is
scheduled to be back in service.

The information you enter in the Display Date field of the Work Center Setup
window will determine if changes will be reflected immediately or in the future.

• If a change should be reflected immediately, select the work center record you
want to change in the Work Center Setup window and make your changes
without changing the Display Date field.

• To enter pending changes—changes that will take effect on a certain date—

select the work center record you want to change in the Work Center Setup
window, change the display date to the date the changes should take effect, and
then make your changes in the window.

Use care when entering pending changes for work center records because the
changes you enter on a day-to-day basis won’t be applied to scheduled changes. For
example, if you have several pending work center changes scheduled and you then
change an employee’s efficiency percentage effective immediately, you must change
the employee’s efficiency percentage in each of the pending changes.

Not all changes can be scheduled using the Display Date field. For example, a work center’s
status as a “regular” work center or as an “outsourced” work center is effective immediately.

24 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A P T E R 2 WO R K C E N T E R S

Unassigning an employee or a machine

Before you can delete a machine record, you must unassign it from its work centers.
The same steps can be used for removing employee records from work centers.

Use the Work Center Setup window to remove employees from a work center.

To unassign an employee or a machine:

1. Open the Work Center Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Setup)

2. Select a work center.

3. Determine when the change should be effective.

• If the change should be effective immediately, accept the date in the Display
Date field.

• If the change should be effective on a date you specify, enter that date in the
Display Date field. If the display date you enter hasn’t already been used to
enter pending updates to this work center, a message will appear and you’ll
have the option to create a new record. Choose Yes.

Refer to Timing for work center changes on page 24.

4. Mark the employee record or machine record to remove from the work center.

5. From the Edit menu, choose Delete Row. Your changes automatically will be
saved.

Don’t choose the Delete button. Use the Delete button only to delete the entire work
center record.

6. Continue removing employee records or machine records from the work center.

7. Close the window.

Defining or modifying an outsourced work center

If some of the work for your company is outsourced—that is, if its capacity comes
from an outside supplier or contractor—you can define it as an outsourced work
center. Use the Work Center Setup window to first define a basic work center
record, and then refer to this topic for entering information specific to outsourced
work centers.

To define or modify an outsourced work center:

1. Open the Work Center Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Setup)

2. Enter or select a work center ID.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 25

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

3. Be sure the Outsourced list is set to Yes. If you’re defining a new work center,
the Outsourced Work Center Setup window opens. If you’re modifying work
center information, choose the expansion button on the Outsourced field to
open the window.

Refer to Rules for changing the outsourcing status of a work center on page 27 for
information about the requirements and effects of changing this setting for an existing
work center.

Information will be displayed in the Work Center ID and Description fields.

4. Enter or select the vendor who is supplying the outsourced services.

5. You can enter or select the item number of the service you purchase from the
vendor.

For example, if the vendor provides special testing services, you might create an
item with Service type in the Item Maintenance window, and enter “Testing” for
the item.

The item you select must have a Service type, and must be assigned to the
vendor. Refer to Inventory Control documentation for more information about
creating item records and assigning them to vendors.

Selecting a service item number isn’t required, but it is required for tracking history.
That is, if you will order the same service several times and want to be able to review the
amount and costs for the service each time it is ordered, you must set up a Service Item
Number.

6. In the PO Release Offset Days field, enter the number of days that should elapse
between when the purchase order for the service is released and when the
service should begin.

For example, if the vendor needs to know 10 days in advance that the
outsourced services will be required, you would enter 10 for the PO Release
Offset Days.

The number you enter here will be the default value when a routing is created
using the outsourced work center. You’ll have the option to accept the default
value, or change it.

7. Choose OK and close the window.

26 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A P T E R 2 WO R K C E N T E R S

Rules for changing the outsourcing status of a work

center
You can use the Work Center Setup window to change the outsourcing status of a
work center. For example, suppose you have an existing, non-outsourcing work
center that you want to use for outsourcing, or that you have an outsourcing work
center that you want to use for in-house activities.

You can change the outsourcing status of a work center by changing the selection in
the Outsourced field in the Work Center Setup window. To do this, however, the
work center can’t be part of any planning or working routings.

If you change the status of a work center so that it is no longer an outsourcing work
center, all outsourcing-specific information about the work center—the vendor ID,
the service item number, and the offset days—will be removed from the work center
record.

Adjusting work center capacity

Sometimes you’ll need to adjust the numbers used to calculate the capacity of the
work center as a result of changes to an employee record or a machine. For example,
if an employee has completed training, you might want to increase his or her
efficiency percentage. On the other hand, if a machine has become worn, you might
want to decrease its efficiency percentage.

Other changes also impact productivity. If a work center redesign reduces the delay
between operations, the work center might be able to add more work. You can
reflect an increase in work center efficiency by increasing the total hours available to
schedule.

The available work time of a work center also has an impact on the amount of work
that can be scheduled. If production of a certain work center will stop for a day of
training, for example, you’ll have fewer real “working” hours that can be
scheduled.

To adjust work center capacity:

1. Open the Work Center Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Setup)

2. Enter or select a work center.

3. Determine when the capacity adjustments should be effective.

• To have the change effective immediately, accept the date in the Display
Date field.

• To have the change effective on a date you specify, enter that date in the
Display Date field. If the display date you enter hasn’t already been used to
enter pending updates to this work center, a message will appear and you’ll
have the option to create a new record.

Refer to Timing for work center changes on page 24 for more information.

4. In the scrolling windows, select an employee ID or machine ID.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 27

PA RT 1 M A N U F A C T U R I N G C A R DS

5. Enter the available hours or efficiency for the employee or machine. Your
changes automatically will be saved.

6. If needed, update other fields in the window. You can change the effective
capacity of the employees or machines in the work center and the overload
percentage.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

Rules for deleting work centers

Because work centers and sites are closely related, you might want to delete the
associated site when you delete a work center. Refer to the following illustration for
information about rules that determine whether you can delete the work center, the
site, both, or neither.

Is the work center

used in any active
routing, planning
routing, or
operation?

Yes No

Work center can't be Are items assigned

deleted. to the site?

Yes No

Do you want to
delete the site?

No Yes

Work center deleted, Is the site:

site is left intact. - the default draw-from site for sales
orders?
- part of any manufacturing order
scheduling preference?
- the issue-to or issue-from site for any
billl of materials?
- the issue-to or issue-from site for any
picklist or pick document for a
manufacturing order with a status other
than closed, hold, or canceled?
- the issue-to or issue-from site for any
manufacturing order with a status other
than closed, hold, or canceled?
- the QA site?
- the default issue-to or issue-from site
for any master production schedule?

One or more are true None are true

The site and the work

center are deleted.

28 M A N U F A C TU R I N G C O R E F U N C T I O N S
 C H A P T E R 2 WORK CENTERS

For more information about deleting site records—including the rules that apply and
changes you can make so the site can be deleted—refer to Rules for deleting sites in
Manufacturing on page 29.

Deleting a work center record

You can’t delete a work center record if it’s part of a current active or planning
routing. You must remove all references to the work center from active and
planning routings before deleting it.

You also can’t delete a work center record if its associated site has one or more items
assigned to it. Refer to Inventory Control documentation for information about
unassigning items from a site.

To delete a work center record:

1. Open the Work Center Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Setup)

2. Enter or select a work center.

3. Choose Delete.

4. A message will appear to ensure you want to delete the work center. Choose
Delete.

5. Another message will appear to ensure you want to remove the work center
from the site file.

• If you choose Yes, the Item Site Maintenance window will open, displaying
the work center record. Choose Delete in the Item Site Maintenance
window. The record will be deleted from the site file. Close the Item Site
Maintenance window.

• If you choose No, the work center definition will continue to be part of the
site file.

6. Close the Work Center Setup window.

Rules for deleting sites in Manufacturing

If Manufacturing is not installed and you attempt to delete a site, several rules
apply. For example, the site can have no inventory quantities, and the site can’t be
part of an unposted transaction.

When Manufacturing is installed, additional conditions must be met before a site

can be deleted. For example, if you delete a site and a work center has been set up
for that site, the work center must also be eligible to be deleted.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 29

PA RT 1 MANUFACTURING CAR DS

Refer to the following table for more information about the Manufacturing-specific
rules. For information about inventory rules for deleting a site, refer to your
Inventory Control documentation.

If this is true: Refer to:

Site has associated work center Check planning routing sequences with the Routing Sequence
that is part of a planning or Entry window.
manufacturing order routing, or Check manufacturing order routing sequences with the
an operation. Manufacturing Order Routing Sequence Edit window.
Check operations with the Operations Setup window.
Site is the default draw-from site Change the Default Draw Inventory From site in the
for sales orders. Manufacturing Series Sales Order Preferences window.
Site is part of any manufacturing Check manufacturing order scheduling preferences in the
order scheduling preference. Scheduling Preferences window.
Site is the issue-to or issue-from Check bills of materials in the Bill of Materials Entry window.
site for any bill of materials.
Site is the issue-to or issue-from Check picklist in the Picklist window.
site for any picklist for a
manufacturing order when the
status of the manufacturing
order is not Closed, Hold, or
Canceled.
Site is the issue-to or issue-from Check pick documents in the Manufacturing Component
site for any pick document for a Transaction Entry window.
manufacturing order when the
status of the manufacturing
order is not Closed, Hold, or
Canceled.
Site is the issue-to or issue-from Check manufacturing orders in the Manufacturing Order Entry
site for any manufacturing order window.
with a status other than Closed,
Hold, or Canceled.
Site is the QA site. Check the QA Site ID in the QA Preference Defaults window.
Site is the default issue-to or Check the sites for the master production plans with the
issue-from site for any master Manufacturing Order Options window, which is available
production plan. through the Master Production Scheduling window.

Work center calendars

A shop calendar is a company-wide definition of your company’s production days
and “down days”—weekends, holidays, and other days when the production line
isn’t running. A work center calendar defines production days and down days for a
specific work center within your company.

If the calendars for the work centers in your organization vary from one work
center to another—for example, if some work centers run three shifts and other
work centers run just one or two shifts—you can use the Work Center Calendar
window to make adjustments to the shop calendar. Each work center can have its
own work center calendar, but if the work center calendar is the same as the shop
calendar, you won’t need to set up work center calendars.

Changes to the shop calendar aren’t automatically reflected in the work center
calendars. If you already have work center calendars defined and then decide to
enter another down day in the shop calendar—maybe a company holiday or a
down day due to bad weather—you must make the same change in each of the
work center calendars.

30 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 WORK CENTERS

Refer to the following topics for more information:

• Defining a work center calendar on page 31

• Adjusting a work center calendar on page 32

Defining a work center calendar

Before you define work center calendars, you should have defined a calendar for
the organization using the Shop Calendar window. Use the Work Center Calendar
window to define work center calendars.

For information about shop calendars, refer to Shop calendars and Defining the shop
calendar, both in Chapter 1, “Manufacturing basic setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation.

Information from the shop calendar will be displayed in the work center calendar
because the shop calendar settings are the default settings for the work center
calendar. Down days are displayed with black backgrounds and white numbers; up
days—that is, days when production will occur—are displayed with white
backgrounds and black numbers.

To define a work center calendar:

1. Open the Work Center Calendar window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Calendar)

2. Enter or select a work center.

3. Select a month and year.

4. Make your calendar adjustments. Select a day in the calendar to change it from
a production day to a down day, or from a down day to a production day.

Each time you change the status of a date, a message will appear to indicate that
changing the work center calendar might affect work center scheduling.

If you make changes to the work center calendar that will affect the number of hours
available for scheduling work, be sure to regenerate your schedules so the changes are
appropriately reflected.

5. Choose OK and close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 31

PA RT 1 MANUFACTURING CAR DS

Adjusting a work center calendar

Use the Work Center Calendar window to update an existing work center calendar.
Information from the shop calendar will be displayed in the work center calendar,
because the shop calendar settings are the default settings for the work center
calendar. Down days are displayed with black backgrounds and white numbers;
production days are displayed with white backgrounds and black numbers.

To adjust a work center calendar:

1. Open the Work Center Calendar window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Calendar)

2. Enter or select the work center with the calendar to adjust.

3. Select a month and year.

4. Make your calendar adjustments. Select a day in the calendar to change it from
a production day to a down day, or from a down day to a production day.

Each time you change the status of a date, a message will appear to indicate that
changing the work center calendar might affect work center scheduling.

If you make changes to the work center calendar that will affect the number of hours
available for scheduling work, be sure to regenerate your schedules so the changes are
appropriately reflected.

5. Choose OK and close the window.

Designating alternate work centers

If you have work centers that become over-scheduled or for some reason can’t
accommodate assigned tasks, you can designate alternate work centers that can be
used to handle some of the overflow. You can use the Alternate Work Centers
window to specify alternate work centers for any work center in your organization.

This procedure assumes that the work centers you’re working with here—both the work
center you’re defining the alternates for and the work centers you’re designating as
alternates—already have been defined.

32 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 WORK CENTERS

To designate alternate work centers:

1. Open the Alternate Work Centers window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Alternates)

2. Enter or select the work center to specify alternates for.

3. To assign more than one alternate work center to the work center displayed at
the top of the window, enter a number in the Preference Order field in the first
empty line in the scrolling window.

You can assign a preference order to determine how overflow work will be
scheduled among the alternate work centers. An alternate work center with a
preference order of “1” will be considered first, “2” would be considered
second, and so on. Refer to Specifying preferred alternate work center order on
page 33 for more information.

4. Use the Work Center lookup button in the scrolling window to select an
alternate work center.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to designate other alternate work centers. Entries in the
scrolling window will be saved.

6. Close the window.

Specifying preferred alternate work center order

If you’ve defined several alternate work centers, you must designate the preference
order for the alternates. The preference order determines the order in which the
alternates will be considered—the first alternate work center will be used first. If
there is additional work to assign to another work center the second alternate will
be used, then the third and so on.

Use the Alternate Work Centers window to specify or adjust the preference order
for alternate work centers.

To specify preferred alternate work center order:

1. Open the Alternate Work Centers window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Alternates)

2. Enter or select the work center that has the alternate work centers assigned to it.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 33

PA RT 1 MANUFACTURING CAR DS

3. In the scrolling window, mark an alternate work center and enter the new
preference order for this alternate. You can’t use a preference order number
already assigned to another work center. To update several preference orders,
you can assign temporary values to each alternate site until you reestablish the
correct preference order.

4. Continue updating alternate work center preference order numbers, as needed.

Your changes in the scrolling window will be saved.

5. Close the window.

Deleting alternate work centers

Use the Alternate Work Centers window to remove alternates from work centers.

To delete alternate work centers:

1. Open the Alternate Work Centers window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Alternates)

2. In the scrolling window, mark the alternate work center to delete.

3. From the Edit menu choose Delete Row. Your changes automatically will be
saved.

4. Close the window.

Skill sets and work centers

If you’re using Microsoft Dynamics GP Human Resources, you can define the skills
that your company is seeking in its employees. Microsoft Dynamics GP Human
Resources includes windows for defining skills—individual tasks or areas of
expertise that might be required in several areas of the organization—and for
defining skill sets. Skill sets are groups of related skills. Your company might define
one skill set for office support personnel focusing on computer skills or familiarity
with office protocol. Other skill sets might be defined for your production
employees. For example, employees in a quality assurance work center might need
to know how to calibrate test equipment, to sample lots correctly, and to complete
special tests.

If you have both Manufacturing and Human Resources installed, you can apply
skill sets to work center definitions. You can use the Work Center Skill Assignment
window to assign skill sets defined in Human Resources to employee records in
work centers.

Assigning skill requirements to work centers

Use the Work Center Skill Assignment window to assign skill sets to the
requirements for employees in work centers.

You must be using Human Resources to apply skill sets to your work centers.

34 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 WORK CENTERS

To assign skill requirements to work centers:

1. Open the Work Center Skill Assignment window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Work Centers >> Skills)

2. Enter or select the work center to add skill requirements to. All the skill sets that
have been defined for your organization will be displayed in the scrolling
window.

3. Mark the Assigned option for each skill set that’s required for this work center.
Your entries automatically will be saved.

4. Close the window.

You also can query employee skill records in your organization to find which employees
have the skills necessary for working in a particular work center. Refer to your Human
Resources documentation for more information.

Next steps
After you’ve defined work centers, you can define the operations that can be
performed in each work center. Operations—also called operation codes and op
codes—are the most basic components of routings. The operations you define for
each work center can be a type of template as you begin to create routings that
describe your manufacturing processes. For more information, refer to Chapter 3,
“Operations.”

If you have work centers that complete basically the same task for most of the
routings in your organization, you might want to define pointer routings. For
example, if you have a work center that handles all packaging and shipping tasks,
you can create a pointer routing for those tasks. For more information, refer to
Pointer routings in Chapter 5, “Pointer routings,” in the Manufacturing Production
Functions documentation.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 35

36 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 3: Operations
After you’ve created work centers and have assigned machine and employee
records to them, you can define operations—or “op codes”—for each work center.
An operation can be anything that changes the product or even measures the
product, such as an electrical test. An operation might be a setup routine,
preparation of items for the next sequence, or any other task element required for
the completion of a task within a work center.

Operation codes are optional. They are routing sequence templates, however, and
can make entering routing sequence information quicker and more accurate if you
have many similar routing sequences.

For example, a painting work center might have a setup operation. That setup
operation definition would include information such as setup time, labor time,
machine time, and the required labor codes for setup and labor. That operation code
would be linked to the work center definition. When you need to define a routing
sequence for setup in that work center, you can select this operation code. You can
use the default information that is part of the operation code, or you can adjust it for
each routing sequence.

Use the Operations Setup window to define operations linked to specific work
centers.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Operations terms
• Creating an operation
• Modifying operation definitions
• Attaching drawings to operation codes
• Deleting operation codes

Operations terms
Refer here for information about some of the terms related to operation codes.

Operation A specific task within the manufacturing plant. Examples of

operations are assembly, painting, shipping and receiving.

Setup labor code Identifies the skill requirements for the person preparing the
work area prior to starting production in the work center.

Run labor code Identifies the skill requirements to perform the operation as
defined.

Setup time The number of hours needed to prepare the work area.

Labor time The number of employee hours required to complete the operation.

Machine time The number of machine hours needed to complete the operation.

Queue time The time spent waiting for the operation to begin.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 37

PA RT 1 MANUFACTURING CAR DS

Move time The time needed to physically move an item to the next operation.

Cycle time The time required to complete one item in a manufacturing order.

Creating an operation
Use the Operations Setup window to create operations applied to specific work
centers.

To create an operation:
1. Open the Operations Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Routings >> Operations)

2. Enter or select a work center.

3. Enter an operation code—sometimes labeled “op code” in Manufacturing—to

be a unique identifier for this operation.

4. Enter a brief description of the operation code.

5. Enter the amount of time needed for setup, labor, machine, queue, move, and
cycle times.

6. Enter or select labor codes for setup and run labor.

If you’re using one of the labor cost buckets for outsourcing and you selected an
outsourcing work center, you must select an outsourcing labor code.

7. If labor or machine costs for this operation should be auto-backflushed—

automatically added to the costs of the project without requiring data
collection—mark the auto-backflush options.

8. If a machine is needed for the operation, enter or select the machine.

If the machine hasn’t been assigned to the work center, a message will appear,
and you’ll have the option to use it, anyway. Choose Yes to add the machine to
the operation. Choose No to cancel your selection.

38 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 3 OPERATIONS

If you’re using one of the machine cost buckets for outsourcing and you
selected an outsourcing work center, you must enter a machine ID.

For information about attaching drawing or other electronic media files to operation
codes, refer to Attaching drawings to operation codes on page 39.

9. If you’ve set up user-defined fields for work centers, you can enter values in
those fields.

Refer to Setting up work center options in Chapter 1, “Manufacturing basic setup,”

in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information about creating
user-defined fields for work centers

10. Choose Insert to link the operation to the work center record. Your entries
automatically will be saved when added to the scrolling window.

11. Close the window.

Modifying operation definitions

Use the Operations Setup window to change your operation definitions.

To modify operation definitions:

1. Open the Operations Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Routings >> Operations)

2. Enter or select a work center.

3. In the scrolling window, mark the operation code you want to change and
choose Select.

4. Make your changes, as needed.

5. Choose Insert to add the updated record to the scrolling window. Your changes
automatically will be saved when they’re added to the scrolling window.

6. Close the window.

Attaching drawings to operation codes

If you have drawings, schematics, multimedia files, or other graphic files that will
help employees do their tasks, you can attach the files to the operation definition.
Use the Operations Setup window to do this.

Before you can attach files to operation codes, you must define drawings and drawing
groups. Refer to Chapter 4, “Drawings.”

If you’re attaching graphic or other media files to your operations, be sure the
computers that will be used to view these files have the appropriate viewing
software installed. Paths to the viewing applications must be established for each
computer that will be used to view the files. Refer to Setting up INI user settings in
Chapter 7, “Manufacturing basic user setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation for more information.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 39

PA RT 1 MANUFACTURING CAR DS

To attach drawings to operation codes:

1. Open the Operations Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Routings >> Operations)

2. Enter or select a work center.

3. In the scrolling window, mark the operation code to which you want to attach a
drawing and choose Select.

4. Select a drawing group to attach to the operation.

5. Choose Insert to move the record to the scrolling window. Your changes
automatically will be saved as they are added to the scrolling window.

6. Close the window.

Deleting operation codes

If you find that you have no use for an operation code in a specific work center, you
can delete it.

You can’t delete an operation code if it is part of an active or planning routing.

To delete operation codes:

1. Open the Operations Setup window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Routings >> Operations)

2. Enter or select a work center.

3. In the scrolling window, mark the operation code to delete and choose Remove.
Your changes automatically will be saved.

4. Close the window.

40 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 4: Drawings
Pictures—including computer-aided graphics, diagrams and multimedia files—can
be invaluable in communicating the specifications of your component or finished-
good items, or in explaining how to perform specific procedures within
manufacturing operations. You can link drawings and other files to items, routing
sequences and operations to be viewed by users throughout your organization as
their work is affected by a particular item or procedure.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Drawings terms
• Drawings and drawing groups
• Adding a drawing to a drawing group
• Attaching a drawing to a record
• Deleting a drawing
• Removing a drawing from a drawing group
• Viewing a drawing directly
• Viewing a drawing attached to a record

Drawings terms
Refer here for information about some of the terms related to drawings.

Drawings Drawings in Manufacturing can be almost any electronic file you can
link to an item record, operation, or routing sequence.

Drawing groups Drawing groups are categories of drawings. Each drawing can
be linked to multiple drawing groups.

Drawings and drawing groups

You’ll need to define drawing groups—categories of drawings—and then add
drawings to those groups. Each drawing can be part of more than one drawing
group. For example, a computer manufacturer might want to store electronic files
that show the specifications of a 128MB RAM module. The module might be part of
a drawing group called “RAM” that includes all the different modules used by the
manufacturer, and it also might be part of a group of drawings that are all part of a
specific computer model.

To view the drawing or other media files you attach to your items, routing
sequences and operations, the appropriate viewing software must be installed on
the computer you’ll use to view the files. You also need to be sure that the INI
settings for each computer where files will be viewed have been properly set. Refer
to Setting up INI user settings in Chapter 7, “Manufacturing basic user setup,” in the
Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information.

Adding a drawing to a drawing group

Use the Drawings window to create drawing groups. The procedure for doing this
includes assigning drawing names to the drawing files and recording basic
information about the drawing.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 41

PA RT 1 MANUFACTURING CAR DS

To add a drawing to a drawing group:

1. Open the Drawings window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Drawings)

2. Enter a name for the drawing. You also can enter a brief description for the
drawing, note the designer, and enter the creation date. To enter more
information about the drawing, use the notes button.

3. Select the drawing type. The drawing type determines which of the viewing
applications you’ve defined for each computer will be used to view this
particular file. For example, if you have several kinds of electronic files to attach
to items or operations, you can attach CAD schematics to item files and
multimedia .AVI files to operations to illustrate how a specific task is to be
done.

4. Choose the folder button and browse to find the location of the specific drawing
file.

5. You can enter a short code to enter the drawing size or type in the Drawing
Type field. If you need special-sized paper to print the drawing, for example,
you could note the required paper size.

6. Determine which drawing group to add this drawing to.

• If the drawing group already exists, use the lookup button on the Drawing
Groups field and then select it.

• If the drawing group doesn’t exist, enter the name for the new drawing
group in the Drawing Groups field.

7. Choose Insert to add the drawing to the drawing group displayed in the
Drawing Groups field. Your entries automatically will be saved as they are
added to the scrolling window.

8. Close the window.

42 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 4 DRAWINGS

Attaching a drawing to a record

Refer to these topics for information about linking drawing groups to records
throughout Manufacturing.

• Attaching a drawing to an item on page 71

• Attaching drawings to operation codes on page 39
• Attaching a drawing to a sequence in Chapter 2, “Routing entry,” in the
Manufacturing Production Functions documentation
• Attaching a drawing to an inspection procedure in Chapter 4, “Inspection
procedures,” in the Manufacturing Management Functions documentation

Deleting a drawing
If a drawing becomes obsolete you can remove it from your Manufacturing records.

This procedure doesn’t remove the drawing from your computer system, but deletes the
information about the drawing in the Manufacturing records. The actual electronic drawing
file will remain in your system.

To delete a drawing:
1. Open the Drawings window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Drawings)

2. Enter or select a drawing.

3. Choose Delete and close the window.

Removing a drawing from a drawing group

Occasionally you might need to remove a drawing from a drawing group. Use the
Drawings window to remove drawings from groups.

To remove a drawing from a drawing group:

1. Open the Drawings window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Drawings)

2. Enter or select a drawing.

3. In the Drawing Groups scrolling window, mark the drawing group from which
you want to remove this drawing.

4. Choose Remove.

5. Choose Save and close the window.

Viewing a drawing directly

After you’ve specified the storage location and drawing type for a drawing, you can
view the drawing. You can use this procedure to view drawings if you don’t know
what Manufacturing record the drawing is attached to.

This procedure assumes that INI settings have been set for the computer on which
you’re viewing the drawings, and that the appropriate viewing software is properly
installed.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 43

PA RT 1 MANUFACTURING CAR DS

Refer to Setting up INI user settings in Chapter 7, “Manufacturing basic user setup,”
in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information.

To view a drawing directly:

1. Open the Drawings window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Drawings)

2. Enter or select a drawing to view.

3. Choose the small blue and gray image icon button on the Drawing Name field.
The software for the type of drawing you’re viewing opens and displays the
drawing you’ve specified.

Viewing a drawing attached to a record

Use this procedure to view drawings attached to Manufacturing records, such as
item records, manufacturing orders, and routing sequences.

This procedure assumes that INI settings have been set for the computer on which
you’re viewing the drawings, and that the appropriate viewing software is properly
installed. Refer to Setting up INI user settings in Chapter 7, “Manufacturing basic
user setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information.

To view a drawing attached to a record:

1. Choose the image icon button or an expansion icon for a Drawing Group in any
of the windows listed in the table to open the View Drawings window.

Refer to the table for more information.

Window Path
Sales Configurator Transactions >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator
Routing Sequence Entry Cards >> Manufacturing >> Routings >> Routing Entry
Routing View Closeup Inquiry >> Manufacturing >> Routings >> View >> mark a
sequence >> Zoom button

If no drawing has been attached to the record, the View Drawings window won’t display
any information.

2. Determine the kind of drawing information to view.

44 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 4 DRAWINGS

To view the drawing Highlight the drawing name in the scrolling window
and choose the image icon button. The viewing software will open and display
the attached file.

To view information about the drawing Highlight the drawing name in

the scrolling window and choose the zoom icon button. The Drawings window
will open and display more information about the drawing file.

3. When you’ve finished viewing information, close the windows.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 45

46 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
PART 2: ITEM EXTENSIONS
 Part 2: Item extensions
This part of the documentation includes information that will help you set up and
maintain the extensions Manufacturing adds to Inventory Control. The setup
procedures generally need to be completed once, but you can refer to this
information at other times for instructions on modifying or viewing existing entries.

When you install Manufacturing, new windows will be added to your system, and
some existing Inventory Control windows might be modified. This part of the
documentation describes the special considerations you’ll need to make as you
work with inventory issues and Manufacturing. You also should refer to your
Inventory Control documentation.

The following information is discussed:

• Chapter 5, “Item extensions overview,” describes how Manufacturing extends

Inventory Control. Definitions of basic terms and concepts are also included.

• Chapter 6, “Item classes,” contains information about how you can use item
classes to make entering information in Manufacturing easier.

• Chapter 7, “Manufacturing accounts,” includes information about specifying

additional, manufacturing-specific accounts for items.

• Chapter 8, “Item engineering data,” describes the tasks that can be completed
using the Item Engineering Data window.

• Chapter 9, “Standard costing revaluations,” provides information about setting

up your system for using standard costing. Information about rolling up and
revaluing inventoried items also is included.

48 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 5: Item extensions overview
Manufacturing companies need to track more detailed information about items
than other companies might need. For example, whether an item is manufactured
or purchased is an important part of tracking information for manufacturing
organizations.

Inventory Control helps you to define how items are bought and sold. When you
add Manufacturing to your system, however, you’ll have more ways to record
information about your items. Some Inventory Control windows—such as Item
Quantities Maintenance—will include more fields or more options when you add
Manufacturing.

Manufacturing also includes information specifically for use in standard costing

environments. You can enter information about the cost and overhead of standard
cost items, you can create “what-if” scenarios for adjusting those costs, and you can
revalue standard cost items.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Inventory and Manufacturing documentation

• Item terms
• Item statuses
• Replenishment methods
• Fulfillment methods
• Standard costing

Inventory and Manufacturing documentation

Refer to the following table of windows to learn where you can find additional
information about items.

Some of these windows are Inventory Control windows and are described in the
Inventory Control documentation. Others have slight modifications—such as the
addition of fields; in-depth information about those windows also is in the
Inventory Control documentation, with some specific procedures included in this
documentation. Still other windows are specific to Manufacturing and are
described fully in this documentation.

Window Documentation source

Item Account Maintenance window Microsoft Dynamics GP Inventory
Item Class Setup window Control documentation
Item Maintenance Options window
Item Maintenance window
Item Quantities Maintenance window
Item Resource Planning Maintenance window
Resource Planning Site Maintenance window
Alternate Items window Manufacturing Core Functions
Item Account Maintenance - Costing window documentation
Item Class Fulfillment Extras window
Item Engineering Data window
Manufacturing Series Item Class Extras window
Standard Item Class Overhead Defaults window

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 49

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Item terms
Several terms specific to items in a manufacturing setting are used to describe how
you’ll work with Manufacturing.

Subassembly Subassemblies are combinations of raw materials that aren’t

finished products, but that are part of a larger finished good. For a phone
manufacturer, one of the components of a finished phone might be a circuit board
with many electrical components placed upon it.

Component Components—also called raw materials—are items that are used to

build products. They can be individual items like nuts, screws and diodes, or they
can be subassemblies.

Finished goods Finished goods are the final products that a company sells.

Setup cost Setup cost is the cost of preparing a work area before production
begins. For instance, the cost of calibrating machines, gathering the necessary tools
and resources, and completing any trial runs of processes might be included in the
setup cost. You can specify a setup cost only for items that are manufactured.

Lead time Lead time is the minimum amount of time required for production of
an item. You can use the Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times window or the MFG/
Lead Times window to calculate lead time for an item. Refer to the following topics:

• Calculating lead time for an item unit on page 71

• Calculating lead time for quantities on page 72

Primary routing The primary routing is the routing that is most commonly used
in the manufacturing of an item. Your primary routing, for example, might assume
that all processes involved in the manufacturing of an item will be automated, but
you also can create other routings that can be used if some processes must be
handled manually. The primary routing is the routing that is used to estimate
production times for an item.

Serial- or lot-number–tracked item If an item is assigned a unique identifier

(which can be letters, numbers or a combination of letters and numbers), it is a
serial-number–tracked item. If an item is part of a group and the group is assigned a
unique identifier, the items are lot-number–tracked items.

Item statuses
In Inventory Control, you can assign item types—such as Sales Inventory,
Discontinued, and Services—to items. These item types affect what you can do with
the item records. For example, you can’t assign a price list to an item unless its item
type is Sales Inventory or Discontinued. To manufacture an item—that is, to create a
manufacturing order for an item—its status must be Sales Inventory.

In Manufacturing, you also can assign statuses to items. Like item types, item
statuses affect what you can do with an item.

50 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 5 ITEM EXTENSIONS OVERVIEW

Refer to the following table for information about the item statuses that are
available.

Status Use
Active status Select Active status for items that are part of your current
processes. Items must have Active status before you can create
purchase orders or manufacturing orders for them.
Inactive status Select Inactive status for items that aren’t currently part of your
process. Some companies use the Inactive status as a step
toward making items obsolete.
Obsolete status Select Obsolete status for items that were once part of your
processes, but aren’t any longer. You can’t open manufacturing
orders or purchase orders for items with this status.
Prerelease status Select Prerelease status for items that you’ve entered but that
you don’t want to be generally available yet. Some companies
might enter item records for products under development, for
example, keeping their status at Prerelease until the product is
ready for production.
Released status Released status is the same as Active status. You can select this
item status for items that are part of your current processes.
Service status When you create an item with the Service item type in the Item
Maintenance window, the corresponding record automatically is
created for the Item Engineering Data window with Service
status. These items can be used to track the costs of outsourcing
services.

Replenishment methods
In Inventory Control, you can specify how each item should be replenished. You
can use the Item Resource Planning Maintenance window to specify whether each
item should be Make, Buy, or Make or Buy. Depending on the replenishment
method you’ve selected, you can enter more information about how the item should
be made or purchased.

The Item Resource Planning Maintenance window allows you to choose a different
replenishment method for each item-site combination. For example, you might purchase
widgets for the North site, but make widgets for the South site. The replenishment method
you specify in Item Resource Planning is the method used by MRP.

The replenishment method specified in Item Resource Planning is the method that
MRP will look at. The replenishment method specified on Item Engineering is only
used by the BOM module. This is needed because specifying a site on a BOM is not
required so it is not possible to get this value from Item Resource Planning.

Manufacturing extends the available replenishment methods.

Make items Make or made items are any items that are manufactured or
produced by your organization. Made items can be finished goods or can be
subassemblies you use to produce other manufactured items.

Buy items Any items—including finished goods, raw materials and

subassemblies—that are purchased for use or for sale are buy or bought items.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 51

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Make or Buy items Make or Buy items are those that can be bought or
manufactured by your company. For example, a furniture manufacturer might use
wood pieces cut to specific sizes in its manufacturing process. If the furniture
company can either purchase the pieces from a vendor or can buy wood stock and
cut its own pieces, then those pieces could be “make or buy items.

Fulfillment methods
If an item’s replenishment method is Make or Make or Buy, you can select a
fulfillment method for the item. A fulfillment method determines what events will
cause a manufacturing order to be started. The two usual fulfillment methods are
Make to Stock and Make to Order, but Manufacturing includes two types of the
Make to Order method.

Fulfillment methods are combined with manufacturing sales order processing

preferences to determine how manufacturing orders are generated. Refer to
Manufacturing orders generated from sales on page 168 for more information.

Make to Stock When make-to-stock items are sold, the quantities required to
fulfill the sales order are taken from inventory quantities. Manufacturing orders are
used to keep inventory levels up so that sales orders can be fulfilled.

Make to Order–Manual When make-to-order items are sold, manufacturing

orders to build the items required to fulfill the manufacturing orders are created.
Manufacturing orders respond to specific sales orders. Select Make to Order–
Manual to have sales order entry processes include options for creating
manufacturing orders. Sales order line requirements for items of this type should be
met with specific manufacturing orders.

Make to Order–Manual is the recommended fulfillment method for finished goods that are
sold or configured using the Sales Configurator.

Make to Order–Silent When make-to-order items are sold, manufacturing

orders to build the items required to fulfill the manufacturing orders are created.
Manufacturing orders respond to specific sales orders. Select Make to Order–Silent
if manufacturing orders should be started automatically in response to sales orders.
Sales order line requirements for items of this type should be met with specific
manufacturing orders.

Standard costing
Standard costing is an accounting method used by some businesses. Standard
costing values inventory at a cost based on the standard cost assigned to an item,
plus eight other factors:

• Fixed material overhead

• Variable material overhead
• Labor costs
• Fixed labor overhead
• Variable labor overhead
• Machine costs
• Fixed machine overhead
• Variable machine overhead

Items that have standard costs use a periodic valuation method. That is, the minor
day-to-day changes in the costs of materials aren’t reflected in the cost of inventory.

52 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 5 ITEM EXTENSIONS OVERVIEW

Instead, costs are assigned to inventory items that are adjusted or revalued
periodically—usually semiannually or annually.

You can use utilities in Inventory Control to update cost information for bought
items. You must use Manufacturing windows to update cost information for
manufactured items, so that the changes to the cost of the components is “rolled up”
appropriately to the cost of the finished item.

For more information about revaluing standard cost items, refer to Chapter 9, “Standard
costing revaluations.”

When you install Manufacturing, several windows related to entering and

maintaining information for a standard cost environment are included. Windows
for “rolling up” standard costs and “revaluing” inventory—two important
processes in maintaining a standard cost system—are also included.

Rolling up Rolling up is the process of applying calculations based on changes to

standard cost information to items. If you change the cost of a raw material that is
part of several subassemblies and finished goods, “rolling up” that change will
result in calculations that will determine the new standard costs of the
subassemblies and finished goods. Rolling up helps you to view the effects of
standard cost changes before actually applying the costs to items.

Revaluing Revaluing is the process of finalizing rolled-up standard cost changes.

Revaluing replaces existing standard cost information with new standard cost
information. The new information will be used in your accounting processes.

As you change your standard cost information, you might roll up costs several
times, but probably will revalue items only at certain points.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 53

54 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 6: Item classes
Item classes are groups of item records that you set up in Inventory Control. You
can specify default settings for each class, such as methods for calculating labor and
material overhead and order policies. You then can “roll down” those entries so
they’re reflected in existing item records in each class. The default setting entries
will be applied to new items added to each class. You can also enter default settings
for item class characteristics, such as item types and valuation methods. If you have
a large number of items to enter, you can create item classes with default entries to
speed up the entry process.

Refer to your Inventory Control documentation for more information about creating item
classes.

Manufacturing extends the use of the item classes. This information is divided into
the following sections:

• Specifying accounts for an item class

• Specifying a fulfillment method for an item class
• Setting up shipping history for an item class
• Defining overhead for a standard cost item class

Specifying accounts for an item class

Items involved in manufacturing processes—whether they are components or
finished goods—require additional accounts. Manufacturing includes windows you
can use to specify these additional accounts for item classes involved in your
manufacturing processes.

You can use the Item Class Accounts Setup - Costing window to specify accounts
for an item class. The accounts you specify in this window will be the default
manufacturing accounts for new items that you enter that are assigned to the class.
You can change the default manufacturing accounts for each item, if needed. Refer
to Chapter 7, “Manufacturing accounts,” for more information.

This procedure assumes that you’ve already created the item class. For more information
about creating an item class, refer to Inventory Control documentation.

To specify accounts for an item class:

1. Open the Item Class Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Setup >> Inventory >> Item Class)

2. Enter or select the item class to assign manufacturing accounts to. Be sure to
note the valuation method for the item class.

3. Choose Accounts.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 55

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

The Item Class Accounts Setup window opens, and the Item Class Accounts
Setup - Costing window opens behind it.

Refer to Inventory Control documentation for information about specifying accounts for
an item class in the Item Class Accounts Setup window.

4. Enter or select the applicable accounts.

The accounts you’ll need to specify for an item class depend on the valuation
method for the item class. Refer to Overview of accounts on page 61 for
information about the accounts.

56 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A PT E R 6 ITEM CLASSES

Refer to the table for more information about accounts and how they’re used.

Accounts Description Cost type

Standard Cost Revaluation Used for standard
Applied - Material Fixed OH Overhead costs for standard cost cost items—those
with a periodic
Applied - Material Var. OH components are applied to the
valuation method.
applied accounts.
Variance - Labor Differences between actual costs Used for both
Variance - Labor Fixed OH and standard costs for each cost actual and
Variance - Labor Var. OH bucket are applied to the variance standard cost
Variance - Machine accounts. items. Actual cost
Variance - Mach. Fixed OH items are those
with a perpetual
Variance - Mach. Var. OH
valuation method.
Variance - Material
Variance - Mat. Fixed OH
Variance - Mat. Var. OH
WIP - Material Costs for materials and labor and
WIP - Material Fixed OH machine time, plus their associated
WIP - Material Var. OH overhead amounts, are applied to
WIP - Labor work in process (WIP) accounts
WIP - Labor Fixed OH when they are designated for a
specific manufacturing order.
WIP - Labor Var. OH
WIP - Machine
WIP - Machine Fixed OH
WIP - Machine Var. OH
CoGS - Material
CoGS - Material Fixed OH
CoGS - Material Var. OH
CoGS - Labor
CoGS - Labor Fixed OH
CoGS - Labor Var. OH
CoGS - Machine
CoGS - Machine Fixed OH
CoGS - Machine Var. OH
Inventory - Material Fixed OH
Inventory - Material Var. OH
Inventory - Labor
Inventory - Labor Fixed OH
Inventory - Labor Var. OH
Inventory - Machine
Inventory - Machine Fixed OH
Inventory - Machine Var. OH

Each account selection is saved as it’s added to the scrolling window.

You can use the Clear Account button to clear an account selection that isn’t needed, or
you can use the Undo Changes button to undo all changes you’ve made in the window.

5. When you’ve finished, close the window.

If you’re setting up default accounts for an item class for standard cost items,
you also can use the Standard Item Class Overhead Defaults window to specify
the default method for calculating overhead for items in the class. For more
information, refer to Defining overhead for a standard cost item class on page 59.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 57

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Specifying a fulfillment method for an item class

Use the Manufacturing Series Item Class Extras window to choose a default
fulfillment method for item classes.

Only made items—items you manufacture or produce in your business—will be

affected by the fulfillment method selection.

This procedure assumes that you’ve already created the item class. For more information
about creating an item class, refer to your Inventory Control documentation.

To specify a fulfillment option for an item class:

1. Open the Item Class Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Setup >> Inventory >> Item Class)

2. Enter or select an item class.

3. From the Additional menu, choose Manufacturing Item Class Extras to open
the Manufacturing Series Item Class Extras window.

4. Select a fulfillment method for items in the class. For more information about
fulfillment methods, refer to Fulfillment methods on page 52.

5. Choose OK. A message will be displayed and you’ll have the option to roll
down changes to all items in this class.

• Choose Yes if the existing fulfillment method information for all items in
this class should be changed to the fulfillment method you’ve selected here.

• Choose No if the item records that are included in this class shouldn’t be
updated. Only subsequently entered records will be affected.

Setting up shipping history for an item class

Use the Item Class Fulfillment Extras window to indicate if shipping history should
be maintained for the items in a specific class. You must set up options to track
shipping history if you plan to use Manufacturing’s order fulfillment features to
review how sales order line-item requirements have been fulfilled.

This procedure assumes that you’ve already created the item class. For more information
about creating an item class, refer to your Inventory Control documentation.

To set up shipping history for an item class:

1. Open the Item Class Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Setup >> Inventory >> Item Class)

2. Enter or select an item class.

58 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A PT E R 6 ITEM CLASSES

3. From the Additional menu, choose Item Class Fulfillment Extra to open the
Item Class Fulfillment Extras window.

4. Mark Maintain Shipping History to begin tracking shipping history for items in
this item class.

5. Choose OK. A message will appear, and you’ll have the option to roll down
changes to all items in this class.

• Choose Yes to begin tracking shipping history information for all items in
this class.

• Choose No if the existing item records in this class shouldn’t be updated.

Only subsequently entered records will be affected by your settings.

Defining overhead for a standard cost item class

If you’re using standard costing in your business, you can specify default methods
for calculating fixed and variable overhead costs. Use the Standard Item Class
Overhead Defaults window to complete this procedure.

To define item class standard cost overhead:

1. Open the Item Class Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Setup >> Inventory >> Item Class)

2. Enter or select an item class.

3. From the Additional menu, choose Stnd Item Class Ohd Defaults to open the
Standard Item Class Overhead Defaults window.

4. Determine how fixed overhead for items in this item class will be calculated.

Amount If you mark Amount, enter the amount per base unit of measure of
the item to be used for fixed overhead costs.

Percent If you mark Percent, enter the percentage of the standard cost of the
item to be used for fixed overhead costs.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 59

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

5. Determine how variable overhead for this item class will be calculated.

Amount If you mark Amount, enter the amount per base unit of measure of
the item to be used for variable overhead costs.

Percent If you mark Percent, enter the percentage of the standard cost of the
item to be used for variable overhead costs.

6. Choose Save. A message will be displayed and you’ll have the option to roll
down the changes to items in this class.

• Choose Yes to update existing overhead information for all items in this
class to the overhead information you’ve entered.

• Choose No if the existing item records in this class shouldn’t be updated.

Only subsequently entered records will be affected by your settings.

60 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 7: Manufacturing accounts
Items involved in manufacturing processes—whether they are components,
subassemblies, or finished goods—require additional accounts. Manufacturing
includes windows you can use to specify additional accounts for items used in your
manufacturing processes.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Overview of accounts
• Actual and standard cost items
• Specifying Manufacturing accounts

Overview of accounts
As you’re setting up manufacturing accounts for items or item classes, it’s helpful to
understand how the accounts are used.

Material Overhead Applied accounts These are liability accounts. They are
used only for standard cost bought items that have associated fixed or variable
overhead costs. They are liability accounts and are credited when a purchase order
is received. The credit balance must be offset when the bills for the associated
overhead expenses are paid. These bills could include rent, purchase payroll, or
depreciation for warehouse equipment.

Inventory accounts These are balance sheet accounts and have a debit balance.
Their value is attributable to your overall inventory value. They are used for
standard cost items where overhead is being tracked and calculated as a result of
the overall cost of the finished good.

Cost Of Goods Sold (COGS) accounts These accounts are income statement
accounts that are treated as an expense, and they have a debit balance. These
accounts show the value of sold inventory. With standard costing you can separate
the costs of material, labor, machine, and the various overhead amounts into
buckets.

Work In Process (WIP) accounts These accounts are balance sheet accounts
and have a debit balance. They show the value of work in progress. For
manufacturers, the value of inventory can be broken into three components: raw
materials, work in progress, and finished goods. WIP amounts typically reflect
labor and machine time used to produce the finished good.

Variance accounts These accounts are expense accounts and appear on income
statements. They have a debit balance. Variance accounts are used for standard cost
items. You can use them to spot deviations between actual costs and standard costs.
Variances can be used to pinpoint where materials, labor, machine costs, or
overhead amounts were greater or less than expected.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 61

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Actual and standard cost items

Before you enter accounts, you should be aware of the following terms.

Actual cost items Actual cost items are those that have a perpetual valuation
method. The cost of these items comes from the Current Cost field in the Item
Maintenance window. Current Cost is the cost that is used for the general ledger
transactions of actual cost items.

Standard cost items Standard cost items have a periodic valuation method.
The “total” cost for these items comes from the Standard Cost field in the Item
Maintenance window. You also can view the breakdown of the cost—the amounts
of the item cost that come from material, labor and machine costs and overhead—in
the Standard Cost Maintenance window. When you’re working with standard cost
items, the broken-out costs are the costs used for general ledger transactions.
Broken-out costs can include:

• Material
• Material Fixed Overhead
• Material Variable Overhead
• Labor
• Labor Fixed Overhead
• Labor Variable Overhead
• Machine
• Machine Fixed Overhead
• Machine Variable Overhead

Specifying Manufacturing accounts

Most items involved in manufacturing processes require more accounts than other
inventoried items. For example, you need work in process (WIP) accounts for items
you use in manufacturing processes, but you don’t need WIP accounts for other
items.

You can use the Item Account Maintenance - Costing window to specify the
additional accounts needed for manufacturing items. The accounts that are needed
will depend on whether the item is a raw material component, a subassembly, or a
finished good, and the valuation method of the item.

Be sure to consult your accountant for information about the accounts that will be needed.

62 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 7 MANUFACTURI NG ACCOUNTS

Refer to the table for more information.

Accounts Description Cost type

Standard Cost Revaluation Used for standard cost
Applied - Material Fixed OH Overhead costs for items—those with a
periodic valuation method.
Applied - Material Var. OH standard cost components
are applied to the applied
accounts.
Variance - Labor Differences between actual Used for both actual and
Variance - Labor Fixed OH costs and standard costs standard cost items. Actual
Variance - Labor Var. OH for each cost bucket are cost items are those with a
Variance - Machine applied to the variance perpetual valuation
accounts. method.
Variance - Mach. Fixed OH
Variance - Mach. Var. OH
Variance - Material
Variance - Mat. Fixed OH
Variance - Mat. Var. OH
WIP - Material Costs for materials and Used for both actual and
WIP - Material Fixed OH labor and machine time, standard cost items. Actual
WIP - Material Var. OH plus their associated cost items are those with a
WIP - Labor overhead amounts, are perpetual valuation
applied to work in process method.
WIP - Labor Fixed OH
(WIP) accounts when they
WIP - Labor Var. OH
are earmarked for a
WIP - Machine
specific manufacturing
WIP - Machine Fixed OH order.
WIP - Machine Var. OH
CoGS - Material
CoGS - Material Fixed OH
CoGS - Material Var. OH
CoGS - Labor
CoGS - Labor Fixed OH
CoGS - Labor Var. OH
CoGS - Machine
CoGS - Machine Fixed OH
CoGS - Machine Var. OH
Inventory - Material Fixed OH
Inventory - Material Var. OH
Inventory - Labor
Inventory - Labor Fixed OH
Inventory - Labor Var. OH
Inventory - Machine
Inventory - Machine Fixed OH
Inventory - Machine Var. OH

If you’re using item classes, you can specify default accounts for the items in the class. Refer
to Specifying accounts for an item class on page 55 for more information.

To specify Manufacturing accounts:

1. Open the Item Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Inventory >> Item)

2. Enter or select the item to specify accounts for.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 63

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

3. Choose Accounts to open the Item Account Maintenance window and the Item
Account Maintenance - Costing window. The Item Account Maintenance
window opens behind the Item Account Maintenance window.

4. Highlight a field in the Account column in the scrolling window.

5. Use the lookup button in the Account field to open the Accounts lookup
window. Select the account to use for the item.

Each account selection is saved as it’s added to the scrolling window.

You can use the Clear Account button to clear an account selection that isn’t needed, or
you can use the Undo Changes button to undo all changes you’ve made in the window.

6. Continue, repeating steps 2 through until 5 you’ve selected accounts for all the
rows in the scrolling window that are applicable to this item.

7. When you’ve finished, close the window.

64 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 8: Item engineering data
Most of the Manufacturing-specific information for items can be entered in the Item
Engineering Data window. Use the Item Engineering Data window to establish
guidelines for each item defined in the Item Maintenance window, such as
minimum issue quantity, the status of items, and item revisions. You also can attach
graphics to items. Other functions of the Item Engineering Data window include
establishing setup costs, scrap percentages, and average make quantities.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• About item classes and Manufacturing

• Entering item engineering data
• Assigning an effective date to an item
• Setting the unit of measure for shipping weight
• Specifying item status
• Identifying an item requiring incoming inspection
• About items and MRP
• Attaching a drawing to an item
• Calculating lead time for an item unit
• Calculating lead time for quantities
• How available to promise dates are calculated for Manufacturing
• Limitations of available to promise dates for Manufacturing
• Starting to track shipping history for an item
• Manufacturing alternates
• Specifying alternates for an item
• Removing an alternate from an item
• Removing items
• How Manufacturing affects reconciling inventory

About item classes and Manufacturing

Item classes are groups of item records that you set up in Inventory Control. You
can use the item classes you create in Inventory Control to specify the item type,
unit of measure schedule, and tax details for a group of items.

In Manufacturing, the use of item classes is extended. You can specify default
settings for each class, such as methods for calculating labor and material overhead.
You then can roll down those entries so they’re reflected in existing item records in
each class. The default settings entries also will be applied to new items added to
each class. You also can enter default settings for item class characteristics, such as
item types and valuation methods.

Refer to Inventory Control documentation for more information about creating item classes.

Using item classes isn’t required, but if you have a large number of items to enter,
using item classes can speed up the data entry process. With Manufacturing, you
can use item classes to set the following options:

• Specifying a fulfillment method for an item class on page 58

• Setting up shipping history for an item class on page 58
• Defining overhead for a standard cost item class on page 59

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 65

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Entering item engineering data

You can enter engineering information for each item that’s used in your
manufacturing process. Items that are purchased for use in your company but that
aren’t part of the manufacturing process—such as office supplies, for example—
don’t need item engineering data.

The Item Engineering Data window builds on the item information entered in the
Item Maintenance window and the Item Resource Planning Maintenance window,
which are both part of Inventory Control. It’s best to enter the item information in
those windows first, and then use the Item Engineering Data window to add
manufacturing-specific information.

To enter item engineering data:

1. Open the Item Engineering Data window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Engineering Data)

You also can open this window by opening the Item Maintenance window, selecting a
record, then choosing Item Engineering Data from the Go To button.

2. Enter or select an item. Information displayed in the window varies, depending

on whether the item has already been created.

• If you opened the window using the Go To button, information about the
item will be displayed. The specific information will depend on whether a
default site has been specified for the item.

• If you enter an item number that hasn’t already been created in the Item
Maintenance window, a message will appear, asking if you want to create
the item. You can’t enter engineering information for an item without first
creating the item in the Item Maintenance window, so choose Yes. The Item
Maintenance window opens, and you can enter the item information. For
more information about entering an item record, refer to Inventory Control
documentation.

66 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 8 ITEM ENGINEERING DATA

3. Select how a BOM should treat an item: as a bought item, a made item, or a
make or buy item.

Manufacturing includes a setting that lets you specify if make or buy items should be
considered made items or bought items when MRP information is calculated. Refer to
Setting up general MRP options on page 50 for more information.

4. Enter additional information about the item. The information you enter
depends on the Manufacturing modules you’re using, and the replenishment
method for the item.

Refer to the table for more information.

Field Additional information

Fulfillment Method Required for Make items. Refer to Fulfillment methods on page 52
for general information. Refer to Manufacturing orders generated
from sales on page 168 for information about how fulfillment
methods affect generated manufacturing orders.
Effective Date Refer to Assigning an effective date to an item on page 68.
Shipping Weight Required only if shipping weight information should be
automatically calculated. Refer to Setting the unit of measure for
shipping weight on page 68.
Lot Expiration Days If the item is tracked by lot numbers and has a limited shelf life,
enter the maximum number of days that can be between the date
of manufacture and the date of use.
Item Status Refer to Specifying item status on page 68.
Average Quantity Optional. The Average Quantity is the default manufacturing order
quantity, and is used in calculations if setup costs of standard cost
items are prorated by the average quantity.
Receive Purchase Mark Receive Purchase Orders to QA Site only if the items need to
Orders to QA Site be inspected when they are received. Refer to Identifying an item
requiring incoming inspection on page 69.
Floor Stock Mark Floor Stock if the cost of the items should be applied to an
expense account. Refer to How floor stock costs are applied on
page 117.
Destructive Testing Mark only if some items are destroyed when they are inspected.
Required
Use Up Part? Used when making a Buy item obsolete. Refer to Assigning an
effective date to an item on page 68.
Calculate MRP Mark if item should be included in MRP calculations. Refer to About
items and MRP on page 70.
Design Authority You can enter or select a design authority—an employee or any
other entity.
Drawing Group Refer to Attaching a drawing to an item on page 71.
Minimum Issue If you enter a Minimum Issue quantity, a message appears if you
attempt to create a manufacturing order or purchase order, or enter
an Issue component transaction for a quantity less than the
minimum issue quantity. If you leave the field blank, no warning
will appear.
Revision Level This field is informational only, and isn’t tracked or updated by
system processes.
Setup Cost These amounts aren’t calculated and aren’t included in any
Carrying Cost Manufacturing calculations.

Drawing Size Enter the size of schematics or other drawings, if needed.

5. Choose Save and close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 67

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Assigning an effective date to an item

You’ll have only limited use of your item records if they have no effective date or if
the effective date for the item is in the future. For example, if the effective date for an
item with the Make replenishment method is a week away, you can’t schedule any
manufacturing orders for producing that item.

You can use effective dates to modify item records before the change is to take effect.
For example, to make a certain product obsolete at the end of the year, you can
change the status of the item to Obsolete and make its effective date December 31 of
the current year. If you’ve marked Use Up Part? in the Item Engineering Data
window for the item, however, the change to the item record won’t be effective until
all inventory quantities of the item have been depleted.

To assign an effective date to an item:

1. Open the Item Engineering Data window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Engineering Data)

2. Select an item and enter an effective date.

3. Make other changes—if any—that should be effective on the date you’ve

specified.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

Setting the unit of measure for shipping weight

Use the Item Engineering Data window to specify the unit of measure for shipping
weight for an item. This information will be used in Sales Order Processing and in
Manufacturing extensions to Sales Order Processing.

To set the unit of measure for shipping weight:

1. Open the Item Engineering Data window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Engineering Data)

2. Enter or select an item.

3. Select the unit of measure for the shipping weight.

To change the number of units for the shipping weight, use the Item Maintenance
window (Cards >> Inventory >> Item). Refer to Inventory Control documentation for
more information.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

Specifying item status

Most Manufacturing procedures require that the items you choose—to build, to sell,
to purchase—must have an Active or Released status. However, other statuses are
available so you can enter information about items and begin working with the item
records before the items themselves are available for use. Use the Item Engineering
Data window to set the status for each item.

68 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 8 ITEM ENGINEERING DATA

To specify item status:

1. Open the Item Engineering Data window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Engineering Data)

2. Enter or select an item.

3. Choose a status for the item. To use an item in Manufacturing—that is, to be

able to create a manufacturing order for it or to use it as a component in a
manufacturing order—the status of the item must be Active or Released. You
can use other status choices to describe the status of an item within your
business.

For more information, refer to Item statuses on page 50.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

Identifying an item requiring incoming inspection

If you’re using Quality Assurance, you must identify which bought items will
require inspection when they’re received. Use the Item Engineering Data window to
do this.

To identify an item requiring incoming inspection:

1. Open the Item Engineering Data window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Engineering Data)

2. Select the item that will require incoming inspection.

3. Mark Receive Purchase Orders to QA Site. If you mark this option, quantities of
this item will be posted to the inspection site rather than to inventory when
they’re received. After they’re inspected, you must complete an inventory
adjustment transaction to move the quantities to inventory.

If no quality assurance site has been defined for your organization, a message appears.
You’ll have the option to specify a quality assurance site or to cancel the procedure. If
you choose Cancel, the Receive Purchase Orders to QA Site option will be cleared. Refer
to Setting up Quality Assurance in Chapter 5, “Manufacturing management
functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information.

4. To restrict the receipt records that are displayed in the QA Incoming window,
use the Include Purchase Receipts From and To fields to specify a range of
dates.

When you use the QA Incoming window, you can restrict the purchase receipts
that you view in the lookup windows based on the dates you enter. If you set
the dropdown list at the bottom of the QA Incoming window to QA Required -
Restrict By Date, only those purchase receipts that include one or more items
that require inspection and that have a date that is within the range you specify
will be displayed when you use the lookup button on the Receipt Number field.

5. If the testing is destructive—that is, if the testing process will require that a
portion of the amount received will be destroyed and won’t be suitable for use
in manufacturing—mark Destructive Testing Required.

6. Choose Save and close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 69

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

About items and MRP

If you’re using Manufacturing MRP (Material Requirements Planning), you need to
understand how information in your item records will affect MRP calculations. You
also need to be aware of how changes made in one module will be reflected in other
modules in the system.

One of the keys to getting useful information from your MRP system is carefully
selecting items to be tracked in MRP. You should include all items that are critical to
your production process, including raw materials, subassemblies and finished
goods. Sometimes you’ll need to make decisions about whether certain items
should be tracked in MRP. Those decisions will depend on how the materials are
used and their importance to your processes. For example, a company that paints
huge farm machinery might need to track its paint supplies carefully in MRP.
Another company that uses paint to stamp tiny ID numbers on its components
might not want to track paint supplies.

There are several areas where you can choose to include—or exclude—an item in
MRP calculations. For example, Calculate MRP is an option in the Item Engineering
Data window. If you mark this option for an item, requirements for that item will be
included in MRP calculations.

You can specify if an item or item-site combination should be included in MRP

calculations in four places:

Resource Planning Site Maintenance This is an Inventory Control window.

Clear the Calculate MRP for this item/site option to exclude all items at a particular
site from MRP calculations.

Item Engineering Data This is a Manufacturing window. Clear the Calculate

MRP option to exclude the item from MRP calculations.

Even if an item is marked for inclusion in MRP processes, quantities of that item at a
site that is marked to be excluded from MRP won’t be reflected in MRP calculations.
For example, suppose you manufacture radios and have 100 currently in inventory.
If you had an additional 20 that were at a QA site—which was not marked to be
included in planning—then those 20 radios wouldn’t be included in MRP
information. MRP calculations are done strictly on a site-by-site basis: supply from
one site won’t automatically be used to cover demand from a different site.

Item Resource Planning Maintenance This is an Inventory Control window.

Clear the Calculate MRP for this item/site option to exclude the item-site
combination from MRP calculations.

The Resource Planning Site Maintenance window also includes a Calculate MRP for this
site check box, but that check box doesn’t affect any MRP calculations.

MRP Exclusion List This window is part of the Manufacturing MRP system.
Use this window to remove selected items, sites or item-site combinations from
MRP views, calculations or both. To view information about MRP exclusions from
the Item Engineering Data window, and the Item Resource Planning Maintenance
window, be sure the Item Number field and the Site ID field are blank, and choose
Refresh.

70 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 8 ITEM ENGINEERING DATA

Attaching a drawing to an item

You can use the Item Engineering Data window to attach electronic files—CAD
files, multimedia clips, drawings, or other electronic files—to item records.

To attach a drawing to an item:

1. Open the Item Engineering Data window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Engineering Data)

2. Enter or select an item.

3. Select the drawing group that includes the drawing or other electronic files to
attach to the item.

If you have the associated viewing software installed on your system, after you’ve
attached a drawing to an item you can choose the image icon button to view the attached
file.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

Calculating lead time for an item unit

Use the MFG/Lead Times window to check the amount of lead time required for
one unit of an item. You can choose to view the lead time based on the time needed
to obtain purchased components for the item, or to build the item.

To calculate lead time for an item unit:

1. Open the MFG/Lead Times window.
(Inquiry >> Manufacturing >> Routings >> MFG/Lead Times)

2. Specify the type of lead time information to view.

To ensure that the information is accurate, it’s especially important that you enter
information and select options in the order described here.

Manufacturing lead time To view the labor time, machine time, cycle
time, setup time, move time, and queue time for a manufactured item, enter or
select a manufactured item and then a routing for that item.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 71

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Component lead time To view the lead time requirements for the
components of a manufactured item, enter or select a manufactured item, mark
Lead Times and then select a bill of materials for the manufactured item.

Lead time calculations for bought items will work only if you’ve identified vendors for
all the items in the bill of materials and have specified the vendors’ planning lead times
for the components.

Parent part lead time To view the lead time requirement for a single
purchased item, enter or select a bought or make or buy item, mark Lead Times
and then mark the Parent option.

3. When you’ve finished viewing the information, close the window.

Calculating lead time for quantities

Use the Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times window to update the manufacturing
fixed lead time and variable lead time information. You can update lead time
information for one Make item, or Make or Buy item, or for all items that have
routings.

The manufacturing fixed lead time and variable lead time are based automatically
on the item's primary routing and values set up for the routing's work centers. (An
example for a work center is the number of hours a day a particular work center is
running.) The manufacturing fixed lead time and variable lead time are used to
determine the lead time for any given MRP requirement. For example, assume that
the manufacturing fixed lead time is .20 days, the manufacturing variable lead time
is .0070, and the requirement is 300. The lead time is calculated as follows.

.20 +(.0070 * 3000) = 2.300

Using the example, the lead time is 2.300 days. The value used in MRP is 3 days
since the value is rounded up to the next whole day.

The information that is calculated is displayed in the Mfg Fixed Lead Time field and
the Mfg Variable Lead Time field in the Item Resource Planning Maintenance
window (Cards >> Inventory >> Item Resource Planning) for the item-site
combination.

You can enter manufacturing lead time information directly in the Item Resource Planning
Maintenance window. If you use the Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times window to
update lead time information for all items, however, any values you’ve entered for the item-
site combination will be overwritten.

To calculate lead time for a quantity:

1. Open the Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >> Calc
MFG Lead Times)

72 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 8 ITEM ENGINEERING DATA

2. You can update the lead time information for one item or for all items.

• To update the lead time information for all items, choose Calculate All. A
message appears, indicating that the lead times of all made items will be
updated. Choose Yes to proceed.

• To update the lead time information for the average make quantity for a
single item, enter or select the item number and choose Calculate One. The
lead time required to build the average quantity of the item is displayed in
the Lead Time field.

3. When you’ve finished calculating lead times, close the window.

If needed, use the Item Resource Planning Maintenance window (Cards >>
Inventory >> Item Resource Planning) to view the manufacturing lead time that
has been calculated.

How available to promise dates are calculated for

Manufacturing
You can use the Inventory Available to Promise Inquiry window to view the date
when a specific quantity of a finished good is scheduled to be complete.

The available to promise date is calculated with one of the following equations.
Down days are not considered when available to promise dates are calculated.

If all components are available User Date + Manufacturing fixed lead time
(from the Item Resource Planning Maintenance window for the site).

If some components are unavailable If some components are unavailable,

more calculations are done to determine the available to promise date of the
finished goods, based on whether each component is a made, bought, or make or
buy item. Once the available to promise lead times for each component are
determined, the calculation for the finished good is User Date + Latest component
availability date + Manufacturing fixed lead time (from the Item Resource Planning
Maintenance window for the site).

• If an unavailable component is a purchased item, the same processes that are

used for purchased items in the Inventory Available to Promise window are
used to find each component’s available date.

• If the unavailable component is a made item, the available promise date

calculations are run for each of its components. The available to promise date
for the subassembly item is calculated as if the subassembly were a finished
good.

• If the unavailable component is a make or buy item and has a manufacturing

bill of materials, it is treated as a made item. If the make or buy item has no
manufacturing bill of materials, it is treated as a purchased item.

You must use the Item Resource Planning Maintenance window to enter manufacturing
fixed lead time information for each site where you will want to check the quantities that are
available to promise.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 73

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

For example, suppose that you’re building widgets, which have a manufacturing
lead time of four days. To build one widget, you need two units of Component A
and three units of Component B, and you issue both of these components from the
Warehouse site. There is no fixed quantity of either component on the
manufacturing bill of materials. Then suppose that you want to calculate the date
for 200 widgets. On the day when you calculate the information, your inventory
levels are like those shown in the following table.

Component Lead time Required quantity Warehouse site

Component A 14 days (2 x 200) + 0 = 400 500
Component B 7 days (3 x 200) + 0 = 600 600
Required quantity for a component is (BOM quantity x finished good quantity) + BOM fixed
quantity.

Required quantities of each component are available from their issue-from sites, so
the calculated manufacturing time would be four days from the user date. If the
current date is June 5, the calculated manufacturing date would be June 9.

If the inventory levels of the components are different, however, a different date
might be calculated, as illustrated in the following table.

Component Lead time Required quantity Warehouse site

Component A 14 days (2 x 200) + 0 = 400 100
Component B 7 days (3 x 200) + 0 = 600 500
Required quantity for a component is (BOM quantity x finished good quantity) + BOM fixed
quantity.

In this case, the calculated date would be 18 days: four days of manufacturing lead
time plus 14 days for the longest component lead time. If the current date is June 5,
then the calculated manufacturing date would be June 23.

Limitations of available to promise dates for

Manufacturing
The following limitations exist when you’re working with available to promise
dates in the Inventory Available to Promise Inventory window.

• Component information is calculated based on the issue-from site only. If the

items are available at another site, you can transfer inventory items from
another site to cover a shortage. However, the inventory levels could change
from the time that you calculate the date and when the items are actually
allocated for the manufacturing order. There might not be a shortage now, but
there might be one later.

Refer to Issue-from and issue-to sites on page 97 for more information about how the
issue-from site for a component is determined.

• Manufacturing lead times are based on the average make quantity for the item.
If the quantity of items is different than the average quantity, the real date when
you might expect the items could be different.

• Manufacturing lead times do not reflect work center capacity. If your plant is
running at or close to full capacity, items might not be available on the
calculated date.

74 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 8 ITEM ENGINEERING DATA

• The manufacturing lead time is not automatically updated if the sequence

information in the primary routing is updated. If the routing has changed, use
the Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times window to update the manufacturing
lead time for the item, and then use the Inventory Available to Promise Inquiry
window to view calculations based on the most recent information.

• If the manufacturing bill of materials includes any subassemblies, the

manufacturing lead time for the subassembly is calculated using the
manufacturing lead time for its average make quantity and the availability of its
components. All levels are calculated this way. If there is a subassembly within
the subassembly, the requirements for the subassembly of the subassembly are
also calculated and included in the lead time for the higher-level subassembly.

• If the manufacturing bill of materials includes any phantom items, the lead time
for manufacturing the phantom item is not an additional period, but is included
in the manufacturing lead time for the finished good.

• Down days from the shop calendar are not reflected in the date that is
calculated.

Starting to track shipping history for an item

Use the Fulfillment Detail window to indicate if shipping history should be
maintained for an item. Use this procedure to use Manufacturing order fulfillment
windows to track additional details about shipments of the item.

To start to track shipping history for an item:

1. Open the Fulfillment Detail window.
(Cards >> Inventory >> Item >> select an item >> Go To button >> Fulfillment
Detail)

2. Mark Maintain Shipping History to begin tracking shipping history for this
item.

3. Choose OK to save your entry and close the window.

To discontinue shipping history maintenance for an item, open the Fulfillment Detail
window and choose Delete to clear the option.

Manufacturing alternates
You can specify an unlimited number of alternates for an item. The alternates can
then be used if you have a shortage of a certain item. Obviously, you won’t be able
to specify alternates for all items in your business, but alternates can be used for
some items, such as nuts, bolts, screws, and epoxies.

There are some limitations for using alternate items. Consider these issues as you
identify alternates for use on your production floor.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 75

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

• Specify alternates in the order of preference. The Item Maintenance Options

window in Inventory Control has two fields for substitutes. The first two
alternates you define in the Alternate Items window in Manufacturing will be
displayed there. If you change information in the Alternate Items window, it
will be reflected in the Item Maintenance Options window.

Changes to substitute items in the Item Maintenance Options window won’t be

reflected in the Alternate Items window.

• Specifying alternates doesn’t remove responsibility from production personnel.

The Alternate Items window helps you record information about possible
substitutions, but if inventory quantities of an item are depleted, the system
won’t automatically make the substitution for you.

• Include alternate components in bills of materials where the alternates will be

used. Refer to Specifying an alternate component in a bill on page 118 and Verifying
alternate assignments on page 118 for more information.

Specifying alternates for an item

Use the Alternate Items window to define alternates for items.

To specify alternates for an item:

1. Open the Alternate Items window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Engineering Data >> select an
item >> Go To button >> Alternate Items)

2. Use the lookup button in the first row of the scrolling window to select the item
you would choose first to be substituted for the item displayed at the top of the
window. Your changes will be saved.

3. Continue using the lookup button on other scrolling window rows to choose
other alternate items. You can specify an unlimited number of alternates.

4. Choose OK and close the window.

Removing an alternate from an item

If you find that an alternate item won’t be a good substitute for another item, you
can remove the alternate from the item record. Use the Alternate Items window to
complete this procedure.

76 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 8 ITEM ENGINEERING DATA

To remove an alternate from an item:

1. Open the Alternate Items window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Engineering Data >> select an
item >> Go To button >> Alternate Items)

2. In the scrolling window, select the alternate to remove.

3. Choose the delete icon button in the scrolling window. Your changes will be
saved. Close the window.

Removing items
Inventory Control includes two methods for removing items. You can remove items
using the Item Maintenance window or you can remove items with the
Discontinued type using the Inventory Year-End Closing window.

If an item that you attempt to remove is a component in a bill of materials, a

message is displayed and the item isn’t removed. Before you can remove an item,
you must find all instances where it is used as a component in a bill of materials,
remove the item from the bill of materials, and then use the Item Maintenance
window or the Inventory Year-End Closing window to remove the item.

Refer to Removing an item from multiple bills of materials on page 149 for information
about how you can use the BOM Mass Updates window to remove an item from all bills of
materials.

If you use the Inventory Year-End Closing window to remove items with the
Discontinued type, no items that are components of any bill of materials will be
removed. If there were discontinued items that weren’t removed, they will be listed
on the Manufacturing Components Not Removed report, which is generated when
processing ends in the Inventory Year-End Closing window.

How Manufacturing affects reconciling inventory

When you reconcile items in Inventory Control, you’ll also reconcile the item
information that is added to the system for Manufacturing.

The additional procedure adjusts the allocated quantity of an item so that it reflects
the quantities of components allocated for manufacturing orders.

For more information about reconciling inventory, refer to Inventory Control

documentation.

After the reconcile process is finished, an extra report destination window appears
so that you can choose where the Picklist Reconcile Report should be printed. The
picklist reconcile process occurs before the inventory reconcile process begins.

If any manufacturing orders are locked—for example, if another user is editing a

manufacturing order—both reconcile processes will be ended without updating
item information.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 77

78 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 9: Standard costing revaluations
Standard costing is an accounting method used by some businesses to value their
inventories. A company that uses standard costing—also known as periodic
costing—revalues its inventory periodically to reflect significant changes in the cost
of its items.

Manufacturing includes windows and features you can use to enter and adjust
standard costing information. You can define the standard costs of raw materials,
subassemblies, and finished goods. You can change standard cost information and
then “roll up” those new costs so they’re reflected throughout your system.

Most of the information in this document explains how to change material costs. For
information about changing labor or machine costs or the overhead amounts associated with
them, refer to Chapter 1, “Machines and labor codes.”

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Standard costing windows

• Comparison of rolling up and revaluing
• Entering pending changes for material costs
• Overriding a pending standard cost change
• Rolling up material and overhead cost changes
• Verifying rollup results
• Using scenarios to make standard cost changes
• Proposing changes to material fixed overhead
• Proposing changes to material variable overhead
• Interpreting the tree view
• Revaluing affected inventory items
• Revaluing all inventory items
• Specifying the standard quantity for a finished item

Standard costing windows

Manufacturing includes several windows you can use to enter and update standard
costing information for items. Basically, you can choose from two methods for
updating standard costs: using the Standard Item Material Costs window, the
Standard Cost Maintenance window, and the Roll Up and Revalue window, or
using the Standard Cost Changes window. You can use either method or both
methods, but you need to be aware of the limitations of each to get the expected
results.

Method One
The first of the available methods for rolling up and revaluing standard costs
involves three windows. This method has two advantages:

• You can enter an effective date for the pending cost information you enter.
When you roll up and revalue the changes, only the pending changes that have
an effective date that is the same as or earlier than the effective date for the roll
up or revalue process will be reflected in the standard cost changes.

• You can override the cost and overhead amounts for any item before the
pending amounts are reflected in new material costs.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 79

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Refer to the following information for an overview of the steps involved in this
method.

Standard Item Material Costs window You can use this window to enter
pending changes for costs, fixed overhead, and variable overhead for a bought item.
You also can enter a date when the changes should become effective. Refer to
Entering pending changes for material costs on page 81.

Standard Cost Maintenance window As an optional step, you can view

information about how the proposed changes would affect the cost of a make or buy
item. For bought items, the pending material cost is displayed, as well as the
pending variable and fixed overhead. Information for these categories is displayed
for make items, along with information about labor and machine costs, and the
associated fixed overhead and variable overhead costs. In the Standard Cost
Maintenance window, you can override the amount in any category, entering a
different amount to be used when the standard cost items are revalued. Refer to
Overriding a pending standard cost change on page 82.

Roll Up and Revalue window If you’ve entered standard cost changes in the
Standard Item Material Costs window, you can roll up and revalue those entries
with the Roll Up and Revalue window. Refer to Rolling up material and overhead cost
changes on page 83 and Revaluing all inventory items on page 89.

Method Two
The second method involves using the Standard Cost Changes window, where you
can enter changes for the standard costs of materials, and you can edit the formulas
for calculating fixed and variable overheads.

If you use this method, you can experiment with different values for standard cost
changes, viewing their effect on the cost of different components. You also can roll
up and revalue items in this window to complete the process.

For more information about using the Standard Cost Changes window, refer to the
following topics:

• Using scenarios to make standard cost changes on page 85

• Specifying the standard quantity for a finished item on page 89
• Proposing changes to material fixed overhead on page 87
• Proposing changes to material variable overhead on page 88
• Interpreting the tree view on page 88
• Revaluing affected inventory items on page 89

Comparison of rolling up and revaluing

Two of the main processes of standard costing are rolling up and revaluing. It’s
important to understand the difference between these two operations and how they
are completed in Manufacturing.

Rolling up Rolling up is the process of applying calculations based on changes to

standard cost information to items. If you change the cost of a raw material that is
part of several subassemblies and finished goods, “rolling up” that change will
result in calculations that will determine the new standard costs of the
subassemblies and finished goods. Rolling up helps you to view the effects of
standard cost changes before applying the costs to items.

80 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A PT E R 9 STANDARD COSTI NG REVALUATIONS

Be sure that your bills of materials are accurate when working with rolling up standard cost
changes. Fixed quantities for components are included in rollup calculations, but floor stock
items are not.

Revaluing Revaluing is the process of finalizing rolled-up standard cost changes.

Revaluing replaces existing standard cost information with new standard cost
information. The new information will be used in your accounting processes.

As you change your standard cost information, you might roll up costs several
times, but probably will revalue items only at certain points.

Revaluing inventory is an important process that might have significant impact on your
business’s accounting records. We recommend using process security to restrict authority
for revaluing. Refer to Creating and modifying process security sets on page 18 in Chapter
2, “Security,” of the Manufacturing Setup documentation.

Labor and machine costs are calculated from a manufacturing bill of materials and
primary routing for an item, and are rolled up into the final cost of the item.
Subassembly costs are directly rolled up into the accounts that incurred the cost, in
what is called a “columnar rollup.”

Entering pending changes for material costs

Use the Standard Item Material Costs window to enter the standard material costs
of new raw materials.

If the item has been assigned to a class, the overhead calculation methods for the
item class will be the default method for the item. Refer to Defining overhead for a
standard cost item class on page 59 for information about setting default methods for
calculating fixed and variable overhead for an item class.

To enter pending changes for material costs:

1. Open the Standard Item Material Costs window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Std Item Mat Costs)

2. Enter or select an item.

Information about the current standard cost of the item will be displayed in the
fields on the left side of the window.

3. Enter the pending material cost for the item.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 81

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

4. Enter the effective date for the changes.

5. Determine how fixed overhead for the item should be calculated.

Amount Mark Amount to calculate fixed overhead as a specific amount for

each unit of the item. Enter the amount in the associated field.

Percent Mark Percent to calculate fixed overhead as a percentage of the

material cost of the item. Enter the percentage in the associated field.

6. Determine how variable overhead for the item should be calculated.

Amount Mark Amount to calculate variable overhead as a specific amount

for each unit of the item. Enter the amount in the associated field.

Percent Mark Percent to calculate variable overhead as a percentage of the

material cost of the item. Enter the percentage in the associated field.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

After you’ve entered and saved pending changes, you must roll up and revalue those
changes so they’re reflected in the costs of other items, if needed. Use the Roll Up and
Revalue Inventory window to complete that procedure. Refer to Rolling up material and
overhead cost changes on page 83 and Revaluing all inventory items on page 89.

Overriding a pending standard cost change

Use the Standard Cost Maintenance window to override any pending changes to
information for your standard cost items. If the item is a bought item, you also can
override the amounts for the fixed and variable overhead for labor and machine
costs.

To override a pending standard cost change:

1. Open the Standard Cost Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Std Cost Maintenance)

82 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A PT E R 9 STANDARD COSTI NG REVALUATIONS

2. Enter or select an item. The current and pending/revalue standard cost

information for the item—including overhead calculations for fixed and
variable overhead for machine, labor and material costs—will be displayed in
the window.

• Pending/revalue material costs come from the Standard Item Material

Costs window.

• Pending/revalue labor costs come from the Labor Code Definition window
and the primary routing for the item.

• Pending/revalue machine costs come from the Machine Definition window

and the primary routing for the item.

3. To override any amount, mark the check box in the Override column for the
amount to be changed. For example, to override the fixed overhead amount
associated with labor for this item, mark the Labor Fixed Overhead option in
the Override column.

4. Enter the new amount.

5. Enter an effective date for the change.

6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to override other values.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

After you’ve entered and saved pending changes, you must roll up and revalue those
changes so they’re reflected in the costs of other items, if needed. Use the Roll Up and
Revalue Inventory window to complete that procedure. Refer to Rolling up material and
overhead cost changes on page 83 and Revaluing all inventory items on page 89.

Rolling up material and overhead cost changes

Use the Roll Up and Revalue Inventory window to roll up labor, machine, material
and overhead costs for all inventoried items. When the standard cost of a labor
code, machine code, made item or bought item changes, you must update those
records to maintain accurate cost information.

You can change material costs in standard costing windows, but to change labor or machine
costs you must use the Labor Code Definition window or Machine Definition window.

The effective date you enter for the rollup process is the cutoff date for pending
standard cost changes in the rollup process. For example, suppose the effective
rollup date is June 30 and you have two sets of pending standard cost changes—the
effective date for one set of changes is June 15, and the effective date for the other set
of changes is July 1.

When you start the rollup process, only items with pending changes with effective
dates that match or precede the effective date for the rollup will be included in the
rollup calculations. The cost changes with June 15 effective dates will be included in
the rollup. The cost changes with July 1 effective dates won’t be included in the
rollup.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 83

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

If the rollup process includes raw materials or subassemblies, it will change the
standard cost of the subassemblies and finished goods—including raw material or
subassembly—unless one of these instances occur:

• The raw material or subassembly isn’t part of the manufacturing bill of

materials. However, items that aren’t included in any bill of materials will be
rolled up.

• The raw material or subassembly has an In Date or Out Date in the

manufacturing bill of materials that excludes it from the manufacturing bill of
materials on the rollup date.

• The raw material or subassembly is only an alternate for another item in the
manufacturing bill of materials.

• The raw material is a floor stock item—that is, the Floor Stock option has been
marked for the item in the Bill of Materials Entry window. (The cost of floor
stock items is applied to an expense account.)

To roll up material and overhead cost changes:

1. Open the Roll Up and Revalue Inventory window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Routines >> Manufacturing >> Roll
Up and Revalue)

2. Mark the Roll Up option.

3. Enter the effective date for the rollup process.

4. Choose Process. A message will indicate when processing is complete.

5. When you roll up standard cost changes, the amounts in the pending columns
will be displayed in the current standard cost columns in the Standard Cost
Maintenance window. You can open that window and review the information.

6. Close the Roll Up and Revalue Inventory window.

Verifying rollup results

Before finalizing the changed standard costs, you can view the results of the rollup
process in the Item Cost Revaluation report. Print the Item Cost Revaluation report
from the Standard Cost Maintenance window.

84 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A PT E R 9 STANDARD COSTI NG REVALUATIONS

To verify rollup results:

1. Open the Standard Cost Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Inventory >> Item >> select a standard cost item >> Go To button >>
Standard Cost Maintenance)

2. Choose the print icon button. The Item Pending Cost Revaluation report will
list all items with standard cost information changed in the rollup process.

3. Close the Standard Cost Maintenance window.

After you’ve verified the rollup results, use the Roll Up and Revalue window to
revalue standard cost items. Refer to Revaluing all inventory items on page 89.

Using scenarios to make standard cost changes

To experiment with how changes to the standard costs of certain items would affect
bills of materials, you can use the Standard Cost Changes window to enter changes
to your standard cost items.

To use scenarios to make standard cost changes:

1. Open the Standard Cost Changes window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Standard Cost Changes)

2. If you’ve entered other standard cost changes, you can keep those proposed
changes or you can clear all proposed changes. To clear proposed changes,
choose Delete All.

3. Enter or select an item. Information about the standard costs of the item and its
associated items will be displayed in the tree view.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 85

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Information displayed in the tree view is determined by the item type—raw

material, subassembly or finished good—and whether you marked the Bill of
Material or Where Used option.

Type of item Bill of Material option Where Used option

Raw material Not applicable All subassemblies and
(component) finished goods that meet
criteria.
Subassembly All items in the multi-level All subassemblies and
manufacturing bill of finished goods that meet
materials for this item. criteria.
Substitute items are not
included.
Finished good All items in the multi-level Not applicable
manufacturing bill of
materials for this item.
Substitute items are not
included.

Refer to Interpreting the tree view on page 88 for more information.

The tree view will include costing information about all the subassemblies and
finished goods that meet the following criteria:

• The raw material is part of the manufacturing bill of materials for the
subassembly or finished good.

• The raw material must be a direct component of the manufacturing bill of

materials—it can’t be an alternate for another component.

If you decide you’d rather adjust the standard cost information for one of the other items
in the tree view, mark the item that has the standard cost information you want to
change.

4. Determine if the change in the cost should be applied to the related

subassemblies and finished goods.

• To apply the changes throughout the system, be sure the Do not Roll up
through Where Used option is not marked.

• To limit the changes to just the component item, mark Do not Roll up
through Where Used. You can mark the option for the component or for
any of its parents.

5. Enter new proposed costs for materials in the Proposed Standard Cost -
Material field.

You can set the material costs or fixed or variable material overhead costs to
zero. Mark the appropriate options in the Set to Zero column.

6. To change the fixed or variable material overhead information, refer to

Proposing changes to material fixed overhead on page 87 or Proposing changes to
material variable overhead on page 88.

7. Choose Save to save your proposed changes.

86 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A PT E R 9 STANDARD COSTI NG REVALUATIONS

8. Continue entering proposed changes for other items. You can choose to start
again with step 2 of this procedure, or you can go to related item records. Be
sure to choose Save each time you change a value.

9. When you’ve finished entering proposed standard cost changes, choose Roll Up
to clear the fields in the window. Items with standard cost changes due to direct
entries or due to rolled-up changes through bills of materials will be displayed.
You can use the tree view to move to other items.

Choose View Items to see the effect of the rollup calculations in the tree view.

10. Determine how to proceed. You can enter more standard cost changes, delete all
your proposed changes and start over, or finalize the changes you’ve entered so
far.

• To enter additional standard cost changes, choose Save and then select an
item.

• To delete the proposed changes, choose Delete All.

• To finalize your changes and have them reflected in your accounts,

complete a revaluation. Use the Standard Cost Changes window to revalue
only those inventory items that are affected by your changes, or use the Roll
Up and Revalue Inventory window to revalue all inventory items.

Refer to Revaluing affected inventory items on page 89 and Revaluing all inventory
items on page 89.

Proposing changes to material fixed overhead

If you’re using the Standard Cost Changes window to change standard cost
information, use the Proposed Material Fixed Overhead Entry window to suggest
changes for calculating material fixed overhead.

To propose changes to material fixed overhead:

1. Open the Standard Cost Changes window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Standard Cost Changes)

2. Enter or select an item.

3. Choose the expansion button on the Proposed Standard Cost - Fixed Ohd field.
The Proposed Material Fixed Overhead Entry window will open.

4. Determine whether to base the overhead on an amount per unit of the item, or
on a percentage of item cost.

Amount Mark Amount to propose calculating fixed overhead as a specific

amount for each unit of the item, and enter the amount.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 87

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

Percent Mark Percent to propose calculating fixed overhead as a percentage

of the material cost of the item, and enter the percentage.

5. Choose OK and close the window. Your proposed entry will be reflected in the
Standard Cost Changes window.

Proposing changes to material variable overhead

If you’re using the Standard Cost Changes window to change standard cost
information, use the Proposed Material Variable Overhead Entry window to
suggest changes for calculating material variable overhead.

To propose changes to material variable overhead:

1. Open the Standard Cost Changes window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Standard Cost Changes)

2. Enter or select an item.

3. Choose the expansion button on the Proposed Standard Cost - Variable Ohd
field. The Proposed Material Variable Overhead Entry window will open.

4. Determine whether to base the overhead on an amount per unit of the item, or
on a percentage of item cost.

Amount Mark Amount to propose calculating variable overhead as a specific

amount for each unit of the item, and enter the amount.

Percent Mark Percent to propose calculating variable overhead as a

percentage of the material cost of the item, and enter the percentage.

5. Choose OK and close the window. Your proposed entry will be reflected in the
Standard Cost Changes window.

Interpreting the tree view

Symbols are used in the tree view to denote the various standard cost statuses that
items can have. Refer to the table for information you can use to interpret those
symbols.

Symbol Meaning
Black circle This item has a current standard cost but does not have a
proposed standard cost.
Blue circle This item has a proposed standard cost.
Red circle with slash This item doesn’t have a current standard cost and doesn’t have
a proposed standard cost.
Any circle with a question This item has an item in its multi-level bill of materials that
mark doesn’t have a current standard cost and that doesn’t have a
proposed standard cost.

88 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A PT E R 9 STANDARD COSTI NG REVALUATIONS

Revaluing affected inventory items

If you used the Standard Cost Changes window to enter and roll up changes to
standard cost information, you can replace the current standard cost information
with the new information. This revaluing process will affect only the inventory
items that have standard cost changes.

Use the Standard Cost Changes window to complete this procedure.

Before beginning this procedure, be sure you’ve already entered and rolled up standard cost
changes you want to make.

To revalue affected inventory items:

1. Open the Standard Cost Changes window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Standard Cost Changes)

2. Choose Replace Current Standards Costs.

If a process security set has been assigned to the inventory revaluation process, enter the
appropriate password. Refer to Process security and Creating and modifying process
security sets—both in Chapter 2, “Security,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation—for more information.

3. Close the window.

Revaluing all inventory items

To finalize the standard cost changes you’ve made using the Standard Cost
Maintenance window or the Standard Item Material Cost window, you must
revalue inventory. This process updates the cost information for each standard cost
item affected by the rollup process and revalues your inventory. Use the Roll Up
and Revalue Inventory window to complete this procedure:

To revalue all inventory items:

1. Open the Roll Up and Revalue Inventory window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Routines >> Manufacturing >> Roll
Up and Revalue)

2. Mark the Revalue option.

3. Choose Process.

If a process security set has been assigned to the inventory revaluation process, enter the
appropriate password. Refer to Process security and Creating and modifying process
security sets—both in Chapter 2, “Security,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation—for more information.

Specifying the standard quantity for a finished item

When you set up options for standard costing, you have the option to prorate setup
time based on either the standard quantity for the item or the average quantity for
the item. You can use the Standard Cost Changes window to specify the standard
quantity for a finished good that uses standard costing (that has a periodic
valuation method). Use this procedure only if you’re prorating setup time by the
standard quantity.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 89

PA RT 2 ITEM EXTENSIONS

The average quantity information comes from the Item Engineering Data window. Refer to
Entering item engineering data in Chapter 8, “Item engineering data,” in the
Manufacturing Core Functions documentation for more information.

To specify the standard quantity for a finished item:

1. Open the Standard Cost Changes window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Inventory >> Standard Cost Changes)

2. Enter or select a parent item that has a periodic valuation method.

3. Enter the standard quantity for the item.

4. Choose Save, and close the window.

90 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

PART 3: BILL OF MATERIALS
 Part 3: Bill of Materials
This part of the documentation includes information that will help you set up and
maintain Manufacturing Bill of Materials. Bills of materials list the items and item
quantities needed to produce subassemblies and finished goods.

The following information is discussed:

• Chapter 10, “Bill of Materials overview,” describes how to use Manufacturing

Bill of Materials and contains definitions of important terms.

• Chapter 11, “Position numbers,” includes information about how position

numbers are used in bills of materials and picklists.

• Chapter 12, “Bill of Materials entry,” explains how to enter and modify bills of
materials.

• Chapter 13, “Links to routings,” describes how you can link components in a
bill of materials to the routing sequences where the components are used.

• Chapter 14, “Bill of Materials copies,” includes information about copying bills
of materials and removing components from the copies.

• Chapter 15, “Bill of Materials inquiries,” provides information about viewing

bill of materials records.

• Chapter 16, “Reference designators,” includes information about entering,

modifying, and removing reference designators for components.

• Chapter 17, “Revisions and archived bills,” explains the differences between
using revision history and archiving bills of materials. Information about
creating and viewing revision levels is included, as well as information about
removing archived bills of materials.

• Chapter 18, “Mass updates,” includes information about updating several bills
of materials at one time. You can add, remove, and replace components. You
also can update component information.

• Chapter 19, “Engineering Data Management Integration,” includes information

about integrating data between a product lifecycle management (PLM) tool and
Microsoft Dynamics GP.

92 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 10: Bill of Materials overview
Bills of materials (BOMs) are the lists of items needed to produce products; they
describe the items needed to build a product unit. The information in bills of
materials also is critical in other areas of plant operation, such as material
purchasing, product costing, and MRP.

You can build and store the bills of materials that your business uses to create its
products. You can create single- and multi-level bills of materials, copy existing bills
of materials to use as the basis of new bills, and make global changes to the bills of
materials you’ve defined. Manufacturing Bill of Materials also includes a window—
the BOM Routing Link window—that helps you link bills of materials and routings.

Refer to the table for topics related to bills of materials.

Topic Refer here:

System setup tasks Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the
Manufacturing Setup documentation
User setup tasks Chapter 8, “Manufacturing core functions user setup,” in
the Manufacturing Setup documentation
Security Chapter 2, “Security,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation
Item Engineering Data window Chapter 8, “Item engineering data,” in this manual
Reports Chapter 29, “Manufacturing reports,” in this manual

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Bill of materials terms

• Differences between types and categories
• Bill of materials types
• Bill of materials categories
• Issue-from and issue-to sites
• Rules for backflushed components
• Lead time calculations

Bill of materials terms

Refer here for information about some of the terms related to Manufacturing Bill of
Materials.

Bill of materials A bill of materials is a list of the components needed to build

one unit of a product. It also shows quantities for each component.

Parent parts and components In a manufacturing environment, the terms

“parent parts” and “components” describe the relationship between an item and its
components. Parent parts are higher-order assemblies, such as computers or lamps.
A parent part can be a subassembly or a final product. Components—also known as
child parts—can be raw materials or subassemblies that are used to build a parent
part.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 93

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Single- and multi-level bills of materials Bills of materials can have

multiple levels. The simplest bills of materials are single-level bills of materials.
Those bills list the components and the amount of each component required to
produce one unit of the parent part. For example, the single-level bill of materials
for a dining room set built by a furniture manufacturer look like this:

Single-level bill of materials for (1) Dining Room Set

Item Quantity
Table 1
Chair 6

A multi-level bill of materials, however, lists all the components directly or

indirectly involved in building the parent part, together with the required quantity
for each item. For example, if a subassembly is used in the parent part, the multi-
level bill of materials will show all the components needed to build the
subassembly, including purchased parts and materials.

The multi-level bill of materials for the same dining room set—a table and six
chairs—might look like this:

Multi-level bill of materials for (1) Dining Room Set

Item Quantity
Table 1
Table top 1
Table leg 4
Table leaf 1
Chairs 6
Chair back 6
Chair seat 6
Chair leg 24
Chair arm 12

Backflushing Backflushing deducts item quantities from inventory accounts to

cover the quantities consumed in the manufacturing process. Backflushed
quantities are accounted for when the parent parts are received—that is,
transactions to account for the use of backflushed materials are created when a
manufacturing order receipt is posted. Materials that are backflushed are included
in the final costs, but aren’t formally issued to a work center or work in process.

You can backflush entire bills of materials or just certain elements. When an item is
marked as backflushed in the Bill of Materials Entry window, the Backflush option
in the Picklist window automatically will be marked.

Refer to Rules for backflushed components on page 98 and Backflushing bill of materials
components on page 116 for more information.

Incremental spacing Incremental spacing is a setting in the BOM Preference

Defaults window that is used to assign position numbers to new components
automatically. The value selected in the New Component Position Number
Incremental Spacing field will be used to determine the position number for new
components. Refer to Position number incremental spacing on page 101 for more
information.

94 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 0 BILL OF MATERIALS OVERVIEW

Issue-from site The issue-from site—also known as the draw-from site—is the
site from which the component or subassembly quantities are taken. If you have
several inventory sites for an item, you can specify the site from which the
components should be taken for a manufacturing order. Refer to Issue-from and
issue-to sites on page 97.

Issue-to site The issue-to site—also known as the post-to site—is the site to
which components or subassemblies will be delivered when they’re needed in
production. If your production process includes several work centers, you might set
up the bill of materials so that components and subassemblies are delivered to the
appropriate work centers. Refer to Issue-from and issue-to sites on page 97.

Lead time offset Lead time offset is the number of days difference between the
start date or end date of a manufacturing order and the date that a component will
be needed. For example, suppose the final step in your manufacturing process is to
glue two components together, and after the gluing process, the epoxy must cure for
two days. Then the lead time offset for the epoxy would be two days from the
manufacturing order end date.

Refer to Lead time calculations on page 99 for more information.

Fixed quantity You can specify a fixed quantity of each component in a bill of
materials. The fixed quantity is the amount of a component that is consumed for
each manufacturing order, regardless of the manufacturing order size. For example,
suppose that your manufacturing processes require you to use a sheet of metal to
create a template to use for the rest of the manufacturing order. You could enter a
fixed quantity of 1 for the sheet of metal, so that it would be issued for that purpose.

Position number Each component on a bill of materials and each component

item on a picklist has a position number. A position number is a number that
indicates the order in which components are used to build a product. All new
components and new picklist items will be assigned a position number. Because
you assign a position number to each component on a bill a materials and each
component item on a picklist, a component can be used more than once in the
process. For example, if a component is used at the beginning and at the end of the
process, you can add the component to the bill of materials twice, using a different
position number for each instance. The position number will be displayed in
windows where you can enter or view bill of materials and picklist information.

Reference designators Some manufacturers—especially electronics

manufacturers—use reference designators to specify where components are to be
used in an assembly. For example, if four resistors are used in an assembly, the
manufacturer might include reference designators to tell the assemblers where the
four resistors should be placed on a circuit board.

Differences between types and categories

Each bill of materials that you define in Manufacturing Bill of Materials will have a
type and a category.

Types Types help describe the status of each bill of materials. For example, a
manufacturing bill of materials is typically used in current manufacturing processes
and an archived bill of materials is an obsolete bill of materials. Refer to Bill of
materials types on page 96 for more information.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 95

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Categories Categories help describe the visibility of the components in a bill of

materials. A regular bill of materials is a straightforward bill of materials. A
phantom category must be assigned to a subassembly item if components for the
subassembly must be included in the picklist. Refer to Bill of materials categories on
page 97 for more information.

Bill of materials types

Refer to the following definitions for more information about various types of bills
of materials.

Manufacturing bill of materials A manufacturing bill of materials is used to

build a parent part and is the “real” production bill of materials used to calculate
material requirements. You can create only one manufacturing bill of materials for
each item.

Engineering bill of materials An engineering bill of materials is defined for a

product by your engineering department. An engineering bill of materials could
include the most recent changes proposed by an engineering department, and
might or might not match the manufacturing bill of materials.

Designs in the prototype stage of development, for example, might have

engineering bills of materials. This allows you to study the costs of producing a
design without affecting the material requirements that the system generates. You
can create only one engineering bill of materials for each item.

Archived bill of materials An archived bill of materials is one that has been
stored for reference but isn’t used in production. Refer to Revision levels and Archived
bills of materials on page 141 to compare archived bills of materials with revision
levels.

Configured bill of materials A configured bill of materials is created when a

customer selects options from a super bill of materials. For example, a configured
bill of materials for a computer would include the basic components and option
items that the customer had specified from a list of options that you provide. The
option items might be for RAM, hard disks or processors. You can generate many
configured bills of materials for each item, so you must assign a name to each
configured bill of materials.

You can choose to automatically delete or archive configured bills of materials when the
manufacturing orders they’re used for are closed. Refer to Setting up manufacturing order
processing in Chapter 4, “Manufacturing production functions setup,” in the
Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information about those options.

Super bill of materials A super bill of materials includes all of the possible
parts in a configured bill of materials for a finished item. For example, a computer
manufacturer might have a super bill of materials that lists all the various computer
component types for its customers, such as several types of processors, hard drives,
monitors and RAM modules. Then, when the company needs to build a computer,
someone will specify which of the component types will be included in the specific
computer.

96 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 0 BILL OF MATERIALS OVERVIEW

Bill of materials categories

Refer to the following definitions for more information about various categories of
bills of materials.

Regular bill of materials A regular bill of materials is a basic, single-level bill

of materials.

Phantom bill of materials A phantom bill of materials is assigned to a bill of

materials for a subassembly that isn’t usually stocked as an inventory item. For
example, a furniture manufacturer might set up a bill of materials for a table so that
the table leaf is a subassembly. The manufacturer doesn’t want to build any extra
table leaves—he wants to manufacture leaves only as tables are being made, but
will never stock the table leaves as separate inventory items. If you create phantom
bills of materials, you won’t need to create separate manufacturing orders for the
production of the subassembly items needed for parent parts.

Option bill of materials This setting is not currently used.

Modular bill of materials This setting is not currently used.

Issue-from and issue-to sites

When you create a bill of materials, you have the option to specify an issue-from
and an issue-to site for each component.

For definitions of issue-from and issue-to sites, refer to Bill of materials terms on page 93.

If you specify issue-from and issue-to sites in a bill of materials, those sites will be
the issue-from and issue-to sites in the picklist. If you’re using site-specific segments
in your chart of accounts, the accounts for the specific sites will be used as you
move materials from one site to another.

If no issue-from or issue-to site is specified for a component, however, default sites

will be used.

Default values for the issue-from site

Refer to the following information about how the default issue-from site is
determined.

• The issue-from site from the bill of materials line entered in the Bill of Materials
Entry window is used.

• If a site hasn’t been specified in the Bill of Materials Entry window, the default
site for the item entered in the Item Quantities Maintenance window is used.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 97

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

For more information about the Item Quantities Maintenance window, refer to
Inventory Control documentation.

• If that site hasn’t been specified in the Item Quantities Maintenance window,
the Draw Inventory From site entered in Manufacturing Order Entry window is
used. (The default site comes from the scheduling preference you’ve selected
for the manufacturing order, but you can change it.)

Refer to Setting up scheduling preferences in Chapter 4, “Manufacturing production

functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation and Entering a
manufacturing order in Chapter 7, “Manufacturing order entry,” in the
Manufacturing Production Functions documentation for more information.

Default values for the issue-to site

Refer to the following information about how the default issue-to site is
determined.

• If a link between a portion of the component amount in the bill of materials and
a routing sequence has been established, the default issue-to site is the routing
sequence work center for the portion of the component amount that is linked to
the sequence.

• If no link has been established between the component and a routing sequence,
the default issue-to site is the site specified for the line in the bill of materials.
This also is the default issue-to site for any quantity of the component that is not
linked to the routing sequence.

• If no site is specified on the bill of materials line, the work center associated
with the first routing sequence for the manufacturing order is used.

If your business has several production lines that use the same bills of materials, we
recommend leaving the issue-to site blank in the bill of materials, and then adding that
information for each manufacturing order.

Rules for backflushed components

When you create a bill of materials, you can choose to backflush all components or
just specific ones. However, there are rules regarding which components can—or
cannot—be backflushed. Refer to the table for more information.

Component description Backflush?

Phantom items Not allowed.
By-product items
Item Type is Services, Flat Fee, or Miscellaneous You must backflush.
All other components. You can choose to backflush or not.

98 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 0 BILL OF MATERIALS OVERVIEW

Lead time calculations

You can specify a lead time for any or all components in a bill of materials. How
lead times are calculated depends on your system setting—to have lead times offset
from the manufacturing order start date or the manufacturing order due date—and
a number you enter for a component in a bill of materials. You can choose to
calculate component lead times based on the manufacturing order start date or due
date.

• If you use the start date, you can enter positive or negative values for the
component lead time. This allows you to specify that a component is needed a
certain number of days before or after the start of the manufacturing order.

• If you use the manufacturing order due date, you can enter only positive values
for the component lead time. You can’t enter negative numbers because all
components must be due before the manufacturing order is due.

Refer to the illustration for an example of how lead time is calculated.

Manufacturing Order Manufacturing Order

Start Date Due Date

Component due two days Component due two days Component due two days
before start: after start: before due date:
Lead Time Offset = -2 Lead Time Offset = +2 Lead Time Offset = +2
Offset from Start Date Offset from Start Date Offset from Due Date

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 99

100 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 11: Position numbers
Each component on a bill of materials and each component item on a picklist has a
position number. A position number is a number that indicates the order in which
components are used to build a product. All new components and new picklist
items will be assigned a position number. Because you assign a position number to
each component on a bill a materials and each component item on a picklist, a
component can be used more than once in the process. For example, if a component
is used at the beginning and at the end of the process, you can add the component
to the bill of materials twice, using a different position number for each instance.
The position number will be displayed in windows where you can enter or view bill
of materials and picklist information.

When you create a new bill of materials or add a new item to a bill of materials, a
position number will be assigned to each component. The position number will be
determined by the next available position number and the default incremental
spacing specified in the BOM Preference Defaults window. You can change the
default position number at any time to control the position number of the
component on the bill of materials.

For more information about the BOM Preference Defaults window, refer to Setting up bills
of materials system settings in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions setup,” of the
Manufacturing Setup manual.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Position number incremental spacing

• Position numbers in Manufacturing windows
• Position number guidelines
• Assigning existing position numbers to components
• Position number examples
• Position number limits
• Changing position numbers of components
• Changing a bill of materials to a phantom bill of materials

Position number incremental spacing

Incremental spacing is a setting in the BOM Preference Defaults window that is
used to assign position numbers to new components automatically. The value
entered in the New Component Position Number Incremental Spacing field will be
used to determine the position numbers for new components.

Default incremental spacing values

The default incremental spacing value will be used to assign position numbers to
new bill of material components and picklist items.

Refer to the following information about how the default values for position
numbers are determined.

• The default incremental spacing from the New Component Position Number
Incremental Spacing field in the BOM Preference Defaults window is used.

• If a default spacing hasn’t been specified in the BOM Preference Defaults

window, the default spacing for position numbers will be 1.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 101

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

For more information about the BOM Preference Defaults window, refer to Setting up
bills of materials system settings in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions setup,”
of the Manufacturing Setup manual

Specified incremental spacing values

You can use the BOM Preference Defaults window to specify the spacing to use
between position numbers. Before you set it up, you should decide how much space
you will need to be available between the assigned position numbers. Leaving
spaces will allow you to manually add new position numbers between existing
position numbers later.

For example, you can decide to assign position numbers in multiples of 2—2, 4, 6,
and 8—or in multiples of 10—10, 20, 30, 40. This will be helpful if you need to add
components later. You can place new components between the existing components
later without renumbering the existing components.

Refer to Setting up bills of materials system settings in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core

functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup manual for more information.

Position numbers in Manufacturing windows

When position numbers are assigned to new items automatically, you can change
them manually. You also can change a position number when you open a picklist or
bill of materials to edit. There are some rules related to when you can change the
position number. There are also specific windows where you can change the
position number of a component, and then there are windows where you can’t
change the position number of a component.

Position numbers can be changed from these windows:

• Bill of Materials Entry window

• Picklist window
• Add Picklist Entry window
• Quick MO Add Component Entry window
• Manufacturing Order Add Component Entry window
• Manufacturing Order Receipt Component Entry window
• Quick MO Add Component Entry window

Position numbers can’t be changed from these windows:

• BOM/Routing Link window

• Bill of Materials View window
• BOM Copy window
• BOM Mass Updates window
• Manufacturing Component Transaction Entry window
• Manufacturing Component Transaction Inquiry window
• Manufacturing Order Receipt Entry window
• Quick MOs window

Special circumstances in windows

Refer to the following information about exceptions to the general position number
rules.

102 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 1 POS ITION NUMBERS

Add Picklist Entry window If you add a phantom item to the picklist, the
components of the phantom item will retain the position numbers from the
phantom bill of materials.

BOM Routing Link window If you use the BOM Routing Link window to link
an instance of a bill of materials component to multiple routing sequences, the item
will appear once on a picklist for each sequence that it is linked to. A component on
a bill of materials can be linked to more than one routing and each bill of materials/
routing combination can have different position numbers assigned to the
components.

For instance, the first bill of materials/routing combination that you create for an
item will retain the position number from the bill of materials. You can't change the
position number after the link has been created. If a bill of materials/routing
combination already exists for a bill of materials component—if the amount in the
Quantity Linked field is greater than zero but less than the amount in the Quantity
to Link field—and you choose to create an additional link, the position number will
be assigned. You can't change the position number. If you need to specify the
position number of a component that is linked to more than one sequence, you
should add that item multiple times to the bill of materials and then link each
instance to a sequence.

Sales Configurator window When you create a bill of materials, the

components you select to add to the bill of materials will retain the position
numbers from the super bill of materials. You can't change these position numbers.

BOM Entry window If the item that you enter in the Alternate For field exists
more than once on the first level of the bill of materials, a message will be displayed.
When you choose OK, the Alternate Parts lookup window will open and display
only instances of that item number on the first level of the bill of materials.

Position number guidelines

Refer to the following guidelines and requirements for using position numbers.
Sometimes a message will be displayed and you’ll need to make the necessary
change before you can continue.

Position number value The position number value must be 1 or higher. It can’t
be zero or a negative number.

Position number limit The position number can’t exceed the 9999 limit. Refer
to Position number limits on page 105 for more information.

Duplicate components A component can be on a bill of materials more than

once, but the position number must be different for each instance.

Duplicate position numbers A position number only can exist one time on
each level of a bill of materials.

Duplicate item numbers on super bill of materials If an item number

already exists on a super bill of materials, you can’t add that item to the super bill of
materials.

Component of a phantom item If an item is a component of a phantom item,

you cannot change the position number in the picklist.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 103

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Duplicate item on configured bill of materials If an item number already

exists on the first level of a configured bill of materials, you can’t add that item to
the configured bill of materials. If a configured bill of materials has more than one
instance of an item on the first level, you can't enter or select the configured bill of
materials in the Configured BOM field in the Sales Configurator window.

Assigning existing position numbers to components

Sometimes you may assign a position number to a new or modified component that
has already been assigned to a component at the same level. When this happens, a
message is displayed and you'll have the option to enter a different position number
or to have the position number assigned to the new or modified component.

When you choose to assign the position number to the new or modified component,
a new position number will be assigned to the component that originally had that
position number. If any duplicate position numbers are created, the components
with duplicate numbers will be renumbered automatically until no more duplicates
are created. During this process, if a situation occurs where any of the position
numbers would exceed the allowed limit, the bill of materials is not renumbered
and the components retain their existing position numbers.

The following example demonstrates what will happen when you choose to assign
the position number to the new or modified component and have the position
number of the other component renumbered.

Assumptions:

• You entered position number 20 for item A.

• Item B already has a position number of 20.

• Position number 21 is already assigned to item C.

A message is displayed and you choose to continue. Item A will be assigned

position number 20. Item B will be assigned position number 21. Item C will be
reassigned position number 22.

Refer to the following for more information:

• Position number guidelines

• Position number limits

Position number examples

The following information explains how position numbers work in various
situations.

These examples make the following assumptions:

• Item A is a first-level component on a bill of materials and it has been assigned

a position number of 5.

• Item X is a first-level component and has a position number of 6.

104 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 1 POS ITION NUMBERS

• No first-level components have the position number of 7 or 8.

• Item Z has a position number of 9.

Add a new component Item B to the bill of materials with a position

number of 5 You enter a position number of 5. A message is displayed because
Item A already has been assigned a position number of 5. If you choose OK, the
position number of 5 will be assigned to Item B, and the position number for Item A
will change to 6. Because Item X was previously assigned a position number of 6, it
will be renumbered to 7. Item Z will retain its position number of 9.

Change the position number for Item Z from 9 to 4 A message will not
be displayed and no renumbering will occur because there are no other items that
already have the position number 4.

Change the position number for Item Z from 9 to 6 Since Item X already
has a position number of 6, a message will be displayed. If you choose OK, Item Z
will be assigned a position number of 6, and the position number for Item X will be
renumbered to be 7.

Remove Item A from the bill of materials A message will not be displayed
and no renumbering will occur because removing an item from a bill of materials
will not affect the position numbers of any other items.

You change the position number for Item A from 5 to 10 A message

will not be displayed and no renumbering will occur because there are no other
items that already have the position number 10.

Position number limits

Sometimes the position number that is assigned— automatically or manually—
exceeds the limit allowed in Microsoft Dynamics GP. When this happens, a message
is displayed and you’ll have to enter a different position number or make more
position numbers available before you can proceed. You can make more position
numbers available by changing—or renumbering—the position numbers of existing
components or by using phantom bills of materials to manage components.

Refer to the following topics for more information:

• Changing position numbers of components

• Changing a bill of materials to a phantom bill of materials
• Position number guidelines

Examples of when position numbers exceed the allowed

limit
Refer to the table for examples of situations that occur when position numbers
exceed the limit allowed in Microsoft Dynamics GP.

Situation Result
A position number is The position number won’t be assigned. You can enter a
automatically assigned to a different position number.
new component and the
number is higher than 9999.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 105

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Situation Result
You assign or change the The position number won’t be assigned. You can enter a
position number to a number different position number.
that is higher than 9999.
You add a component to a bill You can’t add the item. You can change the position number or
of materials and the position you can make more position numbers available before you can
number is higher than 9999. add a component to this bill of materials.
You add an item to a picklist You can’t add the item. You can change the position number or
and the position number is you can make more position numbers available before you can
higher than 9999. add a component to this bill of materials.
You add an item to a picklist You can’t insert the item. You can change the position number or
and the position number you can make more position numbers available before you can
already exists. You choose to add a component to this bill of materials.
have the previous item
renumbered and numbering
causes the item to have a
position number higher than
9999.
You add a component to a bill You can’t insert the item. You can change the position number or
of materials and the position you can make more position numbers available before you can
number already exists. You add a component to this bill of materials.
choose to have the previous
component renumbered and
numbering causes the item to
have a position number
higher than 9999.
You select Mark All on a Those items won’t be selected.
selected bill of materials in
the BOM Mass Updates
window and any position
number would be higher than
9999.

Changing position numbers of components

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to change the position numbers of existing
components. Sometimes it is necessary to renumber the position numbers of
existing components to make more position numbers available for new
components. When a position number exceeds the limit allowed, you can renumber
existing components to make more position numbers available for new
components. Refer to Position number limits on page 105 for more information about
position number limits.

Refer to the following for more information:

• Position number guidelines

• Position number limits
• Changing a bill of materials to a phantom bill of materials

106 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 1 POS ITION NUMBERS

To change the position numbers of components

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to change the position numbers of existing
components.

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.

(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the finished good or subassembly with the bill of materials that
includes items that you want to work with. The manufacturing bill of materials
will be displayed by default, but you can select any other bill of materials that
includes the item.

3. If you selected an archived or configured bill of materials, enter or select the

appropriate BOM name.

4. In the tree view, select a component. Information about the component will be
displayed in the right pane of the window.

5. Change the position number. Refer to Position number guidelines on page 103 for
more information.

6. Change any other information in the window, as needed.

7. Choose Save. Continue to change position numbers, as needed.

8. When you’ve finished entering information, close the window.

Changing a bill of materials to a phantom bill of

materials
Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to change a bill of materials to a phantom
bill of materials.

You can use a phantom bill of materials to manage components when you need to
make more position numbers available. For instance, you can use a phantom bill of
materials when a position number exceeds the limit allowed. Refer to Position
number guidelines on page 103 for more information about position number limits.

Refer to the following for more information:

• Position number limits

• Changing position numbers of components
• Position number guidelines

To change a bill of materials to a phantom bill of

materials:
1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the finished good or subassembly with the bill of materials that
includes items that you want to work with. The manufacturing bill of materials
will be displayed by default, but you can select any other bill of materials that
includes the item.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 107

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

3. If you selected an archived or configured bill of materials, enter or select the

appropriate BOM name.

4. Change the bill of materials category to phantom.

5. Choose Save and close the window.

108 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 12: Bill of Materials entry
Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to complete basic tasks, including creating,
modifying, and deleting bills of materials.

Besides listing the components and their quantities in bills of materials, you also can
add information that will make the bills of materials more useful in your production
process. You can indicate if component quantities can be backflushed, you can
choose default sites for component and parent parts, and you can enter information
about item substitutions.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Understanding the Bill of Materials Entry window

• Creating a bill of materials
• Adding a component to a bill of materials
• Changing component details
• Deleting a component from a bill of materials
• Modifying a component bill of materials
• Removing a bill of materials
• Requirements for bill of materials components
• Backflushing bill of materials components
• Shrinkage for bill of materials components
• How floor stock costs are applied
• Component fixed quantity
• Specifying an alternate component in a bill
• Verifying alternate assignments
• Bills of materials and component effective dates
• Effects of engineering changes on bills
• Adding user-defined information to bills
• Accounting for by-products in a bill of materials
• Component quantities and rounding

Understanding the Bill of Materials Entry window

The Bill of Materials Entry window is the main window for Manufacturing Bill of
Material. You can use the window to create, modify, and delete bills of materials.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 109

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

The window has two major parts: the left pane, where you enter information about
the bill of materials as a whole; and the right pane, where you can enter information
about the components that make up the bill of materials. The left pane also includes
a tree view where you can view the overall structure of a bill of materials.

The left pane

displays bill of
materials
information.

The tree view

displays the
structure of the
bill of materials.

The right pane

displays
component
information.

Creating a bill of materials

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to create or to modify a basic bill of
materials.

As you add items to a bill of materials, the items will be displayed in the tree view.
This window will list the components that are needed to build one unit of the final
product.

Several options are available for the components that you add to a bill of materials.
The information that you enter will depend on the component (whether it is made
or bought, for example) and on your business practices. Refer to the following
topics for more information:

• Requirements for bill of materials components on page 115

• Backflushing bill of materials components on page 116
• Shrinkage for bill of materials components on page 116
• How floor stock costs are applied on page 117
• Component fixed quantity on page 117
• Specifying an alternate component in a bill on page 118
• Bills of materials and component effective dates on page 119
• Adding user-defined information to bills on page 120
• Accounting for by-products in a bill of materials on page 121
• Component quantities and rounding on page 121

110 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 2 BILL OF MATERIALS ENTRY

For specific information about creating a bill of materials for a configured item, refer
to Creating a super bill of materials on page 205.

To create a bill of materials:

1. In the navigation pane, choose the Manufacturing button, and then choose the
Bill of Materials list.

2. Choose Bill of Materials to open the Bill of Materials Entry window.

3. In the Item Number field, enter or select a part number.

Make items The replenishment method for most parent items should be
Make. You can select the replenishment method for an item in the Item
Resource Planning Maintenance window (Cards >> Inventory >> Item
Resource Planning).

Make or Buy items You can create a bill of materials for an item with a
Make or Buy replenishment method. You can select the replenishment method
for an item in the Item Resource Planning Maintenance window (Cards >>
Inventory >> Item Resource Planning).

4. You can accept the default bill of materials type—Manufacturing—or you can
select another. If you select Archived or Configured, you must enter a name for
the bill of materials.

The recommended fulfillment method for configured items is Make to Order–Manual. If

you select Super for the bill of materials type and the fulfillment method for the item is
not Make to Order–Manual, a message appears and you’ll have the option to change the
fulfillment option, continue or cancel. For more information, refer to Creating a super
bill of materials on page 205 and Fulfillment methods for configured items on page 207.

5. Enter an effective date. Refer to Bills of materials and component effective dates on
page 119 for more information about effective dates.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 111

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

6. Accept the default bill of materials category—Regular—or select another.

If you’re creating a bill of materials for a subassembly and you don’t want to have to
create separate manufacturing orders for the item when it’s needed for higher-order
assemblies, be sure the category is Phantom. Although the purpose of creating a
phantom bill of materials is to create a subassembly that doesn’t need to be built with a
separate manufacturing order, you also can create manufacturing orders for phantom
items, if needed.

7. Accept the default revision level—1—or enter another. Refer to Chapter 17,
“Revisions and archived bills,” for more information about revision levels.

8. Decide whether to backflush all components in this bill of materials.

Backflushing means that the component quantities aren’t issued to work
centers, but that they are accounted for when a manufacturing order associated
with this bill of materials is closed.

Refer to Backflushing bill of materials components on page 116 for more information
about backflushing options.

• Mark Backflush Item in the left pane to have component quantities for all
items in this bill of materials backflushed. You can change this setting for
specific components later in the right pane of the window.

• Unmark Backflush if materials should not be backflushed.

9. You can enter the default issue-to and issue-from locations for the components
in the bill of materials. Click the expansion button on the Default Sites field to
open the Bill of Materials Defaults window, where you can enter the sites.

The issue-from site is the inventory site components are taken from. The issue-
to site is the work center components are delivered to. You can override the
default sites on a component-by-component basis, if needed.

10. To add an item to the bill of materials, click the button with the green plus sign
just above the tree view. Fields in the right pane of the window will become
available.

11. A message appears. Choose Yes to save your changes and to continue.

12. Enter or select a component to add to the bill of materials.

Refer to Requirements for bill of materials components on page 115 for more
information about which items can be added to a bill of materials.

13. Accept the position number assigned to the component or change it. Refer to
Position numbers on page 101 for more information.

14. Enter information about the component in fields in the right pane.

15. Click Add to add the component information to the tree view in the left pane.

If you manually assigned a position number that is already assigned to a component on

this bill of materials, you’ll be able to choose a different position number for this
component or have the existing number reassigned. Refer to Position numbers on
page 101 for more information.

112 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 2 BILL OF MATERIALS ENTRY

16. Repeat steps 11 through 13 to continue adding items to the bill of materials.

17. Choose Tree view.

18. Choose Save to save the bill of materials.

Adding a component to a bill of materials

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to add components to an existing bill of
materials. Refer to Requirements for bill of materials components on page 115 for
information about what items can be bill of materials components.

To add a component to a bill of materials:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials to add components to. The
manufacturing bill of materials will be displayed, but you can select any other
bill of materials for the selected item.

3. If you select Archived or Configured, enter or select the appropriate BOM

Name.

4. Be sure the highlight in the tree view is on the parent item, and click the green
plus sign button above the tree view.

5. Enter or select the new component in the right pane.

6. Accept the position number assigned to the component or change it. Refer to
Position numbers on page 101 for more information.

7. Enter other information about the component in the fields in the right pane. You
can override the default settings for the issue-to and issue-from sites, enter the
quantity of the component needed for the bill of materials, and make other
changes, as needed.

8. Click Add.

If you manually assigned a position number that is already assigned to a component on

this bill of materials, you’ll be able to choose a different position number for this
component or have the existing number reassigned. Refer to Position numbers on
page 101 for more information.

9. Continue with steps 5 through 8 for each component to add to the bill.

10. Click Tree view, and then click Save.

Changing component details

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to change component information, such as
whether all of the component requirements for a manufacturing order must be
taken from a single lot or if the item requirements should be backflushed.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 113

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

To change component details:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the finished good or subassembly with the bill of materials that
includes items you want to work with. The manufacturing bill of materials will
be displayed by default, but you can select any other bill of materials that
includes the item.

3. If you selected an archived or configured bill of materials, enter or select the

appropriate BOM Name.

4. In the tree view, select a component.

5. Click the select item expansion button. Information about the component will
be displayed in the right pane of the window.

6. Change information in the window, as needed.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

Deleting a component from a bill of materials

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to delete a component from an existing bill
of materials.

To delete a component from a bill of materials:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials to remove components from.
The manufacturing bill of materials will be displayed by default, but you can
select any other bill of materials for the selected item.

3. Select the BOM Type—Engineering, Archived, Configured, or Super. If you

select Archived or Configured, enter or select the appropriate BOM Name.

4. In the tree view, mark the component to delete.

5. Click the remove item from BOM button. The button has a red minus sign on it.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to delete all unneeded components.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

Modifying a component bill of materials

If you’re working with a multi-level bill of materials, your final product will include
components that have their own bills of materials. You also can use the Bill of
Materials Entry window to modify the bills of materials of the components.

114 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 2 BILL OF MATERIALS ENTRY

To modify a component bill of materials:

1. In the navigation pane, choose the Manufacturing button, and then choose the
Bill of Materials list.

2. Mark an item.

3. Choose Edit to open the Bill of Materials Entry window.

4. Enter or select an item that includes a subassembly. The manufacturing bill of

materials will be displayed, but you can select any other bill of materials for the
selected item.

5. Select the BOM Type—Engineering, Archived, Configured, or Super. If you

select Archived or Configured, enter or select the appropriate BOM Name.

6. In the scrolling window, click the subassembly component item.

Information about the subassembly bill of materials will be displayed in the left
pane, and information about its components will be displayed in the right pane.

7. Modify the subassembly bill of materials using any of the following procedures.

• Adding a component to a bill of materials on page 113

• Deleting a component from a bill of materials on page 114
• Changing component details on page 113

8. Choose Save and close the window.

Removing a bill of materials

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to remove a bill of materials.

To remove a bill of materials:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials to remove. The manufacturing
bill of materials will be displayed by default, but you can select any other bill of
materials for the selected item.

3. Select the BOM Type—Engineering, Archived, Configured, or Super. If you

select Archived or Configured, enter or select the appropriate BOM Name.

4. Choose Delete and close the window.

Requirements for bill of materials components

Not all items can be components of all bills of materials. Refer to the following
guidelines.

• You can add a standard cost component to the bill of materials for an actual cost
finished good.

• You can’t add an actual cost component to a bill of materials for a standard cost
finished good.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 115

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

• You can’t add an item with the Kit type to a bill of materials.

• If you add an item with the Services, Miscellaneous, or Flat Fee type to a bill of
materials, those items must be backflushed.

• Average cost valuation methods can be used for finished goods or components.
If you’re working in an average cost environment, however, you should be sure
that system settings prevent you from allowing your inventory to be negative.
Refer to Setting up manufacturing order processing in Chapter 4, “Manufacturing
production functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for
more information.

• The same item number can be listed multiple times as a component on a bill of
materials, but it must have a different position number for each time it is listed.

• An item only can exist once on a super bill of materials, regardless of the
position number.

Backflushing bill of materials components

Backflushing is a method of accounting for the use of resources—labor, machine
time, and items—based on standards you’ve defined. Transactions to account for
the use of backflushed resources are created when finished goods are received.

For example, your business might include a procedure for painting part numbers on
items. The paint used for the procedure is minimal, so you estimate that 0.01 grams
of paint are used per finished item. When you create the bill of materials for the
finished item, you include the paint as a component of the finished item and you
mark the item to be backflushed. Later, when you receive finished goods for a
manufacturing order based on the bill of materials, inventory transactions will be
created to account for the use of paint, according to the bill of materials and the
manufacturing order quantity.

Backflushing is typically used when a component is used in very small quantities—

such as in the paint example—or when the cost of the component isn’t significant
enough to warrant the expense of issuing and tracking components.

You can backflush entire bills of materials or specific components. You must
backflush items whose Item Type (from the Item Maintenance window) is Services,
Flat Fee, or Miscellaneous, or if the item is floor stock. You also can backflush
phantom parent items or components of phantom parent items.

To backflush all components Mark Backflush Components in the Bill of

Materials Entry window (Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials).

To backflush only specific components Mark the Backflush option in the

Bill of Materials Entry window for all the components that should be backflushed.

When an item is marked as backflushed in the Bill of Materials Entry window, the
Backflush option in the Picklist window automatically will be marked.

Shrinkage for bill of materials components

When you enter or select an item to add to a bill of materials, the default shrinkage
percentage for the item typically comes from the Item Resource Planning
Maintenance window.

116 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 2 BILL OF MATERIALS ENTRY

However, different rules apply if the replenishment method for the item is Make or
if the item is a phantom item. Refer to the following table for more information.

Replenishment
Method Default shrinkage percentage
Buy Comes from the Item Resource Planning Maintenance window.
Make No default shrinkage percentage is supplied.
Make or Buy A message appears when you add a make or buy item to a bill of
materials, and you’ll have the option to select the bill of materials type
for the item.
If you choose Yes—if quantities of this item should be made—you’ll
need to select a bill of materials type. If you choose Phantom, the default
shrinkage percentages for the components of the phantom item will
come from the Item Resource Planning Maintenance window.
If you choose No—if quantities of the item should be purchased—no
default shrinkage percentage is supplied.

Regardless of the default shrinkage percentages, you can change them in the Shrink
% field for each component, if needed.

How floor stock costs are applied

Floor stock is a designation for items that don’t need to be issued for a
manufacturing order. Usually, the cost of floor stock items is not applied to the
manufacturing order, but to an expense account you specify.

To apply costs to an expense account When you use the Floor Stock
options in Manufacturing—either in the Item Engineering Data window when you
enter item information or in the Bill of Materials Entry window when you create a
bill of materials—the costs of the floor stock items are applied to an expense account
you specify in the Manufacturing Order Preference Defaults window.

To apply costs to a manufacturing order Some companies prefer to have

the costs of floor stock applied to the manufacturing order, but still don’t want to
have to issue the floor stock items. To use this kind of floor stock, be sure all floor
stock options are cleared. You might need to check both the Item Engineering Data
window for the item and the Bill of Materials Entry window for the bill of materials.
Then specify the same site for the issue-from and issue-to sites for the component
item in the bill of materials.

If you mark the floor stock option, the item won’t be included in standard cost rollup
calculations.

Component fixed quantity

Most components in a bill of materials go directly into a finished good. Therefore,
the quantity information for a component is usually per finished good; for example,
a wagon manufacturer would use four wheels per finished wagon, or an electronics
manufacturer might use three resistors per unit.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 117

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Sometimes, however, manufacturing orders require components that don’t go

directly into finished goods. For example, you might use some components to check
machine settings or calibration for each manufacturing order. This fixed quantity is
per manufacturing order, not per finished good. The quantity stays the same,
regardless of the number of finished goods being built from a particular
manufacturing order.

You can enter a fixed quantity for any component in a bill of materials. Later, when
you build a picklist based on the bill of materials, the fixed quantity is added to the
component quantity required for the manufacturing order.

Specifying an alternate component in a bill

To substitute one component item for another in a manufacturing order, you must
set up the bill of materials to use alternate items. You must be sure that the primary
item, which is the original component, is included in the bill of materials. You also
must add a secondary item, which is an alternate item, to the bill of materials.
Finally, you must assign the secondary item to be an alternate for the primary item.

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to specify an alternate item.

This procedure assumes that you’ve already created a bill of materials that includes a
component that you’re making the substitution for.

To specify an alternate component in a bill:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the finished good item number.

3. Select the BOM type and, if needed, the BOM name for the bill you’re adding
alternate information to.

4. Click the add item button, and add the component to substitute for the original
component.

5. In the right pane, enter other information for the alternate item, such as the
issue-from and issue-to sites. Refer to Adding a component to a bill of materials on
page 113 for more information.

6. Mark the Alternate option.

7. The Alternate For field will be available. Enter or select the primary item.

8. Choose Save, and close the window.

You also can verify that one or more alternates has been assigned to an item, if
needed. Refer to Verifying alternate assignments.

Verifying alternate assignments

Use the BOM Component Assigned Alternates window to see which secondary
items have been assigned to be alternates for a primary item in a bill of materials.

118 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 2 BILL OF MATERIALS ENTRY

To verify alternate assignments:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the finished good item number.

3. Select the BOM type and, if needed, the BOM name for the bill you’re adding
alternate information to.

4. In the tree view, click the component item that has one or more substitutes.

5. Choose the Assigned Alternates expansion button to open the BOM

Component Assigned Alternates window.

Refer to Specifying an alternate component in a bill on page 118 for more information
about assigning alternates.

6. View the information.

7. When you’ve finished, close the window.

Bills of materials and component effective dates

Manufacturing Bill of Materials includes two types of effective dates. You can enter
an effective date for the bill of materials record, and you can enter separate effective
in and out dates for each component in the bill of materials.

Bill of materials effective dates

The effective date for a bill of materials is the date when the bill of materials is
available for use in production. No manufacturing orders can be based on a bill of
materials before the effective date for the bill of materials, which you can enter in
the Effective Date field in the left pane of the Bill of Materials Entry window.

For example, suppose a manufacturing company has designed a new radio. The
company has submitted the plans for the radio to an agency, such as the Federal
Communications Commission or Underwriters Laboratories. The company might
want to prepare for production even though no manufacturing orders can be started
for the radios until the approvals are received. The company could enter a bill of
materials effective date that is far in the future, and then change the effective date
when the approvals are received. This allows the company to set up the bill of
materials and other Manufacturing documents beforehand, so production can begin
quickly when the approvals are received.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 119

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Component effective dates

You might need to add or remove components from a bill of materials on a specific
date. For example, a toy manufacturer might have to add a safety warning label to a
toy to meet new safety regulations on a certain date.

You can enter an In Date and an Out Date for each component in the Bill of
Materials Entry window.

To add a component on a certain date Enter or select the date the

component should be added to the bill of materials in the In Dt. (In Date) field in the
Bill of Materials Entry window.

To remove a component on a certain date Enter or select the date the

component should be removed from the bill of materials in the Out Dt. (Out Date)
field in the Bill of Materials Entry window.

If the Out Date for a component is after the required date for a picklist, then the component
won’t be included in the picklist. Refer to How required dates are calculated in Chapter 6,
“Manufacturing order overview,” in the Manufacturing Production Functions
documentation for more information.

Effects of engineering changes on bills

If your company is using Engineering Change Management, you can set
preferences so messages will appear if you modify the bill of materials for an item
that is being changed.

To view the Engineering Change Request, use the Engineering Change Request -
View Only window. Refer to Handling ECM notifications in other modules in Chapter
10, “Engineering change inquiries,” in the Manufacturing Management Functions
documentation for more information.

Adding user-defined information to bills

You can add up to two fields of information for each component in each bill of
materials. Refer to Setting up bills of materials system settings in Chapter 3,
“Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation
for information about creating the labels that will appear on the user-defined fields.

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to add user-defined information to bills of
materials.

To add user-defined information to bills:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials to add component details to.
The manufacturing bill of materials will be displayed, but you can select any
other bill of materials for the selected item.

3. Select the BOM type—Engineering, Archived, Configured, or Super. If you

selected Archived or Configured, enter or select the appropriate BOM Name.

4. In the tree view, highlight the component item to add details to.

120 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 2 BILL OF MATERIALS ENTRY

5. Enter information in the fields for user-defined fields.

6. Choose Save and close the window.

Accounting for by-products in a bill of materials

Some manufacturing processes result in by-products—secondary products that are
produced when a primary product is produced, usually at a predictable rate. For
example, a lumber-milling business that cuts trees to specific sizes would have
leftover pieces. Those leftover pieces could be scrapped, or they could be ground to
sawdust for use in making pressed-wood products, such as plywood.

You can use the Bill of Materials Entry window to account for the by-products
produced by your processes. To do this, add the by-product to the bill of materials
as if the by-product item were a component of the bill of materials—expressing the
amount of by-product produced as a negative number. Refer to Adding a component to a bill
of materials on page 113.

For example, suppose a metal fabrication business produces one of its items by
cutting shapes from sheets of metal. The metal that is left over from the process—
between the cutout shapes—is a by-product that the business sells to a recycling
center. Past experience shows that for every assembly cut from the metal,
approximately one pound of scrap metal is produced as a by-product. To reflect the
by-product amounts produced, the bill of materials for a single assembly would
include an entry for -1 pounds of by-product. When finished goods are received for
a manufacturing order based on that bill of materials, material transactions are
created to add one pound of by-product to inventory for each assembly.

For more information about accounting for by-product quantities produced with
manufacturing orders, refer to Manufacturing order receipts with by-products in Chapter
13, “Receipts and closing,” in the Manufacturing Production Functions documentation.

Component quantities and rounding

You can add components to a bill of materials in various units of measure. However,
because the information is stored in the base unit of measure, the result might not be
what you expect, due to rounding.

Suppose a component on a bill of materials uses five decimal places for quantity
information and you use a smaller unit of measure for the item than the base unit of
measure. For example, your bill of materials calls for 15.12345 half-units of
Component A, which uses units for its base unit of measure. To store that
information, it is converted to the base unit of measure:

15.12345 x 0.5 = 7.561725

Notice that there are now six decimal places of information to the right of the
decimal point. This has to be stored as five decimal places, so it’s rounded to
7.56173. When the number is converted back to the unit of measure used in the bill
of materials—by dividing by 0.5—the result is 15.12346, which doesn’t match the
originally entered amount.

To avoid this situation, you should enter component quantities in the base unit of
measure if the component item uses five decimals for quantities.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 121

122 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 13: Links to routings
The component requirements in bills of materials are like the list of ingredients in a
recipe, and routings are the instructions that explain how to use the components.
Components and the routing information is all you need to produce a finished item
in a manufacturing facility.

To produce a finished item, you can specify when certain components are needed in
the process. You can use the BOM Routing Link window to create links to bills of
materials and routings. You also can create links to bills of materials and routings
for each position number on the bill of materials, even if the same component is
listed multiple times with different position numbers.

Linking bills of materials and routings can help you manage the delivery of your
component items. If you’re building a house, for example, you won’t want all the
nails delivered to the site the first day—you’ll want them delivered as they are
needed. If you link your bills of materials and routings, you can more closely match
the delivery of components to the work center when they are needed and where
they are needed.

MRP Linking bills of materials and routing sequences helps Material

Requirements Planning (MRP) and picklist operations indicate material use at the
exact step in the process where those materials are required. This facilitates Just-In-
Time (JIT) material planning.

Sales Configurator Links between bills of materials and routings are required
for using the Manufacturing Sales Configurator. Refer to Chapter 25, “Bills and
routings,” for more information about using links with the Sales Configurator.

Outsourcing If you’re using outsourcing, we recommend that you use links

between bills of materials and routing sequences. This ensures that purchase orders
are released and shipments are suggested at the appropriate time.

To use the BOM Routing Link window, you also must be using Manufacturing Order
Processing, which includes routings windows.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Linking component usage to a routing sequence

• Modifying bill of materials and routing links
• Unlinking components and routing sequences
• Viewing link information

Linking component usage to a routing sequence

A routing sequence is the smallest part of a routing. It includes information about
how and where a task should be done to build an item. Routing sequences also
usually include information about the required labor codes and machines needed to
complete the task, as well as information about the time needed to complete the
task.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 123

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

When a manufacturing order is created, raw material shrinkage is reflected in the

picklist quantities if the manufacturing order uses a scheduling preference that
applies raw material shrinkage. Therefore, if you’re linking component quantities
that have raw material shrinkage, link only the component quantity that would be
needed if there were no shrinkage. Otherwise, your picklist quantities could be
greater than what is actually needed.

Use the BOM Routing Link window to complete this procedure.

To link component usage to a routing sequence:

1. Open the BOM Routing Link window.
(Transactions >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials >> BOM/Rtg Link)

2. Enter or select the parent part item with the bill of materials and routing to link.
If the parent part has more than one bill of materials, use the BOM Type and
Name fields to choose the appropriate bill of materials.

3. Enter or select the routing that includes the routing sequence to link to the bill
of materials.

4. In the Routing Sequence scrolling window, mark the sequence to link to the
component information. A black dot appears when you’ve marked a sequence.

5. In the Component Item Number scrolling window, mark the component

number to link to the marked sequence. A black dot appears when you’ve
marked a component.

6. Mark the option that determines what portion of the component quantity to
link to the routing sequence.

All Mark All to link the entire component quantity to the sequence.

Percent of Total Mark Percent of Total to specify the component quantity to

be linked as a percentage.

Number of Total Mark Number of Total to specify the component quantity

to be linked as a number of units.

124 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 3 LIN KS TO R OUTINGS

7. If you marked Percent of Total or Number of Total, enter the percentage or

number of units.

You can change these amounts later, if needed. Refer to Modifying bill of materials and
routing links for more information.

8. Choose Insert. The routing and component information and the amount of the
component linked to the sequence will be added to the lower scrolling window.
Your changes will be saved when they’re displayed in the lower scrolling
window.

When a manufacturing order is created, raw material shrinkage is reflected in

the picklist quantities if the manufacturing order uses a scheduling preference
that applies raw material shrinkage. If you’re linking component quantities that
have raw material shrinkage, link only the component quantity that would be
needed if there were no shrinkage; otherwise, your picklist quantities could be
greater than what is actually needed.

The position number also will be displayed. The position numbers for the items
in the lower scrolling window are assigned, based on the quantity of the item
linked in the upper scrolling window.

• If there isn’t a quantity for the item linked, the position number assigned is
the position number of the bill of materials item.

• If there is a quantity for the item linked, the position number assigned is the
next available number from all the items on the bill of materials routing link
for the bill of materials and routing.

If the position number exceeds the allowed limit, you must renumber components and
manually assign the position number before you’ll be able to insert the item. Refer to
Position number guidelines on page 103 for more information.

9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 to link components and routing sequences.

You can link a single component to multiple routing sequences, if you like.

10. When you’ve finished linking component requirements and sequences, close
the window.

Modifying bill of materials and routing links

You can use the BOM Routing Link window to change the amount of the
component usage linked to a particular sequence.

To modify bill of materials and routing links:

1. Open the BOM Routing Link window.
(Transactions >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials >> BOM/Rtg Link)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials and routing link.

3. If the item has more than one bill of materials, use the BOM Type and Name
fields to choose the appropriate bill of materials.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 125

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

4. Enter or select the routing that includes the routing sequence to link to this bill
of materials.

5. In the lower scrolling window, locate the combination of component and

routing sequence to change. Choose the expansion button for the line to open
the Set Amount window.

6. Determine what portion of the component quantity to link to the routing

sequence.

All Mark All to link the entire component quantity to the sequence.

Percent of Total Mark Percent of Total to specify the component quantity to

be linked as a percentage.

Number of Total Mark Number of Total to specify the component quantity

to be linked as a number of units.

7. If you marked Percent of Total or Number of Total, enter the percentage or

number of units.

8. Choose OK. The routing and component information and the amount of the
component linked to the sequence will be added to the lower scrolling window
in the BOM Routing Link window. Your changes will be saved when they’re
displayed in the lower scrolling window.

9. Close the window.

Unlinking components and routing sequences

Use the BOM Routing Link window to unlink components and routing sequences.

To unlink components and routing sequences:

1. Open the BOM Routing Link window.
(Transactions >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials >> BOM/Rtg Link)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials and routing link to remove. If
the item has more than one bill of materials, use the BOM Type and Name fields
to choose the appropriate bill of materials.

3. Enter or select the routing that includes the routing sequence to unlink from this
bill of materials.

4. In the lower scrolling window, highlight the link to delete. Choose the delete
icon button. Your changes automatically will be saved.

5. Close the window.

126 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 3 LIN KS TO R OUTINGS

Viewing link information

You can use the drop-down list at the bottom of the BOM Routing Link window to
view more information about the links that have been created for a specific bill of
materials and routing. Refer to the following tables for more information about how
you can use the drop-down list to learn more about the links.

Information in the following tables assumes that an item number is displayed in the
BOM Routing Link window.

List selection is Item Number

Refer to the table for more information.

Routing Sequences Components Bottom scrolling window

will display:
None selected None selected None selected All linked sequences

List selection is Item & Routing

Refer to the table for more information.

Routing Sequences Components Bottom scrolling window

will display:
None selected None selected None selected Nothing
Selected None selected None selected Only linked sequences from the
selected routing

List selection is Item & Component Part

Refer to the table for more information.

Routing Sequences Components Bottom scrolling window

will display:
None selected None selected None selected Nothing
None selected None selected One or more is Only linked sequences for the
marked marked item

List selection is Item, Routing & Component Part

Refer to the table for more information.

Routing Sequences Components Bottom scrolling window

will display:
None selected None selected None selected Nothing
Selected None selected One or more is Only linked sequences in the
marked selected routing for the marked
item

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 127

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

List selection is Item, Routing & Sequence

Refer to the table for more information.

Routing Sequences Components Bottom scrolling window will

display:
None selected None selected None selected Nothing
Selected One or more is None selected Only linked sequences in the selected
marked routing for the marked sequence(s)

128 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 14: Bill of Materials copies
You can create a new bill of materials by using the Bill of Materials Entry window.
To create several similar bills of materials, you can copy and modify the original bill
of materials.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Copying a bill of materials

• Removing copied component requirements

Copying a bill of materials

You can use the BOM Copy window to create multiple bills of materials for the
same item. For example, you might have an engineering bill of materials for a
product that has been in development but that is ready for production. You can
create the manufacturing bill of materials—which is the bill of materials for
production use—by copying the engineering bill of materials. This is useful because
engineers can continue to use the engineering bill of materials while maintaining a
separate bill of materials for use in production.

You also can use a copy of an existing bill of materials to be the basis of a bill of
materials for a new item. For example, suppose a jewelry manufacturer has a bill of
materials for a diamond necklace, but wants to use the same setting for an emerald
necklace. The manufacturer could create a copy of the bill of materials for the
diamond necklace, remove the requirements for diamonds and add new
requirements for emeralds.

Links between bill of materials components and routing sequences are not copied when you
copy a bill of materials.

Use the BOM Copy window to create new bills of materials based on existing bills
of materials.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 129

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

To copy a bill of materials:

1. Open the BOM Copy window.
(Transactions >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials >> Copy)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials that will be the source BOM.
This is the bill of materials to be copied. You must select a made or make or buy
item.

3. The manufacturing bill of materials will be displayed, but you can select any
other bill of materials for the selected item. To choose a different bill, select the
BOM type—Engineering, Archived, Configured, or Super. If you choose
Archived or Configured, a BOM Name field will appear. Enter or select the
name of the specific bill of materials in that field.

4. In the New BOM field, enter or select the item to be produced with the new
copy of the source bill of materials. If you enter a new item—one that hasn’t yet
been defined in the Item Engineering Data window—you must enter a
description. You also must enter information about the item in the Item
Engineering Data window.

Refer to Entering item engineering data on page 66 for more information about using
the Item Engineering Data window.

5. Select the type of bill of materials to assign to the new bill of materials. Choices
are Manufacturing, Archived, Engineering, Configured, and Super bills of
materials. If you select Configured or Archived, enter a name for the bill of
materials in the BOM Name field that appears. Refer to Bill of materials types on
page 96 for more information about bill of materials types.

If a bill of materials already exists for the type you select—or, in the case of archived and
configured bills of materials, for the type and name you specify—you’ll overwrite the
existing bill of materials.

6. Determine which components from the first level of the source bill of materials
to copy.

130 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 4 BILL OF MATERIALS COPIES

• To copy all component requirements, choose Add All.

• To copy only a specific component and its quantity information, mark the
component record in the upper scrolling window and choose Select. Add
additional components, as needed.

7. To copy component requirements from any subassemblies in the source bill of

materials, mark the subassembly in the upper scrolling window and choose
Cmpt BOM. The component requirements for the subassembly will be
displayed in the upper scrolling window.

Each instance of the component position number for the component from the
existing bill of materials will be copied to the new bill of materials. You can't
change these position numbers.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to add additional subassembly components to your new

bill of materials.

9. Review the component requirements in the lower scrolling window.

• To remove any of the component requirements, refer to Removing copied

component requirements on page 131.

• To add component requirements from another bill of materials, select a new

source bill of materials and repeat this procedure.

10. Choose Save.

After you’ve defined the new bill of materials, you can modify it using the Bill of
Materials Entry window.

Removing copied component requirements

Before you save a new bill of materials you’ve created in the BOM Copy window,
you can remove any components that aren’t needed. Use the BOM Copy window to
complete this procedure

The following procedure assumes that you’ve copied component requirements into
a new bill of materials using the BOM Copy window, but that you haven’t saved the
new bill of materials yet. If you have saved the new bill of materials, you must use
the Bill of Materials Entry window to remove components. Refer to Deleting a
component from a bill of materials on page 114 for more information about that
procedure.

To remove copied component requirements:

1. In the lower scrolling window of the BOM Copy window, mark the component
requirement to remove from the new bill of materials.

2. Choose Remove.

3. Mark and remove any additional components.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 131

132 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 15: Bill of Materials inquiries
Because bills of materials are critical to production processes, several users in your
organization might want to view bills of materials at the same time. Users
throughout your business can use the Bill of Materials View window to view bills of
materials and to calculate component requirements simultaneously without
affecting the bills of materials.

You also can use the Bill of Materials View window to view other information about
your bills of materials. For example, you can enter the quantity of the finished good
to build, and the extended quantity for the individual components will be
calculated. The cost of the bill of materials also is displayed.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Types of bill of materials queries

• Viewing components in bills of materials
• Scanning bills of materials for specific items
• Calculating component requirements
• Viewing cost information

Types of bill of materials queries

You can use the Bill of Materials View window to get information from your bill of
materials records in two different ways. You can start with a parent part and view
information about the components included in the bill of materials for that item, or
you can start with a component item and view information about all bills of
materials that include that component.

Refer to the table for more information about the information you can view using
the Bill of Materials View window. Refer to Viewing components in bills of materials on
page 133 for more information about Bill of Materials queries, and to Scanning bills
of materials for specific items on page 134 for more information about Where Used
queries.

Item type Bill of Material query Where Used query

Component item Not applicable Lists bills of materials that
include the selected item
Subassembly Lists components included in Lists bills of materials that
the bill of materials for the item include the selected item
Final assembly Lists components included in Not applicable
the bill of materials for the item

Viewing components in bills of materials

You can use the Bill of Materials View window to see basic information about bills
of materials.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 133

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

To view components in bills of materials:

1. Open the Bill of Materials View window.
(Inquiry >> Manufacturing >> BOM View)

2. Mark Bill of Material to display components listed in the bill of materials for an
item.

Only make and make or buy items will be available in the Items lookup window if the
Bill of Material option is marked.

3. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials to view.

4. The manufacturing bill of materials will be displayed, but you can choose a
different bill. To choose a different bill, select the BOM type—Engineering,
Archived, Configured, or Super. If you select Archived or Configured, a BOM
Name field will appear. Enter or select the name of the specific bill of materials
in that field.

5. View the information, as needed.

6. Close the window.

Scanning bills of materials for specific items

You can use the Bill of Materials View window to see which bills of materials
include a specific component or subassembly. Manufacturing refers to reports
generated this way as “where-used” reports because they list where a specific
component is used.

To scan bills of materials for specific items:

1. Open the Bill of Materials View window.
(Inquiry >> Manufacturing >> BOM View)

2. Enter or select an item number.

134 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 5 BILL OF MATERIALS INQUI RIES

3. Enter or select the bill of materials type to search.

For example, if the BOM Type that’s displayed is MFG BOM, only bills of
materials with the manufacturing type will be included in the search.

4. Mark Where Used to display a list of assemblies that include the selected item
in their bills of materials.

5. View the information, as needed.

6. Close the window.

Calculating component requirements

You can use the Bill of Materials View window to calculate component
requirements based on item usage in a particular bill of materials and the quantity
you’re building.

To calculate component requirements:

1. Open the Bill of Materials View window.
(Inquiry >> Manufacturing >> BOM View)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials to view.

3. The manufacturing bill of materials will be displayed, but you can choose a
different bill. To choose a different bill, select the BOM type—Engineering,
Archived, Configured, or Super. If you select Archived or Configured, a BOM
Name field will appear. Enter or select the name of the specific bill of materials
in that field.

4. Select the revision level you to view.

5. Enter the Qty to Build and use the tab key to move from the field.

Highlight a component in the tree view. Information about its extended

quantity requirements will be displayed in the right pane.

6. When you’ve finished, close the window.

Viewing cost information

You can use the Bill of Materials View window to quickly see costing information
about items.

To view cost information:

1. Open the Bill of Materials View window.
(Inquiry >> Manufacturing >> BOM View)

2. Enter or select the item with the bill of materials to view.

3. The manufacturing bill of materials will be displayed, but you can choose a
different bill. To choose a different bill, select the BOM type—Engineering,
Archived, Configured, or Super. If you select Archived or Configured, a BOM
Name field will appear. Enter or select the name of the specific bill of materials
in that field.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 135

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

4. Select the revision level to view.

5. View the cost information in the BOM Cost field.

6. If the item uses the periodic valuation method, you can click the calculator
button to open the Standard Cost Maintenance window, which displays
information about the standard cost of the item.

7. When you’ve finished viewing the cost information, close the window.

136 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 16: Reference designators
Some manufacturers use reference designators to specify the location of a
component in an assembly. For example, a circuit board manufacturer might have a
board assembly that uses three resistors. Reference designators are used to specify
where on the circuit board those resistors should be placed.

You can use the Reference Designator Assignment window to enter reference
designator information. You can use the Reference Designator Inquiry window to
view the information.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Entering a reference designator

• Modifying or deleting a reference designator
• Viewing a reference designator

Entering a reference designator

Use the Reference Designator Assignment window to enter reference designators
for a component in a bill of materials. A reference designator is information that
specifies where components should be used in an assembly, such as the placement
of four resistors on a printed circuit board.

You can use the BOM Mass Updates window to add the same reference designators for a
component that is part of several bills of materials. Refer to Chapter 18, “Mass updates,” for
more information.

To enter a reference designator:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the bill of materials that includes the components to enter
reference designators for.

3. Highlight the component in the tree view.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 137

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

4. In the right pane, click the Reference Designators expansion button to open the
Reference Designator Assignment window.

5. In the first blank line of the scrolling window, enter the first reference
designator.

6. Continue, repeating step 5 until you’ve entered as many reference designators

as you like.

The quantity of the component is displayed in the window, as well as the

number of reference designators that have been entered. The component
quantity doesn’t have to be equal to the number of reference designators.

7. When you’ve finished, click OK to save your changes and close the window.

Modifying or deleting a reference designator

You can use the Reference Designator Assignment window to modify or delete
reference designation information.

To modify or delete a reference designator:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the bill of materials that includes the components to enter
reference designators for.

3. Highlight the component in the tree view.

4. In the right pane, click the Reference Designators expansion button to open the
Reference Designator Assignment window.

5. Modify information, as needed.

To modify a reference designator Type over the incorrect information

directly in the scrolling window.

138 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 6 REFERENCE DESIGNATORS

To delete a reference designator Select the line to delete, and choose the
delete row icon button in the upper right corner of the scrolling window.

6. When you’ve finished, click OK to save your changes and close the window.

Viewing a reference designator

You can use the Reference Designator Inquiry window to view the reference
designation information that has been added to a component in a bill of materials. A
reference designator is information that specifies where components should be used
in an assembly, such as the placement of four resistors on a printed circuit board.

To view a reference designator:

1. Open the Bill of Materials View window.
(Inquiry >> Manufacturing >> BOM View)

2. Enter or select the bill of materials that includes the components to view
reference designators for.

3. Highlight the component in the tree view.

4. In the right pane, click the Reference Designators expansion button to open the
Reference Designator Inquiry window.

5. When you’ve finished viewing the information, close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 139

140 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 17: Revisions and archived bills
Manufacturing includes two methods you can use to store historical information
about your bills of materials. You can use revision history, archives for bills of
materials, or both.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Revision levels and Archived bills of materials

• Creating a new revision level for a bill
• Viewing past revisions of a bill of materials
• Removing Archived bills of materials

Revision levels and Archived bills of materials

It’s helpful to understand revision levels and Archived bills of materials so that you
can decide which method will work best for your business. The most significant
difference is that you can create a manufacturing order based on an Archived bill of
materials, but you can’t create a manufacturing order based on any revision level
for a bill of materials, except the most current revision level.

Revision levels
When you enter a bill of materials, you can enter a revision level for the bill of
materials. Each combination of finished good item, bill of materials type, and (if the
bill of materials type is Archived or Configured) bill of materials name can have
multiple revision levels.

When you modify any bill of materials, you can specify a new revision level for the
modified bill. When you enter a new revision level for the bill of materials, a
message appears. You’ll have the option to create a new revision level for the bill of
materials. At the same time, a copy of the existing bill of materials (with its previous
revision level) is stored.

When you select a bill of materials in the Bill of Materials Entry window, the newest
revision level of the bill of materials is displayed. You can’t edit the old revision
levels of the bill of materials, but you can view them with the Bill of Materials View
window. Revision level history can’t be removed unless you remove the entire bill
of materials.

Archived bills of materials

Another method for storing old bills of materials is to use the Archived bill of
materials type. Bills of materials can become archived (that is, get the Archived bill
of materials type) in any of these ways:

Manually If you want to archive a current bill of materials, use the BOM Copy
window to create a copy of the current bill of materials, and then assign the
Archived bill of materials type to it. (You’ll also need to assign a BOM Name to the
copy.)

Automatically for configured items Each time you use the Sales
Configurator to configure an item and then build a manufacturing order for that
item, a bill of materials with the Configured type is created. If you marked the
option in the Manufacturing Order Preference Defaults window so that configured
bills of materials automatically are archived when the manufacturing order is
completed, Archived bills of materials will be created.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 141

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Automatically for mass-changed bills of materials If you marked the

option in the BOM Preference Defaults window to automatically archive mass-
changed bills of materials, bills of materials with the Archived type automatically
will be created when you use the BOM Mass Updates window to modify multiple
bills of materials at one time.

Bills of materials with the Archived type can be modified. You can purge old
Archived bills of materials. Refer to Removing Archived bills of materials on page 143.

Creating a new revision level for a bill

You can use the Bill of Materials Entry window to create a new revision level for a
bill of materials.

To create a new revision level for a bill:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the finished good item number and the BOM Type for the bill of
materials you want to change.

3. If the BOM Type is Archived or Configured, you must enter or select a name for
the bill of materials.

4. Select the text in the Rev. Level field, and enter the new revision level. A
message will appear.

• If the revision level already has been used for this combination of finished
good and bill of materials type, you’ll have the option to view the old
version of the bill of materials.

• If the revision level hasn’t been used for this combination of finished good
and bill of materials type, the message will state that the revision level does
not exist. You’ll have the option to move the current bill of materials to
revision history (with its old revision number) and to create a copy of the
bill of materials with the new revision level.

5. Change other information for the bill of materials, as needed.

6. Click Save to save your changes and close the window.

Viewing past revisions of a bill of materials

You can use the BOM Revision History window to view the different revision levels
for a combination of finished good and bill of materials type. You also can use the
window to view which revision levels for which bills of materials include a
particular component.

142 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 7 REVI SIONS AND ARC HI VED B ILLS

To view past revisions of a bill of materials:

1. Open the BOM Revision History window.
(Inquiry >> Manufacturing >> BOM View >> click the Rev Level link)

2. Decide what kind of revision history you want to view.

• To view revision history for a combination of finished good and bill of

materials type, enter or select the combination of finished good and bill of
materials type. If the bill of materials type is Configured or Archived, you
also can enter or select a BOM Name.

• To view all the bill of materials revision levels that include a specific
component, enter or select the component.

3. Click Refresh.

4. View the information in the scrolling window.

5. To view more information about a specific revision level, double-click the

record in the scrolling window. Information about the bill of materials at the
specific revision level will be displayed in the Bill of Materials View window.

6. When you’ve finished viewing information, close the windows.

Removing Archived bills of materials

If you don’t need to keep Archived bills of materials indefinitely, you might want to
purge them occasionally. There are no restrictions for purging Archived bills of
materials.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 143

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

To remove Archived bills of materials:

1. Open the Remove Archived BOMs window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >>
Remove Archived BOMs)

2. Decide what Archived bills of materials to remove.

You can remove all bills of materials with the Archived type, or you can remove
a range of bills of materials.

3. You can mark the Print Report option to have a list of the removed bills of
materials printed.

4. Click Process.

5. When processing is finished, close the window.

144 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 18: Mass updates
Sometimes a company needs to make changes to a large number of its bills of
materials. For instance, the company might need to replace all instances of one
component with another, add or remove a component from a bill of materials, or
change information about a component, such as whether it is backflushed or used
as floor stock. You can use the BOM Mass Updates window to complete these
changes.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Overview of mass updates for bills of materials

• Terminology for mass updates to bills of materials
• Adding an item to multiple bills of materials
• Removing an item from multiple bills of materials
• Updating an item in multiple bills of materials
• Replacing an item in multiple bills of materials
• Default values for replacement items
• Changing default values for mass updates

Overview of mass updates for bills of materials

You can use the BOM Mass Updates window to change information about one
component in multiple bills of materials. There are several types of changes you can
make.

• You can replace one component with another component on several bills of
materials.

• You can add a component to several bills of materials.

• You can remove a component from several bills of materials.

• You can update information about a component that already exists on several
bills of materials.

When you make these changes, you can choose to make an identical change to all
bills of materials (adding one unit of a widget to all bills of materials, for example)
or you can make slightly different changes (adding one widget to some bills of
materials, and two or more to other bills of materials). You also can use the BOM
Mass Update Defaults window to choose the information that’s the same for all of
the changed bills of materials. For example, you might want to specify the issue-
from site for all widgets, even though you’re adding different quantities of widgets
to different bills of materials. Regardless of whether you specify default values, you
can adjust each bill of materials, as needed. When processing is complete, a report is
generated that displays information about the bills of materials that were changed.

You can use settings in the BOM Preference Defaults window to choose how the
mass updates will work in your company. You can choose to archive the original
versions of the bills of materials that are updated, so that you have a record of the
changes that are made. You can choose to exclude certain bill of materials types
from updates. You also can set up process security, so that users must be part of a
process security group or supply a password before the bills of materials can be
updated.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 145

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

For more information about the setup options, refer to Setting up bills of materials system
settings in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation.

Terminology for mass updates to bills of materials

It’s helpful to understand these terms when you’re making mass updates to bills of
materials.

Replaced item The item that will be removed from marked bills of materials
when you process the mass update.

Replacement item The item that will be added or updated on marked bills of
materials when you process the mass update.

Defaults values Values used in bills of materials that might apply to the
replacement item in several bills of materials. For example, to change the issue-to
site for a component from the North site to the South site, you could enter the name
of the South site as a default value.

Adding an item to multiple bills of materials

You can use the BOM Mass Updates window to add a component to multiple bills
of materials. You also can indicate which bill of materials types to include or
exclude from the mass update.

This procedure assumes that you’ll enter information about the component separately for
each bill of materials. For information about how to set up default information for the
component, refer to Changing default values for mass updates on page 153.

146 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 8 MASS UPDATES

To add an item to multiple bills of materials:

1. Open the BOM Mass Updates window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >> BOM
Mass Updates)

2. Mark the bill of materials types to exclude from this mass change.

Manufacturing Mark this option to exclude manufacturing bills of

materials.

Engineering Mark this option to exclude engineering bills of materials.

Configured Mark this option to exclude configured bills of materials.

Super Mark this option to exclude super bills of materials.

3. Enter or select the Replacement Item.

4. Select a BOM Type. If you select Archived or Configured for the BOM Type,
enter or select a BOM Name.

If you’re adding a Buy item, or if you’re adding a Make or Buy item to be

treated as a Buy item in the bills of materials, skip this step.

5. Mark or unmark the option to exclude bill of materials that already have this
item as a component.

6. To restrict the bills of materials that will be displayed in the scrolling window,
you can mark Item Number or Item Description and choose a range of bills of
materials to display.

7. Choose Refresh. All the bills of materials where the item that you’ve selected
could be added are displayed in the scrolling window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 147

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

The types that you did not exclude are displayed in the scrolling window. To display
items that you chose to exclude, you can unmark the type to include and choose Refresh.

If you select an item that has a perpetual (actual) valuation method, for
example, bills of materials for only those finished goods that have a perpetual
valuation method are listed in the scrolling window. Items that use a perpetual
valuation method can’t be components of finished goods with periodic
valuation methods, so those bills of materials automatically are filtered from the
list.

8. Enter information directly in the scrolling window for each bill of materials
where you want the component to be added. You can choose the show button
for the scrolling window to view information about component information for
the bill of materials.

9. When you’ve finished entering information for a bill of materials, mark the line.
You can mark lines individually or you can use the Mark All button to mark all
lines.

When you mark an item—either individually or by choosing Mark All—a

position number will be assigned. If any position numbers exceed the allowed
limit, those components won't be selected. Refer to Chapter 11, “Position
numbers.” for more information.

If any of the bills of materials can’t be updated with the information you’ve
entered, one or more messages will be displayed. You won’t be able to
successfully mark a line until all the information conforms to rules for adding
components to a bill of materials.

Refer to the following topics for more information about rules for components:

• Requirements for bill of materials components on page 115

• Backflushing bill of materials components on page 116
• Shrinkage for bill of materials components on page 116
• Position number guidelines on page 103

If you choose Mark All and one or more bills of materials can’t be updated, a message is
displayed. Mark lines individually to see messages that have more specific details about
the issues that need to be addressed.

10. You can choose Preview to generate a report that will list how each marked bill
of materials will be updated. You can make changes to the information in the
scrolling window and generate the preview report again, as needed.

11. Choose Process to update the bills of materials and generate the BOM Mass
Updates Report. When processing is complete, close the window.

148 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 8 MASS UPDATES

Removing an item from multiple bills of materials

You can use the BOM Mass Updates window to remove a component from multiple
bills of materials.

To remove an item from multiple bills of materials:

1. Open the BOM Mass Updates window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >> BOM
Mass Updates)

2. Mark Remove Item for the Mass Updates Function.

3. Mark the bill of materials types to exclude from this mass change.

Manufacturing Mark this option to exclude manufacturing bills of

materials.

Engineering Mark this option to exclude engineering bills of materials.

Configured Mark this option to exclude configured bills of materials.

Super Mark this option to exclude super bills of materials.

4. Enter or select the Updated/Replaced Item.

If you’re removing a Buy item, or if you’re adding a Make or Buy item that is
treated as a Buy item, skip to step 5.

5. Select a BOM Type. If you select Archived or Configured for the BOM Type,
enter or select a BOM Name.

6. Mark or unmark the option to exclude bill of materials that already have this
item as a component.

7. To restrict the bills of materials that will be displayed in the scrolling window,
you can mark Item Number or Item Description and choose a range of bills of
materials to display.

8. Choose Refresh. All the bills of materials where the item that you’ve selected is
a first-level component are displayed in the scrolling window.

The types that you did not exclude are displayed in the scrolling window. To display
items that you chose to exclude, you can unmark the type to include and choose Refresh.

9. Mark lines for bills of materials where the component should be removed. You
can mark lines individually, or you can choose the Mark All button to mark all
lines.

10. You can choose Preview to generate a report that will list how each marked bill
of materials will be updated. You can make changes to the information in the
scrolling window and generate the preview report again, as needed.

11. Choose Process to update the bills of materials and generate the BOM Mass
Updates Report. When processing is complete, close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 149

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Updating an item in multiple bills of materials

You can use the BOM Mass Updates window to update the information for a
component. For example, you can use the window so that a certain washer is
always backflushed in all bills of materials.

This procedure assumes that you’ll enter information about the component separately for
each bill of materials. For information about how to set up default information for the
component, refer to Changing default values for mass updates on page 153.

To update an item in multiple bills of materials:

1. Open the BOM Mass Updates window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >> BOM
Mass Updates)

2. Mark Update or Replace Item for the Mass Updates Function.

3. Mark the bill of materials types to exclude from this mass change.

Manufacturing Mark this option to exclude manufacturing bills of

materials.

Engineering Mark this option to exclude engineering bills of materials.

Configured Mark this option to exclude configured bills of materials.

Super Mark this option to exclude super bills of materials.

4. Enter or select the Updated/Replaced Item.

If the item you’re updating is a Buy item or a Make or Buy item treated as a Buy
item, skip to step 5.

5. Select a BOM Type for the updated or replaced item. If you select Archived or
Configured for the BOM Type, enter or select a BOM Name.

6. Mark or unmark the option to exclude bills of materials that already have this
item as a component.

7. To restrict the bills of materials that will be displayed in the scrolling window,
you can mark Item Number or Item Description and choose a range of bills of
materials to display.

8. Choose Refresh. All the bills of materials that include the item in the first level
are displayed in the scrolling window.

The types that you did not exclude are displayed in the scrolling window. To display
items that you chose to exclude, you can unmark the type to include and choose Refresh.

9. Enter information directly in the scrolling window for each bill of materials.
You can choose the show button for the scrolling window to view information
about component information for the bill of materials.

150 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 8 MASS UPDATES

10. When you’ve finished entering information for a bill of materials, mark the line.
You can mark lines individually or you can use the Mark All button to mark all
lines.

When you mark an item—either individually or by choosing Mark All—a

position number will be assigned. If any position numbers exceed the allowed
limit, those components won't be selected. Refer to Chapter 11, “Position
numbers.” for more information.

If any of the bills of materials can’t be updated with the information you’ve
entered, one or more messages will be displayed. You won’t be able to
successfully mark a line until all the information conforms to rules for adding
components to a bill of materials.

Refer to the following topics for more information about rules for components:

• Requirements for bill of materials components on page 115

• Backflushing bill of materials components on page 116
• Shrinkage for bill of materials components on page 116
• Position number guidelines on page 103

If you choose Mark All and one or more bills of materials can’t be updated, a message is
displayed. Mark lines individually to see messages that have more specific details about
the issues that need to be addressed.

11. You can choose Preview to generate a report that will list how each marked bill
of materials will be updated. You can make changes to the information in the
scrolling window and generate the preview report again, as needed.

12. Choose Process to update the bills of materials and generate the BOM Mass
Updates Report. When processing is complete, close the window.

Replacing an item in multiple bills of materials

You can use the BOM Mass Updates window to replace one item with another—
replacing Component A with Component B, for example.

This procedure assumes that you’ll enter information about the component separately for
each bill of materials. For information about how to set up default information for the
component, refer to Changing default values for mass updates on page 153.

To replace an item in multiple bills of materials:

1. Open the BOM Mass Updates window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >> BOM
Mass Updates)

2. Mark Update or Replace Item for the Mass Updates Function.

3. Mark the bill of materials types to exclude from this mass change.

Manufacturing Mark this option to exclude manufacturing bills of

materials.

Engineering Mark this option to exclude engineering bills of materials.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 151

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

Configured Mark this option to exclude configured bills of materials.

Super Mark this option to exclude super bills of materials.

4. Enter or select the Updated/Replaced Item.

If the item you’re replacing is a Buy item or a Make or Buy item treated as a Buy
item, skip to step 5.

5. Select a BOM Type for the updated or replaced item. If you select Archived or
Configured for the BOM Type, enter or select a BOM Name.

6. Enter or select the Replacement Item. To update item information, the

replacement item should be the same as the replaced item.

If the replacement is a Buy item or a Make or Buy item that should be treated as
a Buy item, skip to step 7.

7. Select a BOM Type for the replacement item. If you select Archived or
Configured for the BOM Type, enter or select a BOM Name.

8. Mark or unmark the option to exclude bills of materials that already have this
item as a component.

9. To restrict the bills of materials that will be displayed in the scrolling window,
you can mark Item Number or Item Description and choose a range of bills of
materials to display.

10. Choose Refresh. All the bills of materials that include the replaced item in the
first level are displayed in the scrolling window. The new item will have the
same position number as the item it replaced.

The types that you did not exclude are displayed in the scrolling window. To display
items that you chose to exclude, you can unmark the type to include and choose Refresh.

11. Enter information directly in the scrolling window for each bill of materials.
You can choose the show button for the scrolling window to view information
about component information for the bill of materials.

12. When you’ve finished entering information for a bill of materials, mark the line.
You can mark lines individually or you can use the Mark All button to mark all
lines.

When you mark an item—either individually or by choosing Mark All—a

position number will be assigned. If any position numbers exceed the allowed
limit, those components won't be selected. Refer to Chapter 11, “Position
numbers.” for more information.

If any of the bills of materials can’t be updated with the information you’ve
entered, one or more messages will be displayed. You won’t be able to
successfully mark a line until all the information conforms to rules for adding
components to a bill of materials.

152 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 8 MASS UPDATES

Refer to the following topics for more information about rules for components:

• Requirements for bill of materials components on page 115

• Backflushing bill of materials components on page 116
• Shrinkage for bill of materials components on page 116
• Position number guidelines on page 103

If you choose Mark All and one or more bills of materials can’t be updated, a message is
displayed. Mark lines individually to see messages that have more specific details about
the issues that need to be addressed.

13. You can choose Preview to generate a report that will list how each marked bill
of materials will be updated. You can make changes to the information in the
scrolling window and generate the preview report again, as needed.

14. Choose Process to update the bills of materials and generate the BOM Mass
Updates Report. When processing is complete, close the window.

Default values for replacement items

When you add, replace, or update a component in bills of materials, default
information about the component is supplied. For example, a default issue-from site
is suggested when you add a component to a bill of materials.

The default values come from information you’ve entered in Manufacturing. Some
of the values come from information about the component, while other values come
from system preferences.

If the default values match the changes that you want to make to the bills of
materials, this works well. In some cases, however, you might want to override the
default values with different values. If you’re updating many bills of materials at
one time, it can be time consuming to change several values for each bill of
materials.

You can use the BOM Mass Update Defaults window to specify default information
for the components in the bills of materials you’re updating. You can specify
different default information for many values, or just one or two. The information
that you specify will be the default information for the component for each bill of
materials you’re updating. You can accept these new default values as you work
with the bills of materials, or you can change them on a case-by-case basis.

Changing default values for mass updates

If you’re adding, replacing, or updating a component on many bills of materials,
you might want to use the BOM Mass Update Defaults window to enter default
information for the replacement component.

For example, suppose you’re going to add a gummed label to all of the items in
certain product lines. The labels are inexpensive and will be kept on the production
floor, so you want them categorized as floor stock in all bills of materials.

You would use the BOM Mass Update Defaults window to enter the basic
information for the labels. You could specify the quantity, unit of measure, and the
floor stock option. That information automatically would be the default information
for each of the bills of materials displayed in the scrolling window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 153

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

The following procedure assumes that you want to add a component to bills of materials. To
use default values for updating or replacing an item, open the BOM Mass Update Defaults
window before marking any lines in the scrolling window, and continue as usual.

To use default values for mass updates:

1. Open the BOM Mass Updates window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >> BOM
Mass Updates)

2. Select the mass update function. Default values for mass updates are available
only if you’re adding or updating or replacing an item.

3. Enter or select the items involved.

• If you’re adding an item, select the Replacement Item.

• If you’re replacing or updating an item, select the Replaced Item and the
Replacement Item.

Refer to Adding an item to multiple bills of materials on page 146 or Replacing an item
in multiple bills of materials on page 151 for more specific information.

4. Choose Refresh to update the contents of the scrolling window.

5. Choose Default to open the BOM Mass Update Defaults window.

6. Mark New Value for each component value that you want to enter default
information for.

For example, if you’re updating the issue-from site for a component, you’d
mark the New Value radio button for Issue From.

7. Enter the default information for the component value. You might need to enter
or select a site, for example, or mark or clear a check box.

8. Choose OK.

154 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 1 8 MASS UPDATES

9. Continue working in the BOM Mass Updates window, entering additional

information for the lines as needed and marking lines that you want to be
updated.

If you choose Mark All and one or more bills of materials can’t be updated, a message is
displayed. Mark lines individually to see messages that have more specific details about
the issues that need to be addressed.

10. You can choose Preview to generate a report that will list how each marked bill
of materials will be updated. You can make changes to the information in the
scrolling window and generate the preview report again, as needed.

11. Choose Process to update the bills of materials and generate the BOM Mass
Updates Report. When processing is complete, close the window.

After processing is complete, any default bill of material information you entered in the
BOM Mass Update Defaults window is cleared. Default values must be reentered each
time you start to use the BOM Mass Updates window to update a group of bills of
materials.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 155

156 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 19: Engineering Data Management
Integration
After you have installed Microsoft Dynamics GP Manufacturing, you can use the
Engineering Data Management Integration to automate the transfer of data to
Microsoft Dynamics GP. The integration allows item and bill of materials (BOM)
information to be exchanged between a product lifecycle management (PLM) tool
and Manufacturing. The automation helps to prevent the errors that might occur
when you manually reenter the data into both systems. It also helps to keep the
updated item information synchronized within Microsoft Dynamics GP.

The product information is usually associated with a design that is created in

visualization files. Typically, these files are drawings, created with CAD authoring
tools or 3-D models created with modeling tools. The files are often large in size and
difficult to manage. With the integration, you can open and view design files
without having to run the full authoring tool that was used to create the files.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Viewing design files

• Selecting companies for integration
• Exporting inventoried items
• Selecting item classes to export
• Selecting item numbers to export
• Exporting inventoried items
• Importing engineering BOMs

Viewing design files

When you transfer data for selected items, you can view the design files that are
attached to the items. Instead of using the full authoring design tool, you can easily
view the design files with a viewer that you can dowload from the following Web
site: www.autodesk.com. Download the viewer to computers that you’ll use to view
the attached files.

Selecting companies for integration

Before you can transfer data between the two systems, be sure that at least one
company has been selected for the integration.

To select a company for integration:

1. Open the Company Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Setup >> Company >> Company.)

2. Select the company to include in the integration.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 157

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

3. Open the Engineering Integration Setup window.

(Additional >> Engineering Integration Setup)

4. Mark the Integrated with Engineering option.

5. Choose OK to save the changes and close the window.

You can select more than one company for the integration. Each bill of materials that
you selected in the companies will be displayed in a list where you can select the bills of
materials to import.

Exporting inventoried items

Before exporting inventoried items, you must specify the item class and item
numbers to transfer.

Complete the following tasks:

• Selecting item classes to export

• Selecting item numbers to export
• Exporting inventoried items

Selecting item classes to export

You must select the item class IDs to include in the export process before you begin
the process.

To select item classes to export:

1. Open the Item Class Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Setup >> Inventory >> Item Class)

2. Select the class ID to include in the export process.

3. Choose Additional >> Manufacturing Series Item Class Extras.

4. Mark the Include in Export to Engineering option.

5. Choose OK.

6. Choose Yes if the change should be reflected for all items with the selected class
ID. This updates all existing item records that are part of that item class.

158 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

C H A P T E R 1 9 ENGI NEER ING DATA MA NAGEMENT I NTEGRATION

If the Include in Export for Engineering option isn’t displayed in the specified windows,
be sure that you select at least one company for the integration. See Selecting companies
for integration on page 157.

Selecting item numbers to export

Only the selected item numbers can be exported. You must specify item numbers
before starting the export process.

To select item numbers to export:

1. Open the Item Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Inventory >> Item)

2. Select the item number to include in the export.

3. Choose the Go to button and select Item Engineering Data. The Item
Engineering Data window opens.

4. Mark the Include in Export to Engineering option.

5. Choose Save. The item number that you selected to export will be removed
from the selected record for the item after exporting it. You must select the item
numbers to export each time that you export them.

If the Include in Export for Engineering option isn’t displayed in the specified windows,
be sure that you select at least one company for the integration. See Selecting companies
for integration on page 157

Exporting inventoried items

After you select item classes and item numbers to export, you can start the export
process.

To export inventoried items:

1. Open the Export Items to Engineering window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >>
Export Items to Engineering)

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 159

PA RT 3 BILL OF MATERIALS

2. Mark or unmark the items to export.

3. Enter the name of the export file. The file will be created in the export folder
that was specified when you set up the integration.

You can change the export file path in the configuration settings of the integration. For
further details about changing the export folder path, see the Microsoft Dynamics GP
Engineering Data Management Integration Administrator’s Guide.

4. Choose Process.

The duration of the exporting process depends on the number of items that you selected.

5. After exporting the selected items, you can create reports that include
information about the exported items.

Importing engineering BOMs

You can import bills of materials into Microsoft Dynamics GP. Before importing,
each bill of materials component can be viewed or modified, as needed.

If the engineering bill of materials doesn’t exist, a new engineering bill of materials
will be created. If the engineering bill of materials already exists, the existing data
will be updated during the import process and components will be added, removed
and modified, as necessary.

When a new bill of materials is created or a new component is added to an existing

bill of materials, a bill of materials position number will be assigned to the
components. If a position number would be higher than the 9999 allowed limit, the
BOM data will not be imported. Refer to Chapter 11, “Position numbers,” for more
information.

The import updates the engineering BOM data. To overwrite the data for the manufacturing
BOM with data from the engineering BOM, use the BOM Copy window. Refer to Copying
a bill of materials on page 129 for more information.

To import engineering BOMs:

1. Open the Manufacturing Engineering Interface window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Utilities >> Manufacturing >>
Engineering Interface)

2. The scrolling window displays the BOMs that were exported and are available
to import into Microsoft Dynamics GP.

3. Mark or unmark the BOMs to import.

4. If no item class ID is specified for the selected items, enter a default item class
ID and choose Apply Default Item Class or select an individual item class ID for
each item in the Item Class ID column.

You can select only the Sales Inventory item class to import. You cannot enter a class ID
for an item that already exists in inventory.

An error cue indicates if there is mandatory data missing from the item details.
Click on the error cue to display the error message.

160 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

C H A P T E R 1 9 ENGI NEER ING DATA MA NAGEMENT I NTEGRATION

The error cue is displayed in the following situations:

Error cue Troubleshooting

The item does not exist in the Specify a valid item class ID.
Microsoft Dynamics GP inventory
and does not have an item class ID
entered.
The finished good item number and/ Change the item number in the engineering system.
or one or more of the component
item numbers has more than 30
characters.
The finished good item number and/ Change item type in the engineering system.
or one or more of the component
item numbers exists in Microsoft
Dynamics GP inventory but its item
type is Kit.
At least one component item Choose Finished Good Item Number expansion
number is new. It does not exist in button and specify an item class ID.
the Microsoft Dynamics GP
inventory, and an item class has not
yet been assigned to it.
At least one component item Choose Finished Good Item Number expansion
number is new. It exists in the button and specify the unit of measure information
Microsoft Dynamics GP inventory, for the selected items.
an item class has been assigned to
it, but the item doesn't have unit of
measure information.
At least one component item Choose Finished Good Item Number expansion
number that exists in the Microsoft button and specify the unit of measure information
Dynamics GP inventory has a unit of for the selected items.
measure that is not on the unit of
measure schedule for the item in the
Microsoft Dynamics GP inventory.

5. Choose the Finished Good Item Number expansion button to view and modify
the details of the selected items. Be sure that the item class ID and the unit of
measure are specified for each item.

6. Choose Process.

7. After the importing process is complete, you can create reports that include
information about the imported items.

The attached files also are imported with the selected items. To view the attachments,
you must download a viewer from www.autodesk.com.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 161

162 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
PART 4: SALES EXTENSIONS
 Part 4: Sales extensions
This part of the documentation describes how to set up and use Manufacturing
extensions to Sales Order Processing. It includes information you’ll need when you
enter sales orders in a manufacturing environment and tasks related to order
fulfillment.

When you install Manufacturing, windows are added to your Sales Order
Processing system. This part of the documentation describes the special
considerations you’ll need to make as you work with sales order issues and
Manufacturing. It is a supplement to your Sales Order Processing documentation,
so you’ll need to refer to that documentation, as well.

The following information is discussed:

• Chapter 20, “Sales extensions overview,” describes the tasks that can be
completed with the extensions Manufacturing adds to the Sales Order
Processing module.

• Chapter 21, “Sales order entry,” contains information about the additional
information that can be tracked with the extensions.

• Chapter 22, “Order fulfillment,” describes how you can use Manufacturing
windows to set up options for fulfilling your customers’ orders.

164 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 20: Sales extensions overview
The ability to track sales orders, shipping requirements and customer information
accurately is vital to your company. An efficient sales order processing department
can be your greatest marketing asset.

Microsoft Dynamics GP Sales Order Processing is a versatile tool for managing sales
transactions, but in a manufacturing environment you might need more
information; for instance, you might need to know if an order should be fulfilled
with inventory quantities, or if a manufacturing order should be generated
specifically for a sales order.

When you add Manufacturing to your Microsoft Dynamics GP system, additional

windows are added to your Sales Order Processing module to help you manage this
information. As you work with sales orders, the Sales Order Processing
documentation will be your primary resource, but you also should refer to your
Manufacturing documentation to find information specific to sales orders in a
manufacturing environment.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Sales and Manufacturing documentation

• Sales terms

Sales and Manufacturing documentation

Refer to the following table to learn where you can find additional information
about the windows you’ll use for Manufacturing and Sales Order Processing.

Window Manual
Sales Order Fulfillment window Microsoft Dynamics GP Sales Order Processing
documentation
Sales Order Processing Setup
window
Sales Order Setup window
Sales Transaction Entry window
Manufacturing Series Sales Order Manufacturing Setup documentation
Preferences window
Order Fulfillment Setup window
Entire Order History window Manufacturing Core Functions documentation
Freight and Misc Adjustments
window
Fulfillment History Entry window
Manufacturing Series Item Class
Extras window
Manufacturing Series Sales Item
Detail window
Order Fulfillment–Lot Inquiry
window
Order Fulfillment–Serial Inquiry
window
Total Estimated Weight window

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 165

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

Some of these windows are Microsoft Dynamics GP Sales Order Processing

windows and are described in the Sales Order Processing documentation. Others
have slight modifications—such as the addition of a field or two; in-depth
information about those windows also is in the Sales Order Processing
documentation, with some specific procedures included in this documentation. Still
other windows are specific to Manufacturing and are described in this
documentation.

Sales terms
Refer here for information about some of the terms related to the extensions
Manufacturing adds to Sales Order Processing.

Quote A company’s offered price for an item that a customer or a potential

customer has requested. Quotes can be transferred to another document type,
deleted or voided.

Sales order A request for goods or services. Sales orders can be transferred to
invoices or back orders. The Manufacturing enhancements provide the
functionality to generate manufacturing orders automatically from sales orders.

Invoice An itemized bill of goods stating quantities, prices, shipping charges, and
other fees.

Back order An order to be fulfilled when stock for items in shortage is

replenished.

Return Merchandise returned by a customer to your company. Returns decrease

the customer’s balance on account and, if you choose, increase inventory quantities.

Promise date The date the customer has been told to expect receipt of the order.

Due date The date the item should be ready to ship to the customer.

166 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 21: Sales order entry
Adding Manufacturing to your system requires you to consider how you want sales
orders in your business to affect other modules. Manufacturing adds special
features—such as item-specific due dates—to give you greater control over sales
order processing. You also can specify a bill of materials and routing and then
generate a manufacturing order directly from a sales order.

Procedures for entering quotes, sales orders, back orders, invoices and returns are explained
in the Sales Order Processing documentation.The following information explains features
specifically related to Manufacturing.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Tasks using the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window

• Manufacturing orders generated from sales
• Implications of generated manufacturing orders
• Creating a manufacturing order for a sales line
• Modifying default manufacturing order details
• Generating a quote-status manufacturing order
• Adjusting dates for sales items
• Adding customer part number information
• Calculating the shipping weight of an order
• Effects of sales orders on MRP
• Limiting effects of sales allocations on MRP

Tasks using the Manufacturing Series Sales Item

Detail window
Tasks associated with the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window can be
grouped into two categories:

Generating manufacturing orders based on sales order documents If

you’re entering information for a quote sales order document, you can generate
manufacturing orders with Quote/Estimate status from the Manufacturing Series
Sales Item Detail window. If you enter a sales order for a back-order quantity, you
can generate manufacturing orders with Open or Released status automatically, or
you can require users to complete certain steps to generate manufacturing orders.

For more information about these tasks, refer to the following topics:

• Manufacturing orders generated from sales on page 168

• Implications of generated manufacturing orders on page 169
• Creating a manufacturing order for a sales line on page 170
• Modifying default manufacturing order details on page 172
• Generating a quote-status manufacturing order on page 173

Adding and adjusting details in sales order documents You can add in-
house and promise dates to each sales order line item. The customer’s part number
for each line item also can be added.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 167

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

For more information about these tasks, refer to the following topics:

• Adjusting dates for sales items on page 173

• Adding customer part number information on page 174
• Calculating the shipping weight of an order on page 175

Manufacturing orders generated from sales

Some companies want manufacturing orders to be created immediately to reflect
the demand generated from sales. You can set up Manufacturing to automatically
create manufacturing orders for the back-ordered quantity of an item, or you can
indicate that a user must create each manufacturing order.

For information about applying priorities to generated manufacturing orders based on the
customer priority, refer to Setting up manufacturing orders for sales orders in Chapter 3,
“Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation.

Two factors determine how Manufacturing handles back-order quantities for each
line item:

Fulfillment method For each item with a Make replenishment method or Make
or Buy replenishment method, you should specify a fulfillment method in the Item
Engineering Data window. The options are Make to Order–Manual, Make to Order–
Silent, and Make to Stock. Refer to Fulfillment methods on page 52.

Manufacturing sales order preference In the Manufacturing Series Sales

Order Preferences window, you can mark options that allow users to generate
manufacturing orders during the sales order entry process. Refer to Setting up
manufacturing orders for sales orders in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions
setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation.

Refer to the table for more information about how back-order quantities of items are
handled based on these settings.

Fulfillment
method Options marked † Effects
Make to Enable Silent MO You can’t generate a manufacturing order from sales. The Generate Quote and Generate MO
Stock Generation buttons in the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window are not available. Also, the
Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window won’t open if the fulfillment method for the
Enable Manual MO
item is Make to Stock.
Generation
Both
Neither
† If the item is a configurable item—if it has a super bill of materials—you’ll have the option to open the Sales
Configurator window, no matter what sales order options are marked.

168 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 1 SALES ORDER ENTRY

Fulfillment
method Options marked † Effects
Make to Enable Silent MO Item has super bill of materials The Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window
Order - Silent Generation opens when you move off the sales order line. You can choose to generate a manufacturing
order or quote, or you can open the Sales Configurator window.
Item doesn’t have a super bill of materials A manufacturing order is generated when
you leave the sales order line. You can limit access with a password.
Enable Manual MO Item has super bill of materials The Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window
Generation won’t open when you move off the sales order line, but you can open the window to generate
a manufacturing order.
Item doesn’t have a super bill of materials You’ll have the option to open the Sales
Configurator window.
Both Item has super bill of materials The Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window
opens when you move off the line. You can choose to generate a manufacturing order or
quote, or you can open the Sales Configurator.
Item doesn’t have a super bill of materials A manufacturing order is generated when
you move off the sales order line. You can limit access with a password.
Neither You can’t generate a manufacturing order from sales. The Generate Quote and Generate MO
buttons in the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window are not available. The
Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window won’t open automatically.
Make to Enable Silent MO The Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window won’t open when you move off the sales
Order–Manual Generation order line, but you can open the window to generate a manufacturing order or quote. If the
item is a configured item, you’ll have the option to open the Sales Configurator window.
Enable Manual MO The Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window will open when you move off the sales
Generation order line. You can open the window to generate a manufacturing order. If the item is a
configured item, you’ll have the option to open the Sales Configurator window.
Both
Neither You can’t generate a manufacturing order from sales. The Generate Quote and Generate MO
buttons in the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window are not available. The
Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window won’t open automatically.
No fulfillment Any combination of You can’t generate a manufacturing order from sales. The Generate Quote and Generate MO
method options buttons in the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window are not available. Also, the
selected Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window won’t open automatically.
† If the item is a configurable item—if it has a super bill of materials—you’ll have the option to open the Sales
Configurator window, no matter what sales order options are marked.

Implications of generated manufacturing orders

Either of the two methods for generating manufacturing orders based on sales—
automatically creating the manufacturing orders or requiring some user action to
create a suggested order—will affect sales order processing. You should be aware of
these issues:

• You can’t delete a sales order or a line item that has an attached manufacturing
order.

• You can’t void a sales order that has an attached manufacturing order.

• If you’re using auto-allocation for one or more sales documents, any sales order
lines that are linked to manufacturing orders will be ignored. This is true even if
only a part of the back order quantity or order quantity is linked to a
manufacturing order.

• You can change the order quantity of a sales order line item with an attached
manufacturing order only if a process security set has been specified for the
process. Refer to Setting up manufacturing orders for sales orders in Chapter 3,
“Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 169

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

Creating a manufacturing order for a sales line

If you enter a sales order but don’t have enough items in inventory to fulfill the
order, a manufacturing order with Open or Released status can be created
automatically to replenish your supply. This procedure assumes that you’ve
marked Enable Silent MO Generation, Enable Manual MO Generation, or both in
the Manufacturing Series Sales Order Preferences window, and that the fulfillment
method for the item is Make to Order–Silent or Make to Order–Manual.

The status and priority of the generated manufacturing order depends on the option you’ve
marked in the Manufacturing Series Sales Order Preferences window. Refer to Setting up
manufacturing orders for sales orders in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions setup,”
in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information.

To create a manufacturing order for a sales line:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

Refer to your Sales Order Processing documentation for more information about
entering sales orders.

2. Enter a sales order line item quantity greater than the inventory quantity. The
Sales Quantity Shortage Options window will open.

You also can enter a quantity in the Quantity to Back Order field. The manufacturing
order will be generated for that amount.

3. Mark either Back Order Balance or Back Order All from the Quantity Shortage
Options list.

Back Order Balance Mark this option to generate a manufacturing order

quantity based on the difference between inventory and order quantities.

Back Order All Mark this option to generate a manufacturing order quantity
based on the entire order quantity.

Refer to Sales Order Processing documentation for more information about the Sales
Quantity Shortage Options window.

4. Choose OK to close the window and return to the Sales Transaction Entry
window.

170 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 1 SALES ORDER ENTRY

5. Move off the line. Depending on the options and the item fulfillment method,
the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window might open. Otherwise,
you must select Manufacturing Sales Item Detail from the Additional menu.
Refer to Manufacturing orders generated from sales on page 168 for more
information.

If the item uses the Make to Order–Silent fulfillment method, a manufacturing order is
created when you move off the line.

6. Enter or adjust date information, as needed.

7. Enter any other related information in the Manufacturing Series Sales Item
Detail window. Refer to Adjusting dates for sales items on page 173, Adding
customer part number information on page 174 or Modifying default manufacturing
order details on page 172 for more information.

8. Generate the manufacturing order. If you close the Manufacturing Series Sales
Item Detail window without generating a manufacturing order, none of the
auto-generation information—changes to the bill of materials, routing, or
scheduling preference—will be saved.

Refer to the table for more information about how you can generate a
manufacturing order, based on the fulfillment method for the item and your
system setup.

Enable Silent MO Enable Manual MO

Generation option Generation option
Make to stock No manufacturing orders are No manufacturing orders
generated for Make to Stock are generated for Make to
items. Stock items.
Make to order–Silent If the item doesn’t have a You can open the
super bill of materials, a Manufacturing Series
manufacturing order is Sales Item Detail window
generated in the background and generate the
when you move off the sales manufacturing order.
order line. Otherwise, the
Manufacturing Series Sales
Item Detail window opens and
you can generate the
manufacturing order there.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 171

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

Enable Silent MO Enable Manual MO

Generation option Generation option
Make to order–Manual You can choose to open the The Manufacturing Series
Manufacturing Series Sale Sales Item Detail window
Item Detail window or the opens. You can generate a
Sales Configurator window to manufacturing order
generate a manufacturing there, or you can open the
order. Sales Configurator
window and generate a
manufacturing order from
there.

You can use the Sales Configurator for any configured item, regardless of the fulfillment
method of the item, or your sales order options.

9. When you’ve finished generating the manufacturing order, you can continue
adding more sales line items to the sales order, or you can save the information
and close the windows.

Modifying default manufacturing order details

The manufacturing bill of materials, the primary routing and the default scheduling
preference will be the default selections for manufacturing orders generated
through the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window. If you accept those
default settings, you won’t need to complete this procedure.

Use the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window to modify the default
options.

To modify default manufacturing order details:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Open a sales order document and select a line item.

3. From the Additional menu, choose Manufacturing Sales Item Detail.

4. Select the type of bill of materials to use for the manufacturing order. Choices
are Manufacturing, Engineering, Archived, and Configured.

If you selected Archived or Configured, enter or select the specific BOM Name
to be used.

5. Enter or select the routing to use for the manufacturing order.

If the bill of materials you selected includes a component that has an Issue To site that is
an outsourced work center, that work center must be included in the routing you select,
as well.

6. Accept the scheduling method selection or change it.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

172 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 1 SALES ORDER ENTRY

Generating a quote-status manufacturing order

If you’re using the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window to enter
information for a quote document, choose Generate Quote to generate a quote/
estimate manufacturing order.

If you transfer the sales order document to an order, the status of the manufacturing order
automatically will be changed to Released if you marked the setup option in the
Manufacturing Series Sales Order Preferences window to Change MO Status on Order
Transfer.

To generate a quote-status manufacturing order:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Open a sales order quote document and select a line item.

3. From the Additional menu, choose Manufacturing Sales Item Detail.

4. Choose Generate Quote to create a manufacturing order with Quote/Estimate

status.

To find the identifier of the manufacturing order created for each line of the quote sales
document, open the quote in the Sales Transaction Entry window, highlight the
appropriate line in the scrolling window, and choose Manufacturing Sales Item Detail
from the Additional menu. The manufacturing order number will be displayed in the
Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window.

Adjusting dates for sales items

You can use the Sales Transaction Entry window or the Sales Item Detail Entry
window—both part of the core Sales Order Processing system—to enter different
delivery dates for sales order line items. You can use the Manufacturing Series Sales
Item Detail window to adjust the in-house dates for the items.

If you’ve set a Due Date Offset in the Manufacturing Series Sales Order Preferences
window, use this procedure to override the default in-house due date. Refer to
Setting up manufacturing sales order due dates in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core
functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information
about setting the due date offset.

To adjust due dates for sales items:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Open a sales order document and select a line item.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 173

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

3. Decide what window you want to use to change the date.

• To use the Sales Transaction Entry window, use the show icon button at the
top right corner of the scrolling window to see card view information.

• To use the Sales Item Detail Entry window, choose the Item Number
expansion icon button.

• To use the Manufacturing Sales Item Detail window, click the Additional
menu and choose Manufacturing Sales Item Detail.

4. Enter the Requested Ship Date if none has been entered. You also can change
the Requested Ship Date. Your changes will be reflected in other requested ship
date fields for this line item.

A message will appear, asking if you also want to update the in-house due
dates. If you choose to update the in-house due date, that information is
updated for the sales order but not for any manufacturing orders that have been
generated for the manufacturing order.

The in-house due date will precede the requested ship date by the number of
days you’ve specified in the due date offset, unless the calculated in-house due
date occurs on a down day. Then the in-house due date might be adjusted—
depending on your system settings—to occur on the closest preceding or
following production date.

The in-house due date is used to calculate due dates for the manufacturing
order. You might need to reschedule the manufacturing order to meet the new
due date. Refer to Rescheduling an entire manufacturing order in Chapter 9,
“Routings and rescheduling,” in the Manufacturing Production Functions
documentation for more information.

5. If you’re using the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window, you can
enter the Customer Promise Date, which is the date the item must arrive at the
customer location. If you enter a due date that is beyond the lead time needed
to produce the item, a message will appear and you’ll have the option to back
order the item rather than fulfilling the quantity from on-hand inventory.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 6, as needed, for other sales order line items.

7. Choose OK and close the window.

Adding customer part number information

Depending on your organization and the organizations of your customers, you
might need to track the customer’s part number for each sales order line item. For
example, some customers might require you to provide invoices and other
documents reflecting their part-numbering scheme—not yours. Use the
Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window to enter that information.

To add customer part number information:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Open a sales order document and select a line item.

174 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 1 SALES ORDER ENTRY

3. From the Additional menu, choose Manufacturing Sales Item Detail.

4. Enter the customer’s part number.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each line item.

6. Choose OK and close the window.

Calculating the shipping weight of an order

Use the Total Estimated Weight window to see a calculated total weight
estimation—and to calculate the equivalent weight in a different unit of measure.
Information in the Total Estimated Weight window is based on the weight
information in the Item Engineering Data window.

Refer to Setting the unit of measure for shipping weight on page 68 for more information.

To calculate the shipping weight of an order:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Enter or select a sales order.

3. From the Additional menu, choose Total Estimated Weight to open the Total
Estimated Weight window.

4. Review the information in the window. To calculate the equivalent weight in a

different weight unit of measure, select the other unit of measure from the list.
Close the window when you’ve finished reviewing information.

Effects of sales orders on MRP

Selling items means your stock of the items will be depleted. Manufacturing helps
you track items by linking the Sales Order Processing and Material Requirement
Planning (MRP) modules. When you enter sales orders, the system will plan the
production of the items by generating new items on the Material Requirements
Planning lists.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 175

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

How sales order requirements are reflected in MRP quantities depends on settings
in the MRP Preference Defaults window.

• If Put SO Back Orders in Firm Buckets is marked, shortage quantities will be

treated as firm requirements. A manufacturing order or an MRP-planned
manufacturing order might be created, depending on your setup options. (You
also can set up Manufacturing so that no manufacturing orders are created or
suggested.)

If your company uses MRP, we recommend that you mark Put SO Back Orders in Firm
Buckets.

• If Put SO Back Orders in Firm Buckets isn’t marked, shortage quantities will be
reflected in the Required Planned requirement and won’t appear in the
Purchase Request Resolution window.

You can use the MRP Item Inquiry window—which you can open through the Additional
menu when the Sales Transaction Entry window is open—to review the effect of sales on
MRP. Refer to Viewing MRP information for a specific item in Chapter 13, “MRP
inquiries,” in the Manufacturing Planning Functions documentation for more information.

Limiting effects of sales allocations on MRP

To ensure accurate MRP information, we recommend that you choose not to allocate
materials for sales orders until you’re ready to fulfill the order. By waiting to
allocate materials until order fulfillment, the quantity actually on hand can be
calculated and a time-phased allocation can occur.

You can prevent allocation for an individual sales order by using the Sales Order
Processing Setup window to create a new order ID that uses Document/Batch or
None for the allocation method. If you choose to do this, however, no checking will
be done when you enter sales order line item quantities. This means that when you
enter a sales order line item, you should check inventory quantities in the Item
Quantities Maintenance window or the MRP Item Inquiry window to be sure
inventory quantities of the item are sufficient.

Because you can’t fulfill an order without allocating materials to it, you must allocate the
materials before fulfilling the order.

To limit effects of sales allocations on MRP:

1. Open the Sales Order Processing Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Setup >> Sales >> Sales Order
Processing)

2. Choose Order to open the Sales Order Setup window.

3. In the Order ID field, enter or select an Order ID. You also must enter the Order
ID Next Number.

4. From the Allocate by list, select Document/Batch or None.

5. Choose Save and close the Sales Order Setup window.

6. Choose OK to close the Sales Order Processing Setup window.

176 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 22: Order fulfillment
Sales Order Processing includes a complete order fulfillment system.
Manufacturing includes additional features that you can use to track the order
fulfillment and shipping history for each sales order line item. This is helpful if your
company ships various line items at different times and in various ways. You can
use these features to determine exactly what has been fulfilled—and what is yet to
be fulfilled—on each order. Manufacturing helps you to maintain tight control over
such information.

Sales Order Processing documentation describes in greater detail how to fulfill orders using
Microsoft Dynamics GP features. Refer to that documentation for more information about
sales order fulfillment.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Requirements for order fulfillment history

• Setting up document types for order fulfillment
• Entering order fulfillment history details
• Viewing order fulfillment history
• Modifying entire order fulfillment information
• Deleting an order fulfillment entry
• Changing freight or miscellaneous charges
• Generating a history report for a document range
• Generating a history report for a single order
• Assigning serial numbers for a sales order
• Assigning lot numbers for a sales order
• Viewing bin information for an order
• Viewing serial number assignments for an order
• Viewing lot number assignments for an order

Requirements for order fulfillment history

Manufacturing doesn’t maintain order fulfillment history automatically—you must
set up your Microsoft Dynamics GP sales order processing system so information is
gathered as you fulfill sales orders. You also must determine which items to track
shipping history for, and then use document setup windows to set up your system
to reflect your choices.

Microsoft Dynamics GP order fulfillment settings

To track Microsoft Dynamics GP fulfillment history, order fulfillment must occur in
the Sales Order Fulfillment window and document types must be set up in the
document setup windows to use a separate fulfillment process. Refer to Setting up
document types for order fulfillment on page 178 for more information.

Shipping history
You can determine if shipping history will be maintained for each inventory item.
You can make this selection by item or by item class. Refer to Setting up shipping
history for an item class on page 58 and Starting to track shipping history for an item on
page 75 for more information about setting options to maintain shipping history for
item classes and items.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 177

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

Fulfill All button

If you decide to fulfill the entire quantity for a line item by using the Fulfill All
button in the Sales Order Fulfillment window, you can’t use the Fulfillment History
Entry window. If you choose Fulfill All, a message appears to indicate that the order
will be filled using the order fulfillment default values. Serial or lot numbers for the
fulfilled items must be allocated manually. You’ll have the option to continue.

• Choose Yes to continue fulfilling the order using the order fulfillment default
selections. The amount in the Quantity Ready to Fulfill field also will be
displayed in the Quantity Fulfilled field.

• Choose No if you don’t want to use the order fulfillment default selections. You
must enter the quantity to be fulfilled in the Quantity Fulfilled field; when you
move off the line, the Order Fulfillment History window will open.

Quantity fulfilled
If you’re using Manufacturing, the order fulfillment process will be slightly
different than it is for non-Manufacturing users. Specifically, the value for the
quantity fulfilled in the Sales Transaction Entry window will not be updated
automatically if all of the following are true:

• The fulfillment order or invoice type is set to use a separate fulfillment method.

• The sales item is marked to maintain shipping history in the Fulfillment Detail
window.

• You are not using the separate Order Fulfillment window.

This rule applies regardless of whether the sales order line is linked to a
manufacturing order.

Setting up document types for order fulfillment

You’ll use the Sales Order Setup window to set up Manufacturing order fulfillment
to use with your system.

To set up document types for order fulfillment:

1. Open the Sales Order Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP menu >> Tools >> Setup >> Sales >> Sales Order
Processing >> Order button)

2. Select the order ID that will require order fulfillment history.

3. Mark Use Separate Fulfillment Process.

4. Choose Save.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for other order IDs, as needed.

6. Close the window.

If you’ve created an order document type that fulfills against invoices, you should also
create an invoice document type that requires a separate fulfillment process.

178 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 2 ORDER FULFI LLMENT

Entering order fulfillment history details

Use the Fulfillment History Entry window to change order fulfillment history
details. You can enter details about the fulfillment of a line item only when you’re
fulfilling the line item requirement using the Sales Order Fulfillment window.

The Fulfillment History Entry window will open only if you have set up your
system properly. Refer to Setting up order fulfillment options in Chapter 3,
“Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation
for more information about system settings required for using Manufacturing order
fulfillment.

Before beginning this procedure, be sure you’ve set up sales order document types to use a
separate order fulfillment process. Refer to Setting up document types for order fulfillment
on page 178 for more information.

To enter order fulfillment history details:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Enter or select a sales order document. The sales document must be a document
type that has been set up to use a separate fulfillment process.

Refer to Sales Order Processing documentation for more information about creating
sales document types.

3. Choose Options >> Allocate or Fulfill to open the Sales Allocation-Fulfillment

Options window.

4. Mark Allocate and choose OK. Items will be allocated to the sales order line-
item requirement, and the window will close.

It’s important that you don’t mark the Fulfill option in this window because quantities
must be fulfilled through the Sales Order Fulfillment window for Manufacturing to
track order fulfillment information.

5. Choose Save in the Sales Transaction Entry window. Note the document
number as you save the information.

6. Open the Sales Order Fulfillment window.

(Transactions >> Sales >> Order Fulfillment)

7. Select the sales document you just allocated.

8. If the item to be fulfilled is tracked by serial or lot numbers, the Serial/Lot

button will be available when you select the item in the scrolling window.

• If you’ve set up Sales Order Processing to select serial and lot numbers
automatically, you don’t need to specify serial or lot numbers.

• If you haven’t set up Sales Order Processing to select serial and lot numbers
automatically, you must specify which items—with which serial numbers
or from which lot—will be used to fulfill the order quantity. Refer to
Assigning serial numbers for a sales order on page 185 or Assigning lot numbers
for a sales order on page 186 for more information.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 179

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

9. The quantity ready to be fulfilled must be greater than the quantity fulfilled. In
the Qty Fulfilled field, enter the total amount to be fulfilled, then move off the
line.

The Fulfillment History Entry window opens, displaying information based on

the line item and on default entries from the Order Fulfillment Setup window.

Refer to Setting up order fulfillment options in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core

functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information
about the Order Fulfillment Setup window.

10. You can accept the default information—shipping method, FOB point and UPS
zone—or you can change it.

The shipping method will be the one specified in the Customer Maintenance
window, or if no shipping method is specified there, the shipping method
specified in the Order Fulfillment Setup window will be used.

11. Enter the shipping document number in the Ship BOL (Bill of Lading) field.

12. Enter the weight of the shipment in the Weight field. Select a unit of measure
from the list.

Refer to Calculating the shipping weight of an order on page 175 for more information
about using the Total Weight window to convert from one unit of weight measure to
another.

13. Enter the number of packages shipped.

14. Your user ID will be displayed as the person who has fulfilled this order. Accept
that information, or enter or select another user ID.

15. Enter or select an alternate unit of measure for the variable unit of measure. If
you fulfill a line item in a different unit of measure than was entered on the
order, the order prices will be updated based on the new unit of measure and
the pricing schedule for that item.

For example, suppose your business sells hams. You might enter orders in the
Each unit of measure, but then adjust prices for the sales order line based on the
weight of each ham as you fulfill the order.

16. Enter an alternate quantity used to measure the shipment in the QTY field.

180 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 2 ORDER FULFI LLMENT

17. Choose OK and close the Fulfillment History Entry window. Choose Save in the
Sales Order Fulfillment window.

If you’ve marked the preference to Run Reconcile from Sales in the MRP Preference
Defaults window, an MRP reconciliation will start after you save information in the
Sales Order Fulfillment window and the order fulfillment is processed.

Viewing order fulfillment history

Use the Order Fulfillment History window to check the fulfillment progress of an
order that has not yet had a corresponding invoice posted. You also can use this
window to view weights and other shipping information.

If you can’t view order fulfillment information, be sure you’ve set up options for the item
and for order fulfillment properly. Refer to Requirements for order fulfillment history on
page 177 for more information.

To view order fulfillment history:

1. Open the Order Fulfillment History window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Order Fulfillment >> select an order >> select the
Quantity Fulfilled for a line item >> Additional >> Fulfillment History)

You can open the Order Fulfillment History window another way. If the Sales
Transaction Entry window is open, choose Additional >> Order Fulfillment
History.

2. View information in the window, as needed.

3. To view serial- or lot-number information about the items, choose the

expansion button in any line of the scrolling window. The Order Fulfillment -
Lot Inquiry or the Order Fulfillment - Serial Inquiry window will open if the
item is tracked by lot or serial numbers, respectively.

Refer to Viewing serial number assignments for an order on page 188 or Viewing lot
number assignments for an order on page 188 for more information.

4. When you’ve finished viewing information, close the windows.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 181

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

Modifying entire order fulfillment information

The Entire Order Fulfillment History window helps you to check the entire
fulfillment history of an order or an invoice. You can also modify or delete
fulfillment history records.

If you’re unable to view order fulfillment information, be sure you’ve set up options for the
item and for order fulfillment properly. Refer to Requirements for order fulfillment history
on page 177 for more information.

To modify entire order fulfillment information:

1. Open the Entire Order Fulfillment History window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry >> Additional >> Entire
Order History)

If the Sales Order Fulfillment window is open, choose Additional >> Entire
Order Fulfillment History.

2. Enter or select a sales order document.

3. Choose the left corner of the line item in the top scrolling window. A black dot
will appear next to the line item and the corresponding information will be
displayed in the bottom scrolling window.

4. Review the information and make changes, as needed. Changes you enter in the
bottom scrolling window will be saved as you make them.

5. For additional information about specific serial- or lot-number–tracked items,

choose the expansion button at the bottom of the line item to open either the
Order Fulfillment-Serial Inquiry or Order Fulfillment-Lot Inquiry window.

Refer to Viewing serial number assignments for an order on page 188 or Viewing lot
number assignments for an order on page 188 for more information.

6. When you’ve finished reviewing the information and making changes, close the
window.

182 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 2 ORDER FULFI LLMENT

Deleting an order fulfillment entry

Use the Entire Order Fulfillment History window to delete order fulfillment
records. For example, if you created a record that shows you shipped something to a
customer that wasn’t shipped, you can delete that order fulfillment record.

You must have specified a process security set for the History Edit Security Set field in the
Order Fulfillment Setup window to use this procedure. Refer to Setting up order fulfillment
options in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation.

To delete an order fulfillment entry:

1. Open the Entire Order Fulfillment History window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry >> Additional >> Entire
Order History)

2. Enter or select a sales order.

3. Choose the left corner of the line item in the top scrolling window. A black dot
will appear next to the line item and the corresponding information will be
displayed in the bottom scrolling window.

4. In the lower scrolling window, select the order fulfillment entry to delete.
Choose the delete icon button in that row of the scrolling window. Changes in
the lower scrolling window will be saved as you make them.

If you delete a transaction, that order will be available again to fulfill. If a transaction
was for a serial- or lot-number–tracked item, the items that were assigned to be used to
fulfill that sales order line item will be available again.

5. Close the window.

Changing freight or miscellaneous charges

Use the Freight and Misc Adjustments window to change freight and miscellaneous
charges attached to a sales order or invoice. Freight and miscellaneous charges
entered in this window will appear on the sales document.

You must mark options in the Order Fulfillment Setup window that will allow you to
override freight and miscellaneous charges to complete this procedure. Refer to Setting up
order fulfillment options in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the
Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information.

To change freight or miscellaneous charges:

1. Open the Sales Order Fulfillment window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Order Fulfillment)

2. Enter or select a sales order or invoice.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 183

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

3. Choose Additional >> Freight and Misc Adjustments to open the Freight and
Misc Adjustments window.

4. Change the freight and miscellaneous charges amounts, as needed.

5. Choose OK and close the window.

Generating a history report for a document range

You can print fulfillment history report that can be helpful in tracking historical
information for your shipping department. Use the Sales Document Range Inquiry
window to generate this report for a range of order fulfillment records.

Order fulfillment history is tracked only for those items you specify. Refer to Setting up
shipping history for an item class on page 58 and Starting to track shipping history for an
item on page 75 for more information.

To generate a history report for a document range:

1. Open the Sales Document Range Inquiry window.
(Inquiry >> Sales >> Sales Range Inquiry)

2. Enter or select an inquiry ID. If you’re entering a new inquiry ID, the Sales
Inquiry Restrictions window will open. Use that window to define the range of
sales documents to include in the range of documents for your report. Refer to
your Microsoft Dynamics GP Sales Order Processing documentation for more
information about creating sales inquiry ranges.

3. Determine which documents should be included in the report.

Unposted Mark to include sales documents that haven’t been invoiced and
posted.

History Mark to include sales documents that have been invoiced and posted.

4. Choose Additional >> Fulfillment History Report. The Fulfillment History

report summarizes order fulfillment information about the order, including
shipping method, weight and number of parcels.

Generating a history report for a single order

You can generate a history report for a single sales order using either the Sales
Transaction Entry window or the Sales Order Fulfillment window.

Order fulfillment history is tracked only for those items you specify. Refer to Setting up
shipping history for an item class on page 58 and Starting to track shipping history for an
item on page 75 for more information.

184 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 2 ORDER FULFI LLMENT

To generate a history report for a single order:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window or the Sales Order Fulfillment
window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry or Transactions >> Sales >>
Order Fulfillment)

2. Enter or select a sales order document.

3. Choose Additional >> Fulfillment History Report. The Fulfillment History

report summarizes order fulfillment information about the order, including
shipping method, weight and number of parcels.

Assigning serial numbers for a sales order

If an item you’re fulfilling is tracked by serial numbers, you must specify which
items—with which serial numbers—are being used to fulfill a sales order
requirement. Use the Sales Serial Number Entry window to choose items to fulfill a
sales order.

Assigning serial numbers for a sales order must be completed as you’re entering
order fulfillment details. The Sales Serial Number Entry window automatically will
open if you’re fulfilling one of those items, and if the Auto-Assign Serial Numbers
option isn’t marked in the Sales Order Processing Setup Options window. Refer to
your Sales Order Processing documentation for more information about the Sales
Order Processing Setup Options window.

The window will open only if you’re fulfilling a sales order quantity in the Sales
Order Fulfillment window and you choose Serial/Lot.

To assign serial numbers for a sales order:

1. Open the Sales Serial Number Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry >> Item Number expansion
button >> Serial/Lot button)

2. To use an item with a serial number that has already been defined, mark the
appropriate serial number in the Available scrolling window and choose Insert.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 185

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

3. To use an item with a serial number that hasn’t been defined, enter the serial
number in the Serial Number field and choose Insert.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, as needed, until you’ve assigned serial numbers to the line
item requirement to fulfill.

5. Choose OK. The Sales Order Fulfillment window will open. When you move
the highlight from the field, the Fulfillment History Entry window will open,
and you can resume entering order fulfillment details. Refer to Entering order
fulfillment history details on page 179 for more information.

Assigning lot numbers for a sales order

If an item you’re fulfilling is tracked by lot numbers, you must specify which
items—from which lot—are used to fulfill a sales order requirement. Use the Sales
Lot Number Entry window to choose which items will be used to fulfill a sales
order.

Assigning lot numbers must be completed as you’re entering order fulfillment

details. The Sales Lot Number Entry window automatically will open if you’re
fulfilling one of those items, and if the Auto-Assign Lot Numbers option isn’t
marked in the Sales Order Processing Setup Options window. Refer to your Sales
Order Processing documentation for more information about the Sales Order
Processing Setup Options window.

This window opens only if you’re fulfilling a sales order quantity in the Sales Order
Fulfillment window and you choose Serial/Lot.

To assign lot numbers for a sales order:

1. Open the Sales Lot Number Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry >> Item Number expansion
button >> Serial/Lot button)

2. In the upper scrolling window, select the lot to take items from to fulfill the sales
order. In the Quantity Selected column in the appropriate row of the scrolling
window, enter the number of units to be used from that lot.

3. Choose Insert.

186 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 2 ORDER FULFI LLMENT

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you’ve selected lot quantities that equal the sales
order line item requirement.

5. Choose OK. The Sales Order Fulfillment window will open. When you move off
the field, the Fulfillment History Entry window will open, and you can resume
entering order-fulfillment details. Refer to Entering order fulfillment history details
on page 179 for more information.

Viewing bin information for an order

You can use the Order Fulfillment - Bin Inquiry window to view the bins for items
used to fulfill a sales order.

To view bin information for an order:

1. Open the Entire Order Fulfillment History window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Order Fulfillment >> Additional >> Entire Order
History)

2. Enter or select the sales document that includes the line item requirements to
view.

3. Mark the sales order line item requirement for an item that is not tracked by lot
or serial numbers. If any of that requirement has been fulfilled, information
about the fulfillment will be displayed in the lower scrolling window.

4. Review the information in the lower scrolling window. Choose the expansion
button for any line to open the Order Fulfillment–Bin Inquiry window.

5. When you’ve finished reviewing the information, close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 187

PA RT 4 SALES EXTENS IONS

Viewing serial number assignments for an order

Use the Order Fulfillment–Serial Inquiry window to view which serial-number–
tracked items were used to fulfill a sales order requirement.

To view serial number assignments for an order:

1. Open the Entire Order Fulfillment History window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Order Fulfillment >> Additional >> Entire Order
History)

2. Enter or select the sales document that includes the line item requirements to
view.

3. Mark the sales order line item requirement for a serial-number–tracked item. If
any of that requirement has been fulfilled, information about the fulfillment
will be displayed in the lower scrolling window.

4. Review the information in the lower scrolling window. Choose the expansion
button for any line to open the Order Fulfillment–Serial Inquiry window.

5. When you’ve finished reviewing the information, close the window.

Viewing lot number assignments for an order

Use the Order Fulfillment–Lot Inquiry window to view which lot-number–tracked
items were used to fulfill a sales order requirement.

To view lot number assignments for an order:

1. Open the Entire Order Fulfillment History window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Order Fulfillment >> Additional >> Entire Order
History)

2. Enter or select the sales document that includes the line item requirements you
want to view.

3. Mark the sales order line item requirement for a lot-number–tracked item. If
any of that requirement has been fulfilled, information about the fulfillment
will be displayed in the lower scrolling window.

188 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 2 ORDER FULFI LLMENT

4. Review the information in the lower scrolling window. Choose the expansion
button for any line to open the Order Fulfillment - Lot Inquiry window.

5. When you’ve finished reviewing the information, close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 189

190 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
PART 5: SALES CONFIGURATOR
 Part 5: Sales Configurator
This part of the documentation includes information that will help you set up and
use the Manufacturing Sales Configurator and describes extra steps you’ll need to
define “configured” items—complex products with many optional components or
accessories—and to enter sales orders for those items.

After you’ve set up the configured items, salespersons in your organization can use
the Sales Configurator to help customers specify the options and accessories they
want for their purchases.

The following information is discussed:

• Chapter 23, “Sales Configurator overview,” contains information about the

terms and concepts you should know before using the Sales Configurator
module.

• Chapter 24, “Options and promotions,” describes options—groups of features

or accessories customers can choose from when they order a configured item—
and explains how to set them up. The section also contains information about
setting up promotions for special pricing you might offer for a specific option.

• Chapter 25, “Bills and routings,” explains how to set up the bills of materials
and routings for the configurable items.

• Chapter 26, “Pricing and sales transactions,” explains how pricing is calculated
for configured items. The section also describes how to use the Sales
Configurator window for entering information about customer orders and
inquiries.

• Chapter 27, “Configurator manufacturing orders,” describes how to work with

the manufacturing orders for configured items. Special rules for calculating the
material cost for standard cost configured finished goods also is included.

192 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 23: Sales Configurator overview
Many companies today have designed products that are built only in response to
specific customer specifications. For example, a computer manufacturer might
market a basic computer that customers can configure—or customize—for the tasks
they’ll use that computer for. A graphic artist might want a larger monitor, while a
software developer might be more interested in getting a lot of RAM.

Sales Configurator helps you define items manufactured by your business. You can
incorporate information from several modules—Inventory Control, Bill of
Materials, Routings, and Sales Order Processing—and generate manufacturing
orders for the configured items as you enter information about the items. You also
can include or exclude certain options based on customer specifications; for
example, you can require a customer who wants to use a large monitor to specify
more video RAM.

Sales Configurator can be used to enhance your sales process, too. For example, you
can set up promotions to remind your sales personnel of special offers.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Sales Configurator terms

• Requirements for using the Sales Configurator

Sales Configurator terms

Refer here for information about some of the terms related to the Sales Configurator
module:

Super bill of materials or “super BOM” Lists all the component items that
can possibly be included in the bill of materials for a finished item. For example, if
your company builds office chairs with either plastic or wooden arms, both types of
arms would be listed in the super bill of materials, but you would select only one
arm type for a specific, configured bill of materials.

Configured bill of materials The customized bill of materials created when

you select components from a super bill of materials. When you use the Sales
Configurator to specify options, a configured bill of materials is created and is
assigned a unique identifier.

Configured cost and configured price The configured cost of the item is
how much it will cost you to build the item with a particular set of options. The
configured cost is the total of the cost of the components and the labor involved.
The configured price is the suggested price you’ll charge the customer. The
configured price is based on your finished goods price schedule and the specific
options you select.

Configured working routing A routing based on the options you choose as

you create a configured bill of materials. For example, if you created a configured
bill of materials for office chairs and chose plastic components rather than wooden
ones, the routing would be modified to exclude the sequences for staining and
varnishing the wooden components.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 193

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

Options and option categories A choice you must make about which
component item to use when building a finished good. An option category is a
group of related options. For example, a furniture manufacturer might have several
upholstery fabrics—solid, flecked or plaid—that customers can specify. Each of the
fabric patterns is an option; together they are an option category called “Fabrics.”

Exclusions (of options) Options that are disallowed because of another option
selection you’ve made. For example, a furniture manufacturer might offer certain
items in a selection of wood types—oak, pine and cherry. If you chose an oak dining
table, you might create an exclusion to limit the customer’s selections for dining
chairs to oak.

Inclusions (of options) Options that are automatically added to the configured
bill of materials because of another option selection. For example, a computer
manufacturer might include different manuals with a computer, depending on the
options selected by the customer.

Promotions Special pricing you offer on a particular option during a certain

period. For example, a computer manufacturer might offer special pricing on RAM
modules.

Requirements for using the Sales Configurator

Before using the Sales Configurator you must complete the following tasks. Some
are described here; others are described in other Manufacturing documentation.

• Be sure all components included in a super bill of materials have been defined
in Inventory Control. Refer to Inventory Control documentation and to Chapter
8, “Item engineering data.”

• Specify Sales Configurator system preferences. Refer to Setting up Sales

Configurator options in Chapter 3, “Manufacturing core functions setup,” in the
Manufacturing Setup documentation.

• Create option categories and indicate option item inclusions and exclusions.
Refer to Creating an option category on page 195 and Creating an option exclusion or
inclusion on page 197.

• Create a super bill of materials for the configurable item. Refer to Creating a
super bill of materials on page 205.

• Assign option categories to the finished good. Refer to Assigning an option

category to an item on page 200.

• Create a routing for the configurable finished good. Refer to Routings for
configured items on page 208.

• Use the BOM Routing Link window to link options in the super bill of materials
to specific routing sequences. If the item linked to a sequence isn’t added to the
configured bill of materials, the linked sequence won’t be included in the
routing. Refer to Linking component usage to a routing sequence on page 123.

194 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 24: Options and promotions
One of the greatest benefits of using Sales Configurator is being able to define
groups of options that customers can choose from. You can use Sales Configurator
to specify how certain selections will limit or expand the other selections that
customers will have.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Creating an option category

• Creating an option exclusion or inclusion
• Modifying an option category
• Removing an item from an option category
• Deleting an option category
• Generating a basic option category report
• Sales Configurator option category assignments
• Assigning an option category to an item
• Changing the order of option assignments
• Unassigning option categories
• Generating an item option assignment report
• Creating an option promotion
• Modifying a promotion
• Deleting a promotion
• Deleting all promotions for an option

Creating an option category

Use the Option Category Maintenance window to create option categories—groups
of options that customers can choose from.

To create an option category:

1. Open the Option Category Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Options)

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 195

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

2. Enter the name of the option category. For example, if you produce chairs and
have an option category for various types of upholstery fabrics, you might
create a “fabrics” option category.

3. Enter a brief description for the option category.

4. Determine how many selections customers can make from this group.

• Mark Single Selection Required if customers must choose one option from
this category. For example, a furniture manufacturer would require
customers to choose one fabric to be used for the pieces they order.

• Mark Multiple Selections if customers can choose multiple options—or no

options. For example, a computer manufacturer might have an option
called “Peripherals” that could include removable storage, scanners and
printers. Customers can choose as many of these options as they like.

5. In the upper scrolling window, select a blank line and then select an item to
include in the option category. The description of the item and its minimum and
maximum allowable quantities will be displayed.

6. If the selected item has a Make replenishment method (or if the item has a Make
or Buy replenishment method and you want to use it as a made item in the
configured bill of materials) choose its BOM Type; if the type is Archived or
Configured, enter or select the BOM Name.

7. To specify an option within the category as the default selection, mark Default.
You can override the default selection when configuring an actual item.

Be sure that no default option items are exclusions for other items.

8. Enter quantity information.

Refer to the table for more information.

Quantity Rules How it’s used

Minimum -- Is the smallest quantity of the item
that’s allowed for a configured item
Average Can’t be less than the minimum Is the default quantity of the item for a
quantity or greater than the configured item.
maximum quantity
Maximum -- Is the greatest quantity of the item that’s
allowed for a configured item

For example, a furniture manufacturer might build desks with two, three or
four drawers. To allow for the different numbers of drawers, the manufacturer
can create a Drawers option that has a minimum quantity of 2 and a maximum
quantity of 4. Later, when the Sales Configurator is used to record customer
choices, the user can specify if the customer wants two, three or four drawers
for the desk.

9. Enter or select the base unit of measure for the item.

196 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 4 OPTIONS AND PR OMOTIONS

10. Enter or select the price level for the item. Pricing for the option item when it is
used in the configured item will be based on the price level you specify.

11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 until you’ve added all the different options for the
option category. Your changes automatically will be saved as you enter them in
the scrolling window.

Creating an option exclusion or inclusion

While creating an option category, you can limit or expand the options available
based on earlier option selections. Use the Option Category Maintenance window
to create item exclusions and inclusions.

For the most flexibility in configuring items, minimize the number of inclusions and
exclusions as much as possible. If you specify too many inclusions and exclusions, you’ll
greatly reduce the number of available configurations.

To create an option exclusion or inclusion:

1. Open the Option Category Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Options)

2. Enter or select an option category.

3. Mark an option in the upper scrolling window. A black dot will appear, and the
item will be displayed in the Selected Item field.

4. Determine whether to exclude or include other options based on a customer’s

selection of this option.

• Mark Exclude to limit the customer’s other option selections.

• Mark Include to automatically include the item in the configured bill of

materials when the selected item is added to the configured bill of
materials. For example, a computer manufacturer might offer systems in
tan or in black. The computer manufacturer could create an inclusion so
that when the customer selects a black computer, a black keyboard
automatically is added to the configured bill of materials for the item.

5. Use the lookup button at the top of the lower scrolling window to select an
option category that includes options to include or exclude. The lower scrolling
window will display the options available in that category.

6. Mark the items to include or exclude.

• To specify individual items, mark Include or Exclude for specific options.

• To mark all items, choose Include All or Exclude All at the top of the lower
scrolling window.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 197

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

Modifying an option category

You can modify an option category, if needed. You can change the designation of the
category as a single-selection or multiple-selection category, or you can add or
remove options. Use the Option Category Maintenance window to complete this
procedure.

To modify an option category:

1. Open the Option Category Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Options)

2. Enter or select an option category.

3. To change the category description or its designation as a single-selection or

multiple-selection category, make your change and then choose Save.

4. To change an option in the upper scrolling window, make your change in that
scrolling window. Your changes automatically will be saved.

5. When you’ve finished, close the window.

Removing an item from an option category

Use the Option Category Maintenance window to remove items (options) from a
category.

To remove an item from an option category:

1. Open the Option Category Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Options)

2. Enter or select an option category.

3. In the upper scrolling window, mark the line item to be removed.

4. From the Edit menu, choose Delete Row. A message will appear.

• Choose Delete to remove the item. Your changes automatically will be

saved.

• Choose Cancel to return to the Option Category Maintenance window

without deleting the item.

5. Close the window.

Deleting an option category

Use the Option Category Maintenance window to delete option categories.

Before you can delete an option category, you must be sure it isn’t assigned to any
configurable items. Refer to Unassigning option categories on page 201 for more
information about using the Item Option Assignment window to see which items an option
category is assigned to and to remove the option category from them.

198 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 4 OPTIONS AND PR OMOTIONS

To delete an option category:

1. Open the Option Category Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Options)

2. Enter or select an option category.

3. Choose Delete and close the window.

Generating a basic option category report

Use the Option Category Maintenance window to generate a basic report about the
displayed option category. An Item Option Assignment report lists the option
categories that have been assigned to a finished item.

To generate a basic option category report:

1. Open the Option Category Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Options)

2. Enter or select an option category.

3. From the File menu, select Print.

4. In the Report Destination window, mark the option to indicate where you want
to see the final report.

5. Choose OK and close the window.

Sales Configurator option category assignments

After you’ve created option categories, you can assign them to finished goods. By
assigning the option categories to finished goods, you can select items in those
categories when you configure a bill of materials for a finished good.

Only finished goods that have a super bill of materials can have option categories assigned to
them. If you select an item that doesn’t have a super bill of materials, a message will appear,
indicating that you must create a super bill of materials for the item before proceeding.

The order in which option categories appear in the scrolling window is important
because it affects how item exclusions and inclusions are applied. You should assign
option categories to an item in the order you want your customer to consider the
choices.

For example, a computer manufacturer should assign option categories for memory
and processors before option categories for monitors and other peripherals. That’s
because the selections the customer makes about the computer’s speed and power
will affect which monitors and peripherals will work best with the system.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 199

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

Assigning an option category to an item

Use the Option Assignment window to assign an option category to an item.

To assign an option category to an item:

1. Open the Item Option Assignment window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Option Assignment)

2. Enter or select the configurable item that option categories should be assigned
to.

3. Enter or select an option category to assign to this item. If you enter an option
category that doesn’t exist, a message will appear when you move off the field
and you’ll have the option to define the option category in the Option Category
Maintenance window. If you choose Yes, the Option Category Maintenance
window will open.

4. Continue, repeating steps 2 and 3 to add as many option categories as you like.
Your changes automatically will be saved in the scrolling window.

5. Close the window.

Changing the order of option assignments

The order in which you assign option categories to an item is important. To insert an
option category between two already-assigned categories in the Item Option
Assignment window, you can change the order of your existing assignments.

To change the order of option assignments:

1. Open the Item Option Assignment window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Option Assignment)

2. Enter or select the item that includes the option categories you want to change
the order of.

3. In the scrolling window, mark the option category to be moved lower in the
assignment order.

200 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 4 OPTIONS AND PR OMOTIONS

4. From the Edit menu, select Insert Row. A new row will be inserted above the
marked option category.

5. Enter or select an option category for the new line in the scrolling window. Your
changes automatically will be saved.

6. Close the window.

Unassigning option categories

Use the Item Option Assignment window to remove an option category from an
item. You can remove a single option category or all option categories.

To unassign option categories:

1. Open the Item Option Assignment window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Option Assignment)

2. Enter or select the item from which option categories are to be removed.

3. Determine whether to remove a single option category or all option categories.

To remove a single category Mark the option category, then select Delete
Row from the Edit menu. A message will appear.

• Choose Delete to remove the option category.

• Choose Cancel to end the procedure without deleting an option category.

To remove all assigned option categories Choose Delete. A message

will appear.

• Choose Delete to remove all of the assigned categories from the record.

• Choose Cancel to end the procedure without deleting option categories.

4. Your changes automatically will be saved. Close the window.

Generating an item option assignment report

An Item Option Assignment report lists the options that have been assigned to a
specific option category. You can print item option assignment reports from the Item
Option Assignment window or through the Item Engineering Report Options
window. Refer to Chapter 29, “Manufacturing reports,” for more information about
using the Item Engineering Report Options window to generate this report.

To generate an item option assignment report:

1. Open the Item Option Assignment window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Option Assignment)

2. Enter or select an option category.

3. From the File menu, choose Print. The report will be generated and displayed
on your screen. You can send the report to a printer, view it on your screen or
print it to a file.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 201

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

Creating an option promotion

If you’re offering special pricing or discounts on certain items, you can create option
promotions. Use the Option Promotion Maintenance window to define promotions
you’ll offer customers who choose a specific option item.

Option promotions can be used only when the finished good has a pricing method of
Currency or Percent of List. Refer to Sales Configurator pricing calculations on page 211 for
more information.

Use the Option Promotion Maintenance window to create promotions.

To create an option promotion:

1. Open the Option Promotion Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Promotions)

2. Enter or select an option category and an item to promote.

3. If the item is a made item, select its BOM Type from the list. If you select
Archived or Configured, enter or select a BOM Name.

4. Enter a promotion ID, a unique identifier for the promotion.

5. Use the list at the top of the scrolling window to determine if the records in the
window will be displayed by start date or by promotion ID.

6. Enter the effective dates—the start and end dates—for the promotion in the
appropriate line in the scrolling window.

202 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 4 OPTIONS AND PR OMOTIONS

7. Determine how the promotion will be calculated.

• Mark Amount to deduct a set amount from the price of the option item.
Enter the currency amount.

• Mark Percentage to deduct a percentage of the price of the option item from
its usual price. Enter the percentage.

8. Your entries automatically will be saved in the scrolling window. Close the
window.

Modifying a promotion
Use the Option Promotion Maintenance window to make changes to a promotion
you’ve created.

To modify a promotion:
1. Open the Option Promotion Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Promotions)

2. Enter or select an option category and an item.

3. Make changes in the scrolling window, as needed. Your changes will be

automatically saved in the scrolling window. Close the window.

Deleting a promotion
Use the Option Promotion Maintenance window to delete option promotions.

To delete a promotion:
1. Open the Option Promotion Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Promotions)

2. Enter or select an option category and an item number.

3. Mark a promotion ID to delete.

4. From the Edit menu, select Delete Row. A message will be displayed, and you’ll
have the option to remove the promotion.

• Choose Yes to remove the promotion.

• Choose Cancel to end the procedure without changing the promotion.

5. Close the window.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 203

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

Deleting all promotions for an option

Use the Option Promotion Maintenance window to delete all the promotions
associated with a particular option.

To delete all promotions for an option:

1. Open the Option Promotion Maintenance window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator >> Promotions)

2. Enter or select an option category and an item number.

3. Choose Delete. A message will be displayed, and you’ll have the option to
delete the record, which includes all the promotions that have been assigned to
the option category-item number combination.

• Choose Delete to remove all the promotion IDs.

• Choose Cancel to leave the record unchanged.

4. When you’ve finished, close the window.

204 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 25: Bills and routings
To use the Sales Configurator, you must create special bills of materials and routings
that include all options for a particular product. Setting up the bills of materials and
routings properly will ensure that the manufacturing records generated from the
Sales Configurator are accurate, usable documents that can be easily used to
produce finished items.

Because creating a bill of materials for use with the Sales Configurator requires you
to consider a different set of issues and requirements than other bills of materials,
these procedures are described in this section. You also can refer to documentation
about bills of materials for more information.

Bill of Materials windows and features specific to the Sales Configurator are
described in this documentation. For general information about the Bill of Materials
module, refer to these chapters:

• Chapter 10, “Bill of Materials overview”

• Chapter 12, “Bill of Materials entry”
• Chapter 13, “Links to routings”
• Chapter 15, “Bill of Materials inquiries”

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Creating a super bill of materials

• Fulfillment methods for configured items
• Modifying a super bill of materials
• Routings for configured items
• How super bills and routings work together

Creating a super bill of materials

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to create a super bill of materials. When you
add components to the super bill of materials—by using the tree view on the right
side of the window—you must enter every possible component item that you can
use for a configured item. For example, a computer manufacturer would need to
include all the processors, all the RAM amounts, and all the hard disks to create a
super bill of materials for configuring computers.

A super bill of materials also must include all items that are required in all versions
of the configured item. For example, a computer manufacturer would need to
include a power cord in the bill of materials for all systems.

To create a super bill of materials:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select the item number of the finished item to be built using the super
bill of materials.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 205

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

3. Select Super BOM from the BOM Type list. Select Regular from the BOM
Category list. Other options—Modular, Phantom and Option—can’t be used
with a super bill of materials.

If the fulfillment method for the configurable item is Make to Stock, a message appears
and you’ll have the option to change the fulfillment method, continue, or cancel. Refer to
Fulfillment methods for configured items on page 207 for more information.

4. Enter the date that the super bill of materials is to be available for configuring
items.

5. Accept the default quantity to build—1—or enter another.

6. Accept the default BOM category. The BOM Category for a super bill of
materials must be Regular.

7. Accept the default revision level—1—or enter another. Refer to Chapter 17,
“Revisions and archived bills,” for more information about revision levels.

8. Decide whether to backflush all components in this bill of materials.

Backflushing means that the component quantities aren’t issued to work
centers, but that they are accounted for when a manufacturing order associated
with this bill of materials is closed.

Refer to Backflushing bill of materials components on page 116 for more information
about backflushing options.

• Mark Backflush Item in the left pane to have component quantities for all
items in this bill of materials backflushed. You can change this setting for
specific components later in the right pane of the window.

• If materials should not be backflushed, be sure the option is unmarked.

9. You can enter the default issue-to and issue-from locations for the components
in the bill of materials. Click the expansion button on the Defaults field to open
the Bill of Materials Defaults window, where you can enter the sites.

The issue-from site is the inventory site that components are taken from. The
issue-to site is the work center that components are delivered to. You can
override the default sites on a component-by-component basis, if needed.

10. To add an item to the bill of materials, click the button with the green plus sign
just above the tree view.

11. A message appears. To save your changes, choose Yes to continue.

12. Decide whether to add a regular component—one that is included in all

configurations of the item—or an option category—a group of components that
customers will choose from, such as different fabrics for an upholstered chair.

• To add a regular component, go to step 13.

• To add an option category, go to step 16.

206 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 5 BI LLS AND R OUTINGS

13. To add a regular component, enter or select a component to add to the bill of
materials.

Refer to Requirements for bill of materials components on page 115 for more
information about which items can be added to a bill of materials.

14. Enter information about the component in fields in the right pane.

The information that you enter will depend on the component (whether it is
made or bought, for example) and on your business practices. Refer to the
following topics for more information:

• Requirements for bill of materials components on page 115

• Backflushing bill of materials components on page 116
• Shrinkage for bill of materials components on page 116
• How floor stock costs are applied on page 117
• Component fixed quantity on page 117
• Specifying an alternate component in a bill on page 118
• Bills of materials and component effective dates on page 119
• Adding user-defined information to bills on page 120
• Accounting for by-products in a bill of materials on page 121
• Component quantities and rounding on page 121

15. Click Add to add the component information to the tree view in the left pane,
then skip to step 18.

16. To add the components in an option category, choose Add Option >> Add Items
from Option Category.

17. In the Option Category Lookup window, select an option category. Double-click
the option category to add all its options to the super bill of materials.

When you add an option category to a bill of materials, the focus of the window switches
to the left pane. To add more components or other option categories, choose the green
plus sign button above the tree view, so that the right pane of the window is active.

18. Continue, starting at step 12 until you’ve finished adding components and
option categories to the super bill of materials.

19. If the right pane is active, choose Tree View so that the left pane of the window
is active.

20. Choose Save to save the bill of materials.

Fulfillment methods for configured items

When you create a super bill of materials for an item, you’re signalling that you’ll be
using the Sales Configurator to choose from among the item options. You must
enter the customer’s selections for a configured item, so it’s unlikely that an item
with a super bill of materials would have a Make to Stock or Make to Order–Silent
fulfillment method. Creating a configurable item with a Make to Stock or Make to
Order–Silent fulfillment method will affect Manufacturing.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 207

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

Refer to the table for more information.

Fulfillment method Effect for configurable items

Make to Stock You can’t select an existing bill of materials to generate a
manufacturing order from the Manufacturing Series Sales Item
Detail window.
Make to Order–Silent The system won’t automatically create a manufacturing order for
the configured item, but the Manufacturing Series Sales Item
Detail window will open when you move off the sales order line.
Choose Configurator in that window to use the Sales
Configurator window.

Modifying a super bill of materials

The Bill of Materials Entry window includes many fields you can use to create a
super bill of materials, but Manufacturing also includes other windows and options
you can use to add to the basic bill of materials information. Refer to the following
topics for more information about modifying your bill of materials information:

Adding items to a bill of materials Refer to Adding a component to a bill of

materials on page 113 for more information about adding components to a bill of
materials.

Removing items from a bill of materials Refer to Deleting a component from a

bill of materials on page 114 for more information about removing components from
a bill of materials.

Changing component information Refer to Changing component details on

page 113 for more information about changing component details that will affect a
bill of materials.

Deleting a bill of materials Refer to Removing a bill of materials on page 115 for
more information about deleting an obsolete bill of materials.

If you need to make the same change to a group of bills of materials, you also can use the
BOM Mass Updates window. Refer to Chapter 18, “Mass updates,” for more information.

Routings for configured items

If your configured items require assembly or other manufacturing processes, you
must create a routing to use in conjunction with the super bill of materials. If your
configured items don’t require assembly—for example, a configured item for a kit
that customers assemble themselves—no routing is required.

Creating a routing for a configured item requires two steps—creating a routing and
linking sequences and option items.

Create a routing
You must create a routing that includes separate routing sequences for adding each
option item and each standard item to the configured item. For example, a
computer manufacturer’s routing for a configurable computer system might
include routing sequences for installing option items—several different
processors—even though only one processor can be installed in each unit. The
routing also must include the sequences for adding the standard items—such as a
power cord—to the configured item.

208 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 5 BI LLS AND R OUTINGS

Link sequences and option items

You must use the BOM Routing Link window to link option items—items that
might or might not be included in the final product—to the routing sequences. For
example, a furniture manufacturer might offer a table with a wood top or a plastic
top. The manufacturer could create a routing sequence for adding the wood top—
possibly including information about varnishing that top. The manufacturer also
could create a routing sequence for adding the plastic top.

If the manufacturer linked each of these sequences to the appropriate table-top item
in the super bill of materials, when a customer chose the wood top, only the routing
sequence for adding the wood top and varnishing it would be in the configured
routing. If a customer chose the plastic top, the configured routing would include
the sequence for adding the plastic table top.

You should link items to sequences only if the sequence should be excluded when
that item isn’t on the configured bill of materials. For example, a computer
manufacturer shouldn’t link a routing procedure for putting the cover on a
configured tower unless the cover is optional. If the cover must be included in all
configurations of the product—in all possible variations that customers can order—
then the cover shouldn’t be linked to a routing sequence.

To learn about creating routings, refer to Chapter 2, “Routing entry,” in the

Manufacturing Production Functions documentation.

To learn about linking bills of materials items to routing sequences, refer to Chapter
13, “Links to routings,” in the Manufacturing Core Functions documentation.

How super bills and routings work together

The links between the components in a super bill of materials and the routing for a
configurable item are the key to successfully creating a manufacturing order for
configured items.

Suppose you’ve set up a super bill of materials that includes one item that is
required for all configurations, and three option items. Your super bill of materials
and routing might look like the following illustration:

Super bill of m at erials Planning rout ing

Required item Sequence 100

Option 1 Sequence 200

Option 2 Sequence 300

Option 3 Sequence 400

Sequence 500

Each option item in the super bill of materials is linked to a

separate routing sequence.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 209

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

Suppose then that a customer places an order for the configured item. The customer
wants the finished good to include options 1 and 3. The picklist and the working
routing for the configured item might look like the following illustration:

Picklist Working routing

Required item Sequence 100

Option 1 Sequence 200

Option 3 Sequence 400

Sequence 500

Note that only the routing sequences that were linked to options that were not
selected are excluded in the working routing. That is, if a routing sequence is not
linked at all, then that sequence will always be part of the working routing.

210 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 26: Pricing and sales transactions
After you’ve completed the setup tasks for using the Sales Configurator—creating
option categories, options and promotions, creating a super bill of materials and a
routing with sequences linked to optional items—you can start using the Sales
Configurator.

However, using the Sales Configurator requires some understanding of how pricing
calculations are made for configured items. The price method assigned to the
finished item, the use of Multicurrency Management, and option promotions can all
affect how prices for items are calculated with the Sales Configurator.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Sales Configurator pricing calculations

• Effects of Multicurrency Management on pricing
• Effects of promotions on pricing
• How option items affect material costs
• Configuring an item
• Blank Sales Configurator fields
• Adding a newly-configured item to a sales order
• Adding a previously-configured item to a sales order
• Deleting a configured bill of materials
• Viewing options for a sales line item
• Modifying a configured bill of materials
• Adjusting markdown amounts
• Viewing a configured-item drawing

Sales Configurator pricing calculations

When you open the Sales Configurator window from the Manufacturing Series
Sales Item Detail window, the finished goods price method affects how the Sales
Configurator calculates prices. If you open the Sales Configurator window through
the menu (Transactions >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator), pricing isn’t
calculated.

The Sales Configurator doesn’t support items with Markup-Standard Cost or Margin-
Standard Cost price methods.

Pricing for currency and percent of list items

If a finished good has a price method of Currency or Percent of List, the Sales
Configurator window will display the item price for each available option item in
the lower scrolling window. The total price of the finished good—displayed near
the bottom of the window—will be the value from the Item Pricing Maintenance
window. The price that’s calculated includes the prices for all the default item
options specified in the Option Category Maintenance window.

As you add and remove option items from the item, the total price will be
recalculated by adding and subtracting the item prices of the options that are added
or removed from the original total price. Unit price information in the Sales
Transaction Entry window will be updated to reflect the new total cost. Any
markdown amounts will be included and the extended price will be recalculated.
The unit cost will reflect the total cost value.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 211

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

For example, a furniture manufacturer might have chairs that have a selling price—
in the Item Pricing Maintenance window—of $250. The default base for the chairs is
a plastic base with a selling price of $40. One customer prefers a chair with a
wooden base with a selling price of $75. To calculate the selling price for the chairs if
the wooden base is used, the system would start with the chair’s total price ($250,
including the default plastic base), remove the selling price of the plastic base ($40)
and then add the selling price of the wooden base ($75). The total price of the chair
will increase by $35, the difference between the prices of the two types of bases. The
chair’s new price is $285.

Percent markup-current cost or percent margin-current

cost
If the finished good has a Percent Markup-Current Cost or Percent Margin-Current
Cost price method, the Sales Configurator window displays the item price for each
available option item in the lower scrolling window. In this case, the prices for
component items aren’t used when calculating the selling price of the finished
good. Instead, the Sales Configurator adds up all the component items costs and
machine and labor costs for the sequences required by the configured bill of
materials to determine the total cost of the finished good item.

After the costs are added, the price method of the finished good is used to calculate
the selling price for the item. The unit price lines in the Sales Transaction Entry
window are updated with the new selling price information. The unit cost is
updated with the total cost value.

For example, a furniture manufacturer might have an item that includes several
default options. The total cost of the item—with all the default options—is $150, and
includes the machine and labor costs from the routing. If the price method for the
finished item is Percent Markup-Current Cost, and the markup is 50%, the selling
price of the finished good would be $225. In this case, if a customer wanted a $30
wood base instead of the $12 plastic base, the total cost of the finished item would
be increased by $18, the difference between the costs of the two types of bases. The
selling price for the chair would then be recalculated based on the new total cost—
$168—and the 50% markup. The new selling price would be $252.

Effects of Multicurrency Management on pricing

Using Multicurrency Management can affect pricing calculations. If you’ve set up
multicurrency price lists—including one for the specific item, currency and unit of
measure—pricing calculations will be based on those currency amounts rather than
on multicurrency calculation scripts. That is, the pricing will be based on the
amounts entered in your price lists rather than on mathematical formulas for
converting from one currency to another.

Effects of promotions on pricing

Option promotions can be used only when the finished good has a price method of
Currency or Percent of List. If an item in an option category has a valid promotion
but the option category is assigned to a finished good that doesn’t have a Currency
or Percent of List price method, the promotion won’t be displayed when you
configure the item.

212 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 6 PR ICI NG AND SALES TRANSACTIONS

As you add and remove option items from the configured item, the individual item
prices are added and subtracted to calculate the total price of the finished good. If
an option item in the configured bill of materials has a valid promotion, the
promotion option (Pro.) will be marked in the Sales Configurator window, and the
markdown amount will be added to the total in the Markdowns-Promotions field.
The total markdowns will be subtracted from the total price of the finished good to
determine the selling price.

For example, a furniture manufacturer might have an office chair with a selling
price—from the Item Pricing Maintenance window—of $200. When you configure
options for the office chair, suppose you choose a more expensive upholstery fabric.
The new fabric has a price of $60, but also has a valid $15-off promotion—that is, the
date you’re entering the configured sales transaction falls between the promotion’s
start and end dates. When you remove the default fabric from the configured item,
the cost of the default fabric—$35—will be subtracted from the total price. When
you add the new fabric to the item, the difference between the cost of the fabric and
the promotion—$45—will be added. The new total price for the chair will be $210.

How option items affect material costs

If you open the Sales Configurator window through the Manufacturing Series Sales
Item Detail window, a bill of materials information about the basic (not optional)
components of the configured item is copied. Information about the cost of the
component items also is included.

When you select an option for the configured item, the cost of the option item
components is added to the overall material costs for the configured item. The
increase in material costs is immediately reflected in the cost information in the
Sales Configurator window.

If you later have to remove an option from the bill of materials, the component cost
that’s removed from the bill of materials will match the component cost that was
added to the bill of materials most recently—regardless of whether the cost of the
item has changed since the component was added to the bill of materials.

Configuring an item
Use the Sales Configurator window to select options to build a configured item.

This procedure pertains to sales situations in which you want to quickly configure a
bill of materials without calculating costs and pricing.

For other sales situations—such as phone orders placed by customers who know
which options they want and are ready to have sales orders generated—refer to
Adding a newly-configured item to a sales order on page 215 or Adding a previously-
configured item to a sales order on page 217.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 213

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

To configure an item:
1. Open the Sales Configurator window.
(Transactions >> Manufacturing >> Sales Configurator)

2. Enter or select an item number.

3. Enter a name for the configured bill of materials you’ll create. Option categories
assigned to the finished good will be displayed in the top scrolling window.

If you open the Sales Configurator window through the menu, information in
the window will be displayed in functional currency only, and the
multicurrency icon button will not be displayed. Refer to Blank Sales
Configurator fields on page 215 for more information.

4. Mark an option category. You should make selections from option categories in
the order they appear in the scrolling window. The options included in the
option category will be displayed in the lower scrolling window.

5. The default option selection will be marked in the lower scrolling window. You
can accept that selection or change it. If the option category is a multiple-
selection option category, you can choose as many options as you like. If the
option category is a single-selection option category, you can choose only one
option.

• To add an option item, mark the item. A black dot will appear in the left
column of selected items.

• To remove an option item, unmark the item. The black dot will disappear
from the left column.

If you select an item option that is excluded by an earlier option selection—for example,
if you select a 21-inch monitor for a system that supports only monitors through 17
inches, a message will be displayed to indicate that the item selections are incompatible.
You can continue adding other options.

214 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 6 PR ICI NG AND SALES TRANSACTIONS

6. You can change the amount in the Quantity field. The default value will be the
minimum quantity for the option that you specified in the Option Category
Maintenance window.

7. Repeat steps 4 through 6, adding options from each option category.

8. Choose the print icon button to generate a report that lists the options you’ve
selected for the configured item.

9. Determine if a bill of materials based on the selections should be created.

• To generate a configured bill of materials—one that includes only the

components that are required for the item you’ve configured—choose Save.
You can modify the configured bill of materials in any of the Bill of
Materials module windows and can generate manufacturing orders based
on it.

• If you don’t want to create a configured bill of materials, choose Clear.

Information about your configured item won’t be saved.

Blank Sales Configurator fields

Several fields in the lower scrolling window in the Sales Configurator window will
be blank if you open the Sales Configurator through the menu. If you open the Sales
Configurator window through the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window,
information will be displayed in the following fields:

• Item Price will be displayed only if the finished item has a Currency or Percent
of List price method.

• Due Date.

• Currency fields will be displayed only if the Sales Configurator calculates costs
and prices—which it does only when you open it from the Manufacturing
Series Sales Item Detail window.

Adding a newly-configured item to a sales order

This information pertains to sales situations when customers want to generate sales
orders and they know which options they want, and you need to create a new
configured bill of materials for them.

For sales situations when the customer wants to consider other options, but might
not make a decision about purchasing the item until a later date, refer to Configuring
an item on page 213. For sales situations when the customer wants to generate a
sales order for an existing configuration, refer to Adding a previously-configured item
to a sales order on page 217.

The following procedure assumes that you’ve already completed the initial steps of
entering a sales order in the Sales Transaction Entry window, such as selecting a
document type and entering customer information. Refer to the Sales Order
Processing documentation for more information.

Before you can open the Sales Configurator window from the Sales Transaction Entry
window, a default price level must be entered on the price list of each option assigned to the
configured item.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 215

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

To add a newly-configured item to a sales order:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Enter or select a sales document.

3. Enter or select a new sales order line item, or mark an existing sales order line
item.

• If you’re entering a new sales order line item, the Manufacturing Sales Item
Detail window automatically opens when you move off the line.

• If you’re configuring a sales order line item that already has been entered,
choose Additional >> Manufacturing Sales Item Detail to open the
Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window.

4. Choose the Configurator button in the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail
window.

5. You can enter a manufacturing order number for the manufacturing order that’s
created.

If you don’t want to use the default manufacturing order number—which would be the
next manufacturing order number that’s available—you must enter the manufacturing
order number before you enter information in the Configured BOM field.

6. Enter a name for the configured bill of materials you’ll create. Option categories
assigned to the finished good will be displayed in the top scrolling window.

When you move off the field, processing will occur. Information about the
option categories that have been assigned to the item and the selections that are
available for each option category will be displayed in the scrolling windows.

7. Mark an option category. You should make selections from option categories in
the order they appear in the scrolling window. The options included in the
option category will be displayed in the lower scrolling window.

8. The default option selection will be marked in the lower scrolling window. You
can accept that selection or change it. If the option category is a multiple-
selection option category, you can choose as many options as you like. If the
option category is a single-selection option category, you can choose only one
option.

• To add an option item, mark the item. A black dot will appear in the left
column of selected items.

• To remove an option item, unmark the item. The black dot will disappear
from the left column.

If you select an item option that is excluded by an earlier option selection—for example,
if you select a 21-inch monitor for a system that supports only monitors through 17
inches, a message will be displayed to indicate that the item selections are incompatible.
You can continue adding other options.

216 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 6 PR ICI NG AND SALES TRANSACTIONS

9. You can change the amount in the Quantity field. The default value will be the
minimum quantity for the option that you specified in the Option Category
Maintenance window.

10. Repeat steps 7 through 9, adding options from each option category.

11. Choose the print icon button to generate a report that lists the options you’ve
selected for the configured item.

12. To update the due date for the manufacturing order, choose Schedule.

13. Choose Save. The bill of materials and routing for the manufacturing order will
be created based on the options selected, and the Sales Configurator window
and the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window will close. You’ll be
returned to the Sales Transaction Entry window, where you can continue to
enter sales order information.

Adding a previously-configured item to a sales order

This information pertains to sales situations when customers want to generate sales
orders and they know which options they want, and you want to use an existing
configured bill of materials.

For sales situations when the customer wants to consider other options, but might
not make a decision about purchasing the item until a later date, refer to Configuring
an item on page 213. For sales situations when the customer wants to generate a
sales order for a new configuration, refer to Adding a newly-configured item to a sales
order on page 215.

The following procedure assumes that you’ve already completed the initial steps of
entering a sales order in the Sales Transaction Entry window, such as selecting a
document type and entering customer information. Refer to the Sales Order
Processing documentation for more information.

Before you can open the Sales Configurator window from the Sales Transaction Entry
window, a default price level must be entered on the price list of each option assigned to the
configured item.

To add a previously-configured item to a sales order:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Enter or select a sales document.

3. Enter or select a new sales order line item, or mark an existing sales order line
item.

• If you’re entering a new sales order line item, the Manufacturing Sales Item
Detail window automatically opens when you move off the line.

• If you’re configuring a sales order line item that already has been entered,
choose Additional >> Manufacturing Sales Item Detail to open the
Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window.

4. Change the BOM Type to Configured BOM, and select the BOM Name.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 217

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

5. Determine if the manufacturing order should be created now or later.

• Choose Save to save your bill of materials selection without generating a

manufacturing order.

• Choose Generate MO to generate a manufacturing order for the sales order

line. If process security has been set up for creating manufacturing orders,
you might need to supply a password.

6. If you chose Generate MO but there were problems with the manufacturing
order, a message will be displayed and you’ll have the option to view more
information.

Refer to Viewing warnings for generated manufacturing orders on page 31 in Chapter

5, “MPS manufacturing orders,” in the Manufacturing Planning Functions
documentation for more information.

7. After you’ve saved the information or finished viewing manufacturing order

information, the Sales Configurator window and the Manufacturing Series
Sales Item Detail window will close. You’ll be returned to the Sales Transaction
Entry window, where you can continue to enter sales order information.

Deleting a configured bill of materials

Use the Bill of Materials Entry window to delete a configured bill of materials.

To have configured bills of materials removed, archived or both when the corresponding
manufacturing order is closed, refer to Setting up manufacturing order processing in
Chapter 4, “Manufacturing production functions setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup
documentation.

To delete a configured bill of materials:

1. Open the Bill of Materials Entry window.
(Cards >> Manufacturing >> Bill of Materials)

2. Enter or select an item number.

3. Select Configured BOM from the BOM Type list.

4. Enter or select the name of the configured bill of materials.

5. Choose Delete and close the window.

Viewing options for a sales line item

Use the Option Inquiry window to view the options that have been selected for a
particular configured item.

To view options for a sales line item:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Enter or select a sales order that includes at least one configured item.

3. Mark the line item.

218 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 6 PR ICI NG AND SALES TRANSACTIONS

4. Choose Additional >> Option Inquiry to open the Option Inquiry window.

• Mark Show Options Only to see which options were selected for the
specific sales order line item.

• Mark Show All Items to see all items in the configured bill of materials,
including ones for the basic product that aren’t included in option
categories.

5. Close the window.

Modifying a configured bill of materials

If you open the Sales Configurator window through the Manufacturing Series Sales
Item Detail window, you can modify a configured bill of materials.

You can modify a configured bill of materials only if the status of manufacturing orders
based on the bill is Quote/Estimate or Open.

To modify a configured bill of materials:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Enter or select a sales document.

3. Mark the sales order line item that has the configured bill of materials to
modify.

4. Choose Additional >> Manufacturing Sales Item Detail.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 219

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

5. In the Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window, choose Configurator.

The item number and bill of materials name will be displayed in the Sales
Configurator window that opens.

If your company is using Multicurrency Management, information in the Sales

Configurator window will be displayed in the currency selected in the Sales
Transaction Entry window. Choose the multicurrency icon button to switch
between originating and functional currency views, or choose the appropriate
currency from the View menu.

6. If sales promotions were changed or deleted since the configured bill of

materials was saved, a message will be displayed and you’ll have the option to
keep or discard the promotion information you’re using.

7. To check for new promotions that have been added since the configured bill of
materials was saved, choose Configuration >> Apply New Promotions.

As you add and remove items from the configured bill of materials, cost and price
amounts will be recalculated in the fields at the bottom of the window.

8. When you’ve finished making changes, determine if the changes should be

saved.

• To save changes, choose Save. The configured bill of materials will be

saved, the manufacturing order and picklist will be updated, and the sales
orders fields will be adjusted.

• To close without saving your changes, close the window without choosing
Save. A message will be displayed and you’ll have the option to save or
discard your changes. Choose Discard if you don’t want to update the
records.

Adjusting markdown amounts

Use the Sales Configurator window to adjust the markdown amount for a
configured item.

You can adjust the markdown amounts for a configured bill of materials only if the status of
manufacturing orders based on the bill is Quote/Estimate or Open.

To adjust markdown amounts:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Enter or select a sales document.

3. Mark a sales order line item for a configured item.

4. Choose Additional >> Manufacturing Sales Item Detail.

5. Choose Configure to open the Sales Configurator window.

6. The total markdowns for the configured item will be displayed in the
Markdown field. You can accept the calculated markdown total or change it.
Enter the markdown amount in the Unit Markdown field.

220 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 6 PR ICI NG AND SALES TRANSACTIONS

• To increase the markdown amount, enter a positive number.

• To decrease the markdown amount, enter a negative number.

When you move off the field, the unit markdown amount will be reflected in
the Line Totals region.

7. Choose Save and close the window.

Viewing a configured-item drawing

If you’ve attached electronic files to the finished item record, you can view them
through the Sales Configurator window. Refer to Viewing a drawing attached to a
record on page 44.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 221

222 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 27: Configurator manufacturing orders
The costs for manufacturing orders for configured items are calculated differently
than costs for other manufacturing orders.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Material costs for configured manufacturing orders

• Verifying dates for configured items
• Tracking a configured-item manufacturing order
• Unlinking manufacturing and sales orders

Material costs for configured manufacturing orders

You can use Sales Configurator to specify options for either actual or standard cost
finished goods. Material costs for configured items are calculated differently,
depending on the valuation method.

Actual cost configured items

If the configured good has a perpetual valuation method, material costs come from
the actual costs for the items used in the manufacturing order. For example,
suppose a manufacturing order for a configured item required two widgets. The
cost of the first widget was $10 and the cost of the second widget was $12. In this
case, the cost of widgets for the manufacturing order would be $22.

However, the sales invoice cost of an item that has a perpetual valuation method
will be based on the valuation method. That is, if you’ve built several configured
items for inventory and then sold one of those items, the cost for that item on the
sales invoice will follow the LIFO/FIFO rules of the item’s valuation method. If you
need to ensure that the cost of the item made for a sales order by the linked
manufacturing order is the cost that’s reflected on the sales invoice, you’ll need to
track the configured item by serial number and then be sure to select the specific
serial number when you fulfill the sales order line.

Standard cost configured items

If the configured good has a periodic valuation method, standard cost information
is captured when the configured bill of materials and its associated manufacturing
order are created. A one-level standard cost rollup for the routing and the items in
the configured bill of materials is calculated. That total is the “configured standard
cost” for the manufacturing order. Later, when the manufacturing order is closed,
the configured standard cost is compared to the actual costs to calculate the
manufacturing order variances.

For example, suppose a manufacturing order for a configured item required two
widgets. The standard cost of widgets when the configured bill of materials and
manufacturing order were created was $10—and so the total cost of widgets for the
manufacturing order would be $20.

It’s important to note that the standard cost rollup is a single-level rollup. Only the standard
costs of the components that are in the top level of the bill of materials are included in the
rollup.

When you use the Sales Configurator to create configured bills of materials, you
have the option to save the configured bills of materials for future use. (Configured
bills of materials also can be created directly in the Bill of Materials Entry window.)

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 223

PA RT 5 SALES C ONFI GURATOR

You can use configured bills in the Manufacturing Order Entry window, the Quick
MOs window, or even with automatic manufacturing order generation in the
Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail window to create new manufacturing
orders.

However, the single-level standard cost rollup is calculated only if a super bill of
materials exists for the finished item and the manufacturing order is linked to a
sales order. If no super bill of materials exists or if the manufacturing order isn’t
linked to a sales order, the standard inventory cost for the finished good is used to
calculate manufacturing order variances.

Verifying dates for configured items

When you save a configured bill of materials and the associated manufacturing
order, the manufacturing order automatically is scheduled. You can use this
procedure to check the due date for the manufacturing order.

To schedule a manufacturing order for a configured item, you must open the Sales
Configurator window by choosing Configurator in the Manufacturing Series Sales
Item Detail window.

To verify dates for configured items:

1. Open the Sales Transaction Entry window.
(Transactions >> Sales >> Sales Transaction Entry)

2. Enter or select a sales document.

3. Mark a sales order line item for a configured item.

4. Choose Additional >> Manufacturing Sales Item Detail.

5. Choose Configure to open the Sales Configurator window.

6. Choose Schedule.

7. When you’ve finished reviewing the manufacturing order due date

information, close the window.

Tracking a configured-item manufacturing order

Use the Manufacturing Order Entry window to determine which manufacturing
orders are for configured items.

To track a configured-item manufacturing order:

1. Open the Manufacturing Order Entry window.
(Transactions >> Manufacturing >> Manufacturing Orders >> Entry)

2. Use the browse buttons to move among the manufacturing order records. If the
manufacturing order you’re interested in was created recently, you might want
to use the rightmost browse button to move to the last manufacturing order
record. Use the second browse button to move back through manufacturing
order records. The description of the manufacturing order for the configured
item will be “FROM SO” and then the sales document number.

3. Close the window when you’ve finished.

224 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 7 CONFIGURATOR MANUFACTURI NG ORDERS

Unlinking manufacturing and sales orders

If you generate a manufacturing order when you configure a bill of materials and
later want to delete the manufacturing order, you must unlink the manufacturing
order from the sales order. Refer to Removing sales order-manufacturing order links in
Chapter 11, “Manufacturing/sales order link,” in the Manufacturing Production
Functions documentation for more information about using the Manufacturing/
Sales Order Cross-reference window to complete this procedure.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 225

226 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
PART 6: MANUFACTURING REPORTS
 Part 6: Manufacturing reports
This part of the documentation includes information that will help you set up and
use the Manufacturing reports. You can create report options and print
Manufacturing reports from various Manufacturing windows. You need to create a
report option only once; you can print it again at any time without having to
redefine the option. This information describes how to create options and how you
can save them to use in the future.

After you’ve defined report options, others in your organization can use them to
quickly generate reports. The reports can be printed to the screen, to a printer or to a
file.

The following information is discussed:

• Chapter 28, “Reports overview,” provides basic information about the report
options windows and the terms used to describe report options.

• Chapter 29, “Manufacturing reports,” contains information that can be applied

to all report options windows, such as how to create a report option and how to
generate a report.

228 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 28: Reports overview
Manufacturing includes several report windows you can use to customize
Manufacturing reports. Use the windows to create report options, which are groups
of range restrictions and sorting methods that you can use to specify how
information should appear on reports. Reports can be produced in hard copy
format, stored in a designated file on your computer, or viewed on your computer
screen.

This information is divided into the following sections:

• Manufacturing report options

• Manufacturing report terms

Manufacturing report options

Use any of the following windows to define report options for Manufacturing
modules. For more information about any of the windows, refer to online help.

• BOM Report Options window

• CRP Report Options window
• Drawings Report Options window
• ECM Report Options window
• Item Engineering Report Options window
• Job Costing Report Options window
• Machine Reports Options window
• Manufacturing Order Routing Reports window
• MOP Report Options window
• MPS Report Options window
• MRP Report Options window
• Planning Routing Reports window
• QA Report Options window
• Option Group Report Selector window
• Sales Forecasting Report Options window
• WIP Report Options window
• Work Center Report Options window

Manufacturing report terms

Several terms can be used to describe how you can print Manufacturing reports.

Report option You must create and save a report option before you can generate
a Manufacturing report, if you’ve opened the report window from the Reports
menu rather than by choosing the print icon button or Go To button. A report
option is a collection of entries that specify the amount of information or the type of
information that will appear on a report. A report option includes one or more
range restrictions that you specify and can include a sorting order. Multiple report
options can be created.

Range restriction A range restriction limits the records included in a report. For
example, you can limit inventory records to only those items that have item
numbers that are within a certain range of item numbers. Depending on the records
that can be included in a report, you can limit information based on other criteria,
such as dates, statuses, or types.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 229

PA RT 6 MANUFACTURING REPOR TS

Each report option can include multiple range restrictions. The restrictions are
cumulative—each range restriction will limit your report further. For example,
suppose that you want to generate a report about inventory items. If the report
option includes one restriction that limits the report to Made items, and another
restriction that limits the report to a certain range of item numbers, only those items
that meet both criteria will be included in the report.

Sorting method A sorting method determines the order that report items are
listed in. For example, a report based on employee records might be sorted by
employees’ last names or employees’ first names.

Where used “Where used” describes a group of reports and functions that let
you scan records to find parent parts—including subassemblies—that include a
certain component. For example, if your company manufactures electronics, you
could run a “where used” report to see all instances where a certain resistor is used.

Organizations frequently use reports like this to be sure that changes in component
schematics or requirements do not inadvertently affect other parent parts.

Report types Some Manufacturing reports are available in two formats: text and
graphic. Both report types include the same information. Text reports are plain, text
reports. Graphic reports include special formatting such as shading, borders, and
fonts.

The default selection for printing text or graphic reports is a user preference. Refer to
General user preferences for Manufacturing in Chapter 7, “Manufacturing basic user
setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information.

230 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Chapter 29: Manufacturing reports
Although Manufacturing has several report option windows, all the windows work
in basically the same way—you must create and save a report option before you can
generate a report, if you’re generating the report from windows opened from the
menus. You can generate reports from other Manufacturing windows without
creating report options.

This information is divided into these sections:

• Creating a report option

• Adding a range restriction to a report option
• Deleting a range restriction from a report option
• Generating a Manufacturing report
• Viewing manufacturing reports in the report list
• Adding a report option to the report list
• Removing a report option from the report list
• Changing report page orientation
• Deleting a report option

Creating a report option

You can use any of the windows to create a report option—the procedure is
basically the same in any of the windows.

The BOM Report Options window—the window displayed in the following

procedure—is just one of the several Manufacturing report options windows you
can use.

You can open report option windows from other Manufacturing windows. Often, if
no record is displayed in a Manufacturing window when you choose the print icon
button, the associated report option window will open.

To create a report option:

1. Open a report options window.
(Reports >> Manufacturing >> module of your choice >> Report Options)

2. Enter a report option name.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 231

PA RT 6 MANUFACTURING REPOR TS

3. Mark the Include in Report List option to include this report option in the report
list.

Only one of the reports for each report option can be included in the report list.

4. Select a report.

5. Select a sorting method for the report information.

6. Select a report type. Text- and graphic-type reports include the same
information, but graphic reports add special shading and borders.

The default selection for printing text or graphic reports is a user preference. Refer to
General user preferences for Manufacturing in Chapter 7, “Manufacturing basic user
setup,” in the Manufacturing Setup documentation for more information.

7. Set up other report features, as needed. For example, some reports allow you to
add your own report title.

8. Create a range restriction. To include all information in the report—if the report
should include all items or all bills of materials, for example—leave the Ranges
field blank to include all records.

Be sure to check online help for specific field information for report option windows.

• Select an attribute—a piece of information about the records—to limit the

report information. For example, if you create a report about machines in
your organization, you could include only those machines that are in
specific work centers. In that case, “Machine Location” is the attribute you
would use to restrict the report.

• Specify the information to be included in the report. If you select some

attributes—such as item numbers or dates—you must enter From and To
information. These entries will be the first and last records in your report.

When you select other attributes—such as Status or Type—you must mark

the statuses or types to be included in the report. For example, you could
generate a bill of materials report based only on configured bills of
materials.

9. Choose Insert to add the range information to the scrolling window.

10. Continue, repeating steps 7 and 8, to add more range restrictions to the report.

11. Choose Save to save the report option, and close the window.

Adding a range restriction to a report option

Use a report options window to add a restriction to an existing report option.

To add a range restriction to a report option:

1. Open a report options window.
(Reports >> Manufacturing >> module of your choice >> Report Options)

2. Select a report option.

232 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 9 MANUFACTURI NG REPORTS

3. Create a range restriction. To include all information in the report—if the report
should include all items or all bills of materials, for example—leave the Ranges
field blank to include all records.

• Select an attribute—a piece of information about the records to limit the

report information.

• Specify the information to be included in the report. If you select some

attributes—such as item numbers or dates—you must enter From and To
information. These entries will be the first and last records in your report.

When you select other attributes—such as Status or Type—you must mark the
statuses or types to be included in the report. For example, you could generate a
bill of materials report based only on configured bills of materials.

4. Choose Insert to add the range information to the scrolling window.

5. Choose Save and close the window.

Deleting a range restriction from a report option

Use a report options window to remove a restriction from an existing report option.

To delete a range restriction from a report option:

1. Open a report options window.
(Reports >> Manufacturing >> module of your choice >> Report Options)

2. Select a report option.

3. In the Range restriction window, highlight the restriction to remove from the
report option.

4. Choose Remove.

5. Choose Save and close the window.

Generating a Manufacturing report

Use Manufacturing report windows to choose reports and report options.

To generate a Manufacturing report:

1. Open a report option window.
(Reports >> Manufacturing >> module of your choice >> Report Options)

You also can open report option windows from other Manufacturing windows.
Often, if no record is displayed in a Manufacturing window when you choose
the print icon button, the associated report option window will open.

2. Enter or select a report option.

3. Select a report.

4. Choose Destination to open the Report Destination window. You can choose to
send the report to a printer, to your screen or to a file. The default selection for
the report destination comes from your user preference settings.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 233

PA RT 6 MANUFACTURING REPOR TS

5. Choose OK in the Report Destination window.

6. Choose the print icon button.

In some report option windows, the report is printed and the report option is
saved when you choose the print icon button. In other windows, a message will
be displayed and you’ll have the option to save the report option you’ve
created.

• Choose Yes to save the report option and print the report.

• Choose No to return to the report options window. The option won’t be

saved, and no report will be printed.

Viewing manufacturing reports in the report list

Use a report list window to view manufacturing reports in the report list.

To view manufacturing reports in the report list:

1. Open a report list window.
(Reports >> Manufacturing >> module of your choice >> Report List).

The report list window displays the report options for the module that you
selected.

2. When you have finished viewing reports, close the window.

Adding a report option to the report list

Use a report options window to add an existing report option to the report list.

To add a report option to the report list:

1. Open a report options window.
(Reports >> Manufacturing >> module of your choice >> Report Options)

2. Select a report option.

3. Mark the Include in Report List option to include the report option in the report
list.

Only one of the reports for each report option can be included in the report list.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

Removing a report option from the report list

Use a report options window to remove a report option from the report list.

To remove a report option from the report list:

1. Open a report options window.
(Reports >> Manufacturing >> module of your choice >> Report Options)

2. Select the report option to remove from the report list.

234 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 C H A P T E R 2 9 MANUFACTURI NG REPORTS

3. Unmark the Include in Report List option to remove the report option from the
report list.

4. Choose Save and close the window.

Changing report page orientation

Use the Print Setup window to change between portrait and landscape versions of
your reports.

To change report page orientation:

1. Open the Print Setup window.
(Microsoft Dynamics GP >> Print Setup)

2. Mark Portrait if reports should be printed in a vertical format; mark Landscape

if reports should be printed in a horizontal format.

3. Choose OK and close the window.

Deleting a report option

Use a report options window to delete report options.

To delete a report option:

1. Open a report options window.
(Reports >> Manufacturing >> module of your choice >> Report Options)

2. Select a report option.

3. Choose Delete. A message will be displayed and you’ll have the option to
cancel the removal of the report option.

• Choose Yes to delete the report option.

• Choose No to keep the report option unchanged.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 235

236 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS
Glossary AQL table
See Acceptable Quality Level table.
Buyer ID
Code that identifies the person who
purchases the item from a supplier.
Acceptable Quality Level table ARCH BOM
A representation of testing standards and See Archived bill of materials. By-product
sample sizes. AQL tables include A finished good that is created incidentally
Archived bill of materials to another finished good.
information about appropriate sample sizes
A bill of materials stored in a separate area of
and the maximum number of pieces that can Child part
your computer system. Bills of material
fail inspection in an acceptable lot. You’ll might be archived as they become obsolete. See Component.
probably set up several AQL tables to reflect
different inspection standards for different Assemble to order Class
items. A type of manufacturing facility that puts a A method for grouping similar parts or
group of components together according to products.
Active routing customer specifications.
See Manufacturing order routing. Co-product
Back order See By-product.
Actual costing An order to be fulfilled when stock for items
An inventory tracking method that involves in shortage is replenished. Company data
constantly updating inventory each time an Company data is the information you enter
item is added or removed. Backflushing about your organization, such as its
A method of accounting for the use of applicants, employees, benefits systems,
Actual demand resources—labor and machine time, and training programs, and organizational
The total quantity of an item requested on all
items—based on standards you’ve defined. structure.
firm manufacturing orders. Transactions to account for the use of
backflushed resources are created when a Component
Actual expenses (Job Costing) Items used to build a product. Component
The total of all applied expense transactions manufacturing order is closed.
parts can be items (nuts, screws, diodes) or
linked to a job. Backward finite scheduling subassemblies (axles, circuit boards).
Actual margin (Job Costing) A scheduling method that starts from a due
date and works out a plan for the flow of Component transaction
A measure of the overall profitability of a A line on a pick document to allocate,
specific job. The actual margin for a job is work through the plant with the assumption
that there are only a limited number of reverse allocate, issue, reverse issue, scrap,
calculated by dividing the actual profit by
resources (machines and workers) available or reverse scrap components for a
the actual revenue, and then multiplying the manufacturing order.
result by 100. to complete the task.

Backward infinite scheduling CONFIG BOM

Actual profit (Job Costing) See Configured bill of materials.
The difference between actual expenses and A scheduling method that starts from a due
actual revenues for a job. date and works out a plan for the flow of Configuration data
work through the plant with the assumption In Bill of Materials, information about the
Actual revenues that the plant has unlimited machine and
product’s overall design. It includes the
The total of all applied revenue transactions worker capacity.
design authority for the product, the unit of
linked to a job. measure, and the revision level.
Batch cards
Allocate See Manufacturing order. Configured bill of materials
To reserve materials needed for a A bill of materials that is built by selecting
manufacturing order. Bill of materials
A list of the components and subassemblies options from a super bill of materials.
Alternate routing needed to build one unit of a product. The Configured cost
Any planning routing for an item other than bill of materials also shows quantities for
The calculated cost of building a specific
the primary routing. each component.
configured item, depending on the options a
Alternate work center Bill of operations customer selects. The configured cost reflects
A work center to which work can be shifted See Routing. the cost of the component items and the
if the customary work center for a specific labor required to manufacture the item.
task is not available. If the primary work Bin
A storage device to hold discrete items. Configured price
center is temporarily shut down, or if
The suggested price to charge the customer
demand exceeds the capacity of the primary Blanket purchase order for a configured item, based on your finished
work center, the work load can be shifted to
A purchase order that is delivered gradually goods price schedule and the selected
the alternate work center.
to the buyer. options.
Apply Bucket Configured routing
To add the amount of a revenue or expense
A time period used for calculating MRP A routing based on the selected options. For
linked to a job to the financial information requirements. Manufacturing supports daily, example, if you created a configured bill of
about the job. If a transaction isn't applied to
weekly, and monthly bucketing options. materials for office chairs and chose plastic
a job, its amount won't be reflected in the
components rather than wooden ones, the
overall financial information about the job. Buy items routing would be modified to exclude the
Applying transactions in Job Costing can Items that are supplied to your plant by a sequences for staining and varnishing the
happen manually or automatically. supplier. wooden components. Also known as a
“configured working routing.”

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 237

GLOS SA RY

Configured Working Routing Down day Engineering change

See Configured routing. A day when the facility—the entire shop management (ECM)
floor or a specific work center—is not in The systems that a company has in place to
Consume production. ensure that changes to its product
To use up the quantity that has been issued
specifications are properly monitored.
to WIP—for materials, labor time, or Drawing
machine time—for a manufacturing order. A schematic or other illustration. You can Engineering change order (ECO)
“attach” electronic drawing files—such as The second stage of the engineering change
Cost variance CAD illustrations, bitmaps and even .AVI management process. An engineering
The difference between the actual costs—for movies—to records. change order is a change that has been
materials, machine time and labor—and the
approved for incorporation.
estimated costs for a manufacturing order. Drawing group
Cost variances can be positive or negative. A set of related drawing files. For example, a Engineering change request (ECR)
drawing group might include several views The proposal stage of the engineering
Customer record of the same item. change management process. An
A record that shows all the information you
engineering change request is a proposed
need to conduct sales transactions, such as Due date change.
address information, billing and shipping The date when the items on a sales order
instructions, credit history and other data for should be ready to ship. Estimated expense
that customer. A projection of the expenses for a job,
ECM entered in the Job Maintenance window.
Cycle time See Engineering change management (ECM).
The total amount of time it takes to make one Estimated margin
part, such as setup time, labor time, machine ECO A job costing calculation based on estimated
time, queue time and move time. See Engineering change order (ECO).
revenues and estimated expenses for a
ECR specific job. The estimated margin is
Default inventory site calculated by dividing the estimated profit
The location commonly used to store raw See Engineering change request (ECR).
by the estimated revenues, and the
materials or finished goods. Element multiplying the result by 100.
Defect code An order or transaction that can be linked to
a job, such as a manufacturing order, a sales Estimated profit
An identifier for a particular type of item
order, a purchase order line, a receiving line, The difference between the estimated
failure. For example, if an item is too long
or inventory transaction. expenses and the estimated revenues for a
and fails a specification for length, you might specific job.
create a defect code called LENGTH. Defect Employee allocation
codes are used in Manufacturing reports to Estimated revenue
The assignment of workers to work areas.
help summarize information. Each employee can be assigned an efficiency A projection of the revenues for a job,
rating for a particular task. The number of entered in the Job Maintenance window.
Denial code
An identifier for the reason why an hours per shift spent on a task can also be Exclusions (MRP)
engineering change request wasn’t specified. Total scheduled employee hours
A method of marking an item, site or item-
approved. for the work center are also displayed.
site combination so it isn’t included in MRP
Employee efficiency percentage calculations.
Destination routing
A routing that you copy from another A ranking of how an employee performs a Exclusions (Sales Configurator)
routing. You can add sequences to the given task. You can use this field different Options that are disallowed because of
destination routing. ways, depending on how your organization
another option selection.
handles its employee efficiencies. Some
Direct labor organizations complete time studies of Expensed floor stock
The time spent by one or more production various tasks, and set task goals for workers A bill of materials component that has been
workers on filling a specific manufacturing based on those figures. Employees earn designated—regardless of its issue-to and
order. efficiency ratings based on their ability to issue-from sites—as a floor stock item. The
meet those criteria. In other organizations, cost of expensed floor stock is applied to an
Discrete item the top producer is assigned a value of 100% expense account, rather than to the cost of
An item that is manufactured as a distinct (or less) and all other employees would be the finished item. See also Floor stock.
unit. Examples of discrete items include ranked in comparison to the top producer.
computers, automobiles, and radios. Explode
ENG BOM To determine the total quantities of
Disposition code See Engineering bill of materials. components needed for a manufactured
An identifier for a method for handling
item. To explode a bill of materials, the
defective items. For example, you might Engineering bill of materials quantity ordered is multiplied by the
decide to scrap certain defective items, and A proposed bill of materials. Designs that are
quantity used for each of its components.
might assign a SCRAP disposition code to only in the prototype stage of development,
Exploding continues throughout the bill of
those items. for example, may have engineering bills of materials, so component requirements for
materials. In this way, the costs of producing
Double-booking subassemblies are also calculated.
a design can be studied without impacting
A situation where a job might inadvertently the material requirements that the system Filled order
be charged twice for the same expense. generates. An order that has had all its requirements
met and can be closed.

238 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 G L O S S A R Y

Finished goods Hours per shift Item-specific inventory

An item that is manufactured for sale. Also, The amount of time per shift actually spent valuation
the final products that a company sells. working on the assigned tasks. To determine An accounting method that places a value on
hours available per shift, subtract any non- each item that you produce, based upon
Finite scheduling task related activities from the total number either standard cost or current cost.
A scheduling method that assumes that of available hours. For example, if an
limited capacity for labor and machines is employee is scheduled for an eight-hour Job
available. shift but has a one-hour meeting and two A series of business activities that, when
quarter-hour breaks that day, the total completed, will fulfill a high-level objective.
Fixed order quantity
available time would be 6.5 hours.
An order policy type that calculates order Job category
size for a day’s requirements based on one or Inclusions Groupings that you can create to organize
more of these variables: standard order Option items automatically added to a the titles and descriptions of jobs within
quantity, order increment size, minimum configured bill of materials when a customer your company. Each job category must
order size, and maximum order size. selects a certain option. For example, a include a set of values that can be used to
computer manufacturer might offer a sort all jobs. For example, you might create a
Fixed quantity job category called REGION so you could
computer system in tan and black. If the
The quantity of a component that is required track jobs from specific geographical areas.
for each manufacturing order, regardless of customer selects the option for a tan
computer, the computer manufacturer might Values for that job category might be East,
how many finished goods are produced with
set up the super bill of materials so that the West, North and South-or might be states,
the order. For example, if you use two provinces, countries/regions or other areas.
widgets to calibrate equipment each time tan keyboard automatically is included as
part of the purchase.
you begin a new manufacturing order, the Job costing element
fixed quantity for widgets would be 2 for the Indirect labor A type of element that can be linked to a job.
finished good bill of materials. The time spent on tasks that are not directly
Job costing transaction
Floor stock related to filling a specific manufacturing
An instance of a job element that is linked to
A bill of materials component that uses the order. Examples of indirect labor include
a specific job, capturing information about a
same site for its issue-from and issue-to sites. meetings and training.
specific revenue or expense associated with
The cost of this type of floor stock is applied Instruction sheet the job. Job costing transactions aren’t
to the cost of the finished item. See also See Routing. accounting transactions: they won’t affect
Expensed floor stock. the General Ledger or any subsidiary
Infinite scheduling ledgers.
Forecasted demand A scheduling method that assumes that all
An estimate of how much of an item should required capacity for labor and machines is Job order
be produced over a specific period of time. always available. See Manufacturing order.
Forward infinite scheduling Invoice history Job transaction list
A scheduling type based on a starting date The information tracked about past invoices. A selection of transactions to be applied to a
for an order, with the assumption that the Invoice history allows you to determine specific job. You can use transaction lists to
plant has unlimited machine and worker what historical information you will need for specify the kinds of transactions that should
capacity for the work order. tracking sales activity. History information be applied to jobs, and to specify the
can include transaction detail and/or transactions to be applied automatically to
Full regeneration jobs.
account distributions.
An MRP process that recalculates your MRP
data, including all sales orders, purchase Issue Kit
orders, sales forecasts, and manufacturing A type of component transaction. When A group of finished items that compose a set.
orders. See Net change regeneration. components are issued for a manufacturing
Labor code
Functional currency order, they are removed from inventory and
A code that is used to tie a job function to a
added to WIP.
The currency type (such as dollars or specific pay grade. Usually, jobs requiring
pounds) used by your organization for its Issue-from location fewer skills have lower pay grades and are
accounting. See also Originating currency. The site where the components used in the compensated at lower rates. Jobs requiring
manufacturing process are stored prior to more skills or education have higher pay
General ledger variance grades and higher pay rates.
The difference between costs that have been beginning the manufacturing order, such as
with a vendor, or in a department, a
added to WIP and the costs that have been Labor time
warehouse, or another plant.
removed from WIP for a specific The number of employee hours required to
manufacturing order. Issue-to location complete the operation.
Header record The site where the finished product will be
Lead time
The information that ties the pieces of a stored prior to delivery to the customer, such
The minimum amount of time required for
as in a department, a warehouse, or another
larger record together. For example, the production of an item.
plant.
header record of a routing includes
information about the type of routing, the Location
Item type
routing name, the date the routing was A work site. Some businesses are organized
A code to designate the accounting class for
created and so on. This information ties as a single company or division, but may
the item, such as inventory, discontinued,
sequence records together to create one have multiple sites.
and misc. charge.
routing record.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 239

GLOS SA RY

Lot-for-lot Make to order Maximum order size

An order policy for ordering the exact An order fulfillment method for made items. One of the variables that can be used to
quantity needed, provided that the order When make-to-order items are sold, calculate order quantities for fixed or period
quantity is between the minimum and manufacturing orders to build the items order quantity order policies. Maximum
maximum order quantities. required to fulfill the manufacturing orders order size puts a limit on the size of
are created. Manufacturing orders are used automatically generated purchase and
Lot-numbered item to respond to specific sales orders manufacturing orders. If demand is greater
Any inventoried item that is part of a group than the maximum order size, an additional
that is assigned a unique identifier, which Make to stock order will be created.
can be letters, numbers or a combination of An order fulfillment method for made items.
letters and numbers. When make-to-stock items are sold, the MFG BOM
quantities required to fulfill the sales order See Manufacturing bill of materials.
Lot-number–tracked item are taken from inventory quantities.
See Lot-numbered item. Manufacturing orders are used to keep Minimum order size
inventory levels up so that sales orders can One of the variables that can be used to
Lot-sample size calculate order quantities for fixed or period
be fulfilled.
The number of item units that should be order quantity order policies. It is similar to
inspected to determine if a group of items Manufacturing bill of materials standard order quantity, and is used in its
meets specifications. The bill of materials used to build a parent place if the standard order quantity is zero. If
Lot-tracked item part in your organization. A manufacturing the standard order quantity is greater than
See Lot-number–tracked item. bill of materials is the “real” bill of materials, zero, the standard order quantity supersedes
and is used to figure material requirements the minimum order size.
Low-level code for your organization.
A code that identifies the deepest level an
Module security
item has in any bill of materials in your
Manufacturing data sheets A way to see if other users are working with
See Routing. records that prevent you from completing
manufacturing records.
certain processes. Module security also
Machine Manufacturing order allows you to unlock records and remove
A set of documents conveying the authority users from MRP.
Any tool, device or implement that you use
to manufacture parts or products in specified
in your manufacturing process.
quantities. Manufacturing orders are also Move in
Machine allocation called batch cards, job orders, production To adjust the due dates of existing
The assignment of a machine to a work area. orders, run orders, shop orders, or work manufacturing orders and purchase orders
Each allocation record displays available orders. to meet potential shortages identified by
machine hours, the efficiency rating, and MRP calculations. If MRP calculations
utilization rate for that machine. Total
Manufacturing order receipt uncover a shortage of an item and if there’s
scheduled machine hours for the work A document where material, labor, and an existing order for the item in the future,
machine costs in WIP are applied to finished the order will be flagged to be “moved in” to
center are also displayed.
goods that are received in inventory. Costs prevent the shortage.
Machine definition for backflushed materials, labor, and
The record of a machine in your plant that machine time also are applied to the finished Move out
allows you to track statistics for each goods cost. To reschedule certain manufacturing orders
machine, including vendor information, or purchase orders to prevent stock overages
warranty period, and operating costs.
Manufacturing order routing on the current due date. An appropriate
A routing used to complete a specific future date to move the order to cover a
Machine efficiency manufacturing order, which includes all the future net requirement is proposed
A measure of how a machine is suited for a necessary requirements to fill the order, such
specific task. The higher the efficiency rating, as workers, machine time, and raw Move time
the more effectively the machine works. materials. Also known as “manufacturing The number of hours needed to physically
routing.” move an item to the next operation.
Machine time
The number of machine hours needed to Manufacturing picklist MRP
complete the operation. A list of the items and quantities of items See Material Requirements Planning.
that are required to fill a manufacturing
Machine utilization order. MRP shortage
A measure of how much of the available A lack of resources to produce the required
machine capacity is actually being used. For Material Requirements Planning amount of an item to fill outstanding orders.
example, if a machine is capable of A series of data collection and interpretation Manufacturing orders can be entered
producing 100 items per eight-hour day and procedures that allow you to forecast regardless of current stock of available
you are only producing 80 items, the resource requirements over a specified time materials.
machine utilization rate is 80 percent. period (days, weeks or months).

Make item
An item that is produced by your plant.

Make or Buy item

An item that can be bought or manufactured
by your company.

240 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 G L O S S A R Y

Multi-level bill of materials Operation list Outsourcing work center

A bill of materials that lists all the See Routing. A work center where outsourced services are
components directly or indirectly involved performed. An outsourcing work center can
in building the parent part, together with the Operations sheets be on-site or can be at the vendor site.
required quantity for each item. For See Routing.
example, if a subassembly is used in the Overhead
Option Costs incurred that cannot be directly related
parent part, the multi-level bill of materials
In sales configurator, an option is one of the to the products or serviced produced. These
will show all the components needed to
available choices for some aspect of a costs, such as light, heat, supervision, and
build the subassembly, including purchased configured item. For example, a computer
parts and materials. See also Single-level bill maintenance can be grouped and distributed
manufacturer might offer 15-, 17- and 21- to units of products or services by some
of materials.
inch monitors as options for a computer. standard allocation method.
Negative WIP Option bill of materials
The situation that occurs if you enter and Parallel routing
A bill of materials for a component A routing that includes some routing
post a manufacturing order receipt where signifying that the component won’t be
more is consumed from WIP than was in sequences that run concurrently.
identical in all finished products.
WIP for the manufacturing order. When Parent part
finished goods are received into inventory Option category An item built from the component parts. A
before materials have been issued to the A group of related items that customers can parent part can be a subassembly or a final
order or before labor or machine time data choose from, such as various sizes of product.
collection transactions have been completed, computer monitors.
this can occur. You must set up Pegging
Manufacturing Order Processing to be able Option setting To trace an item requirement through the
to enter receipts that would cause negative A setting that controls the information that MRP system to find the source of the
WIP. appears on a report, such as sorting method, requirement quantity. Pegging will reveal
detail level, and range restriction. whether a requirement is driven by a
Net change regeneration manufacturing order, sales order, purchase
An MRP process that updates MRP Order increment
order or picklist.
information based on changes to A variable that can be used to calculate order
manufacturing orders, sales orders, purchase quantities for fixed or period order quantity Period order quantity
orders, and inventory quantities. See also Full order policies. The order increment is the An order policy type that calculates order
regeneration. number of item units that can be added to size for requirements for a period you
the standard order quantity to increase the specify, based on one or more of these
Nettable item order size to meet demand. variables: standard order quantity, order
An item, site or item-site combination that is
Order policy increment size, minimum order size and
included in MRP calculations.
A method for calculating the order sizes of maximum order size.
Non-nettable item automatically generated purchase and Periodic costing
Any item, site, or item-site combination that manufacturing orders. Manufacturing See Standard costing.
is not included in MRP calculations. includes three order policies: lot-for-lot,
fixed order quantity and period order Periodic inventory
Non-Standard Report quantity. An inventory tracking method that involves
A report for internal use that summarizes taking inventory on a recurring basis, such
information about defects identified in a Originating currency as monthly, quarterly or yearly. This is the
group of items. An NSR might also include The alternate currency that a multicurrency same as “standard” costing.
information about the disposition of the transaction was conducted in. See also
defective items. Functional currency. Perpetual inventory
An inventory tracking method that involves
NSR Outsourced item constantly updating inventory each time an
See Non-Standard Report. A finished good that requires one or more item is added or removed.
outsourced services.
Op code Phantom bill of materials
See Operation code. Outsourced service A bill of materials used to describe the
A service that is part of manufacturing components of a parent part that will be built
Operation processes that is purchased from a vendor.
A specific task within the manufacturing as part of a higher-level parent part. The
process. You can use operations as templates Outsourcing term “phantom” is used to indicate that the
for routing sequences. The practice of using outside vendors to part never really exists as a stocked item, but
is built along with the production of the
perform certain manufacturing tasks.
Operation chart higher-level part that is driving an overall
See Routing. Outsourcing routing production order. Creating bills of materials
A routing that includes one or more as phantoms allows the manufacturing order
Operation code sequences that are completed by an picklist and the Material Requirements
A code assigned to a particular task within outsourcing vendor. Planning (MRP) features to explode through
the manufacturing process. For example, in a the phantom item down to the lower-level
company that makes electrical components, Outsourcing vendor parts.
the operation code for testing the validity of A vendor that you purchase outsourced
a certain characteristic might be “110.” Also, services from.
op code.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 241

GLOS SA RY

Pick document Promise date Record

A group of component transactions that The date that the customer has been told to A group of computer data tied together by a
share a type such as Allocate, Issue, Reverse expect receipt of the order. common key. (All of one item's
Issue, and that are posted together. A pick information—from quantity and site
document can include component Promotion information to engineering data to bill of
transactions for multiple manufacturing Special pricing offered on a particular option materials data—is the item's record.)
orders, items, or sites. for a configured item.
Reference designator
Picklist A special pricing offered on a particular
Information that specifies where
A list of the items and quantities of items option for a configured item. components should be used in an assembly,
that are required to fill a manufacturing Purchase order such as the placement of four resistors on a
order. A formal request for goods or services. The printed circuit board.

Planner ID purchase order shows the quantity of goods Regular bill of materials
ordered, expected receipt date, and supplier
A code that identifies the individual A simple, single-level bill of materials.
responsible for the production of the item. name. The purchase order may also include
other information pertaining to the delivery Replaced item
Planning routing of the item, such as Free On Board (F.O.B.) An item in a mass update to bills of materials
A routing used to determine resource points. that is removed from bills of materials. A
requirements for a potential manufacturing replacement item might or might not be
order. If negotiations with the customer are
QA Required substituted for the replaced item.
successful, the planning routing can be A designation for purchased items that must
pass a quality inspection before being added Replacement item
converted into an active routing and used to
to your inventory. An item in a mass update to bills of materials
fill a manufacturing order.
that is added to bills of materials. A
Pointer routing Quantity damaged replacement item might be an addition to a
The total items, if any, damaged during
A pointer routing is used to outline a series bill of materials, or might be a substitution
of steps that are common to all items shipping. for a replaced item.
produced by your plant. For example, if each Quantity ordered
item needs to be tested by quality assurance, Return
The amount of the item requested on a single
packaged and shipped, a routing can be An item or merchandise returned by a
purchase order. customer to your company. A return
defined to cover these steps for all items that
you manufacture. Quantity received decreases the customer's balance on account
The amount of the item received from the and, if you choose, increases inventory
Post-to site supplier. quantities.
The site where the finished product will be
stored prior to delivery to the customer. This Quantity to fill Revalue
location can be a department, a warehouse, An amount of a product that was ordered To finalize rolled-up standard cost changes.
or another plant. but has not been received. Revaluing replaces existing standard cost
information with new standard cost
Primary routing Query information, which is used in your
A routing that provides the instructions for A search through a specific set of records for accounting processes. As you change your
building an item. It is a basis for scheduling certain information. standard cost information, you might roll up
and resource estimates. The primary routing costs several times, but probably will revalue
information is used to determine the Queue time items only at certain points.
required lead time for manufacturing the The number of hours spent waiting for the
product. Each item can have only one active operation to begin. Revenue/expense code
primary routing. A short identifier used to categorize
The number of hours spent waiting for an
expenses and revenues linked to a job.
Process security operation to begin.
A type of security that allows you to restrict Reverse allocate
Quick manufacturing order A component transaction type where items
access to certain procedures or processes A manufacturing order that doesn’t require
within Manufacturing. that have been allocated to a manufacturing
you to collect information about labor and
order are unallocated. See also Allocate.
Process security set machine time and material costs when the
A password or list of user IDs you define to order is closed. Reverse Issue
restrict authority for completing a A component transaction type where
Quote components that were issued to a
Manufacturing process. You can use one A company’s offered price for an item that a
process security set for all restricted manufacturing order (which removes them
customer or a potential customer has
procedures, or you can create different from inventory and adds them to WIP) are
requested. Quotes can be transferred to
process security sets for different procedures. removed from WIP and put again in
another document type, deleted or voided. inventory. See also Issue.
Production variance Raw materials
The difference between the actual and Reverse Scrap
Items used to build products. They can be A component transaction type where
estimated costs for a manufacturing order, individual items like nuts, screws and
based on the working routing, the picklist, components that were scrapped for a
diodes, or they can be subassemblies.
and labor and machine codes. manufacturing order are restored to the
issued (and not scrapped) quantity for the
order. See also Scrap.

242 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 G L O S S A R Y

Roll up Sampling Shipping method

To apply calculations based on changes to A statistical process of selecting a portion of The manner in which the items are
standard cost information to items. If you a large group of items to be inspected. From transported from the supplier to the
change the cost of a raw material that is part the sample you select—and your inspection manufacturer. Examples of shipping
of several subassemblies and finished goods, results for the sample—you can draw methods include FedEx, rail, air freight, etc.
”rolling up” that change will result in inferences about the overall quality of the
calculations that will determine the new entire item quantity. Shop calendar
standard costs of the subassemblies and A calendar of up and down days—days
finished goods. SCAR when the plant is in production and when it
See Supplier Corrective Action Request. isn’t—for an entire manufacturing facility.
As you change your standard cost
information, you might roll up costs several Scheduling data Shop order
times, but probably will revalue items only The lead time needed to manufacture an See Manufacturing order.
at certain points. item on a bill of materials and the amount of
scrap materials produced by the Shop rate
Routing manufacturing process. The average pay rate for the pay grade. It is
A detailed set of instructions that describes the figure that is used when labor costs are
how to create a particular item. Routings Scheduling preference estimated for a manufacturing order.
include operations to be performed, the A user preference that controls the allocation
of resources to a particular manufacturing Shrinkage
scheduling sequence, machines and work
order. Scheduling preferences identify The loss of materials. You might have raw
centers involved, and hours required for
additional resources that may be available material shrinkage—such as when some
setup and run times. Routings also can
and define waiting periods for a sequence. component items are defective and can't be
include information about tooling, operator
used in manufacturing—or you might have
skill levels, inspection needs, testing
Scrap parent part shrinkage—such as when not all
requirements, and so on.
A component transaction type where manufactured items meet your product
In engineering change management, a components that are issued to a standards.
routing is a list of users who must review an manufacturing order are flagged to be
engineering change request before it scrapped. Scrapped component costs are Single-level bill of materials
applied to the manufacturing order costs, A bill of materials that lists components and
becomes a change order, and who must
review a change order before it's finalized. but the quantities aren’t. subassemblies, including the quantities of
each, that make up the parent part. See also
Routing preference Sequence number Multi-level bill of materials.
An individual user choice on how A number assigned to a particular step in a
information is displayed or processed for routing. Each step (or sequence) represents Site
an operation in the manufacturing process. A location that you have defined for storing
update in the routings subsystem.
Preferences can control such actions as The sequence number controls the order in items. A site could be a department, a plant,
which steps are executed. or a warehouse. The number of sites
substituting one description for another or
depends on your organizational structure.
appending work center operations notes on
to routing notes.
Serial-numbered item
An inventoried item that is assigned a Source routing
Routing sequence unique identifier, which can be letters, A previously defined routing that contains
A single step in the manufacturing process. numbers, or a combination of letters and one or more steps that you want to use in a
numbers. new routing.
Some routings will contain multiple steps
while others will have only a single step. Standard cost variance
Examples of a sequence include assembly,
Serial-number–tracked item
See Serial-numbered item. The difference between the actual costs for a
painting, drying, etc. manufacturing order for a standard cost
Routing sheets Serial-tracked item, and the standard cost of the item.
See Serial-numbered item.
See Routing. Standard costing
Run labor code Setup cost An accounting method used by some
The cost of preparing a work area for businesses to value their inventories. A
A labor code that identifies the skill
production. Setup costs might include the company that uses standard costing—also
requirements to perform the operation as
defined. cost of calibrating machines or gathering the known as “periodic costing”—revalues its
necessary tools and resources. inventory periodically to reflect significant
Run orders changes in the cost of its items.
See Manufacturing order.
Setup labor code
A labor code that identifies the skill Standard order quantity
Sales order requirements for the person preparing the A variable that can be used to calculate order
A request for goods or services. Sales orders work area prior to performing the quantities for fixed or period order quantity
can be Open (ready to be filled) or Planned manufacturing task. order policies. It is similar to a minimum
(hold pending credit check or other criteria). order quantity, requiring no less than a set
Setup time amount for an order, but it can be increased,
The number of hours needed to prepare the either by increments or multiples of the
work area prior to the operation. standard order quantity.
Ship date
The date when a sales order leaves your
warehouse or office.

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 243

GLOS SA RY

Subassembly Unmet forecasted demand

A part that is both a component and a parent The difference between forecasted demand
part. An assembly that is used in the (the anticipated amount of an item that will
manufacture of a higher-order assembly. be required to meet projected orders) and
actual production.
Super bill of materials
A list of all the component items that can Up day
possibly be included the bill of materials for A day when the facility—the entire shop
a finished item. For example, a computer floor or a specific work center—is in
manufacturer might develop a super bill of production.
materials that includes several options for
hard disks, RAM, monitors, keyboards, mice User-defined field
and other peripherals. No computer can A field that can be used to track information
include all the options, but all the options specific to your company.
must be included in the super bill of Valuation method
materials.
The process used to track inventory value
SUPER BOM (FIFO Perpetual, FIFO Periodic, LIFO
See Super bill of materials. Perpetual, LIFO Periodic, Average
Perpetual).
Supplier
A person or company that supplies goods or Variance
services to a manufacturer. The difference between two values, such as
the difference between estimated and actual
Supplier Corrective Action expenses.
Request
A formal report to be sent to a supplier to
Where used
A Manufacturing query that scans your bills
involve the supplier in resolving problems
of materials and routings to find where
with defective parts. SCARs describe the
items, machines and other things you’ve
problems you’ve found—including item
numbers, lot numbers, dates and test defined are used. If you performed a “where
used” search for all items in your plant that
results—and might outline possible areas for
use a certain machine, for instance, the
the supplier to research to prevent the defect
from recurring. Suppliers usually are system would generate a list of all items that
have a step involving that machine.
required to respond to the SCAR reports
with information about the cause of the Window security
defect and the steps to be taken to prevent its A system that allows you to specify which
recurrence. windows each user in your organization will
Template be able to use.
A routing outline that you can use to quickly WIP
and efficiently build new routings. Each time See Work In Process (WIP).
you need to create a new routing, you can
customize the template and give it a unique Work center
routing name. A self-contained unit of the manufacturing
process, or an entire plant. A work center
Time fence might be an assembly area, a shipping and
The minimum amount of time required for receiving area or a painting area. Machines
production of an item. When MRP is used to and employees are the main components of
create planned manufacturing orders or work centers.
purchase orders, the orders automatically are
scheduled outside the time fence. Work center calendar
A calendar of up and down days—days
Total costs when the plant is in production and when it
The cumulative total of all expenses isn’t—for a specific work center.
associated with a manufacturing order, plus
any overhead that might not be directly Working routing
connected to the order. See Manufacturing order routing.

Trade discount Work In Process (WIP)

A price reduction, usually granted to a A system that helps you to track and analyze
certain customer because of the customer’s the costs associated with a particular
special status. Customers with an excellent manufacturing order and view the progress
credit history might be offered a trade of the manufacturing order.
discount.
Work order
Unit costs See Manufacturing order.
The value of time and resources consumed to
create one unit of product for this order.

244 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

Index backflushing (continued)
materials
bills of materials (continued)
components
setup in bills of materials 116 changing details for multiple
A base units of measure, in bills of materials bills 150
accounts 121 changing details for one bill 113
applied labor costs 14 Bill of Materials Defaults window lead times 99
applied machine costs 10 displaying 112 removing copied 131
item classes 55 entering default sites 112 removing from multiple bills 149
overview 61 Bill of Materials Entry window removing from one bill 114
specifying for an item 62 backflushing 116 requirements 115
actual cost items changing bill of materials to phantom shrinkage 116
described 62 107 configured
in bills of materials 115 changing position numbers 107 deleting manually 218
allocating creating described 193
effect on MRP 176 bills 111 copying 129
effect on reconciling 77 super bills 205 costs 135
alternate items deleting creating 110
described 75 configured bills 218 deleting
removing 76 entire bills 115 entire bill 115
specifying for an item 76 displaying 107 individual components 114
specifying for bills of materials 118 entering component details 114 effective dates
verifying 118 entering reference designators 137 described 119
Alternate Items window entering revision levels 142 entering 111
displaying 76 layout 109 engineering changes, effects 120
removing alternates 77 modifying component bill of fixed quantities, example 117
specifying alternates 76 materials 115 item types 116
alternate work centers modifying super bills of materials 208 lead times, example 99
described 19 removing a component from a bill 114 levels 94
preferred order 33 specifying alternates in bill of links to routings
removing 34 materials 118 creating 123
specifying 32 user-defined fields 120 in copied bills of materials 129
Alternate Work Centers window verifying alternates 119 overview 123
designating alternates 33 Bill of Materials View window unlinking 126
displaying 33 calculating component requirements uses 123
order for alternates 33 135 mass updates
removing alternates 34 displaying 134 adding an item 146
archived bills of materials searching bills for an item 134 changing default values 153
compared to revision levels 141 viewing bills 134 default values 153
described 96 viewing costs 135 overview 145
removing 143 viewing reference designators 139 removing an item 149
available to promise bills of lading, entering 180 replacing an item 151
calculations 73 bills of materials terms 146
limitations 74 alternate items updating an item in bills 150
average costing, use in Manufacturing 116 entering 118 negative component quantities 121
average quantities verifying 118 position numbers, described 95
lead times 72 archived query types 133
specifying 67 described 141 reference designators
removing 143 deleting 138
B backflushing rules 98 entering 137
back orders by-products 121 modifying 138
and manufacturing orders categories viewing 139
generating from sales order entry and types 95 revision levels
170 overview 97 described 141
overview of generating 168 specifying 112 viewing 142
described 166 components rounding issues 121
backflushing adding to multiple bills 146 shrinkage 116
machine costs, through operation adding to one bill 113 subassemblies 114
codes 38 calculating requirements 135 super
materials changing bill of materials to creating 205
described 94 phantom 107 described 193
rules 98 effect of fulfillment methods 207

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 245

IN DEX

bills of materials (continued) components dates (continued)

super alternate items effective dates
routings 209 in bills of materials 118 bills of materials 111
terms 93 verifying 118 described 68
types backflushing, rules 98 overview 119
and categories 95 bills of materials promotions 202
overview 96 adding to 113 standard costing changes 84
specifying 111 changing bill of materials to work centers 22
user-defined fields, entering phantom 107 in dates for components 120
information 120 changing information 113 in-house dates, entering 171
viewing copying 129 inventory available to promise
component information 133 lead times 99 calculations 73
links 127 requirements 115 limitations 74
where components are used 134 shrinkage 116 out dates for components 120
bins, viewing for order fulfillment 187 calculating requirements 135 promise dates 166
BOM, see bills of materials described 50 using to control work center changes
BOM Component Assigned Alternates effective dates 119 24
window fixed quantities, example 117 document types
displaying 119 negative quantities in bills of order fulfillment 178
verifying alternates 119 materials 121 order fulfillment history 177
BOM Copy window reference designators documentation, symbols and conventions
copying a bill of materials 130 deleting 138 3
displaying 130 entering 137 down days, setup for work centers 31
removing copied components 131 modifying 138 drawing groups
BOM Mass Update Defaults window viewing 139 adding drawings 41
changing default values for mass viewing described 41
updates 154 in bills of materials 133 relationship to drawings 41
displaying 154 where-used 134 removing drawing 43
BOM Mass Updates window configured bills of materials drawings
adding an item 147 deleting, bills of materials 218 attaching to
displaying 147 described 96, 193 item records 71
removing an item 149 modifying 219 operations 39
replacing an item 151 configured costs, described 193 records 43
updating an item 150 configured prices deleting 43
BOM Revision History window described 193 described 41
displaying 143 multicurrency 212 drawing groups
viewing revision level history 143 overview 211 adding to 41
BOM Routing Link window promotions 212 relationship to 41
displaying 124 configured routings, described 193 removing from 43
linking 124 configuring items terms 41
linking for configured items 209 with no pricing 213 viewing
modifying links 125 with pricing configured items 221
unlinking 126 existing configurations 217 directly 43
viewing link information 127 new configurations 215 information about 45
buy items, described 51 Cost of Goods Sold accounts, described 61 when attached to records 44
by-products costs Drawings window
backflushing 98 floor stock 117 adding drawings to group 42
bills of materials 121 labor, changing for codes 15 creating drawing groups 42
viewing, for bills of materials 135 deleting drawings 43
C customer part numbers 174 displaying 42
Calculate Manufacturing Lead Times cycle times, in operations 38 removing drawings from drawing
window groups 43
displaying 72 D viewing drawings 44
viewing lead time 72 dates duplicate position numbers 104
capacity, adjusting for a work center 27 due dates
changes since last release, information configured items 224 E
about 5 described 166 effective capacity of work centers
classes, see item classes manufacturing orders from sales employees 22
COGS accounts, described 61 orders machines 23
company, enabling for integration 157 entering 171 employee efficiency percentage
modifying 173 described 19

246 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 I N D E X

employee efficiency percentage Freight and Misc Adjustments window Item Account Maintenance - Costing
(continued) (continued) window
specifying 22 where to find documentation 165 displaying 64
employees freight charges, modifying 183 entering accounts for an item 64
assigning to work centers 22 Fulfillment Detail window Item Class Accounts Setup - Costing
removing from work centers 25 displaying 75 window
Enable Manual MO Generation option, starting shipping history 75 displaying 56
described 171 Fulfillment History Entry window specifying accounts for a class 56
Enable Silent MO Generation option, displaying 180 Item Class Fulfillment Extras window
described 171 entering fulfillment information 180 displaying 59
engineering change requests (ECRs), where to find documentation 165 starting shipping history for a class 59
effects on bills of materials 120 Fulfillment History Report, generating for item class, selecting to export 158
Engineering Change Request–View Only a range 184 item classes
window, viewing changes for bills 120 fulfillment methods accounts 55
Entire Order Fulfillment History window configured items 207 described 55
deleting order fulfillment information described 52 fulfillment methods 58
183 effects 168 shipping history 58
displaying 182 entering for an item 67 standard cost overhead 59
editing fulfillment history 182 item classes 58 uses in Manufacturing 65
viewing bin information 187 make to order 52 Item Cost Revaluation report, generating
viewing lot numbers 188 make to stock 52 to verify results 84
viewing serial numbers 188 Item Engineering Data window
Entire Order History window, where to H attaching drawings to items 71
find documentation 165 help, displaying 4 designating items for inspection 69
error cue 160 Help menu, described 4 displaying 66
exclusions in Sales Configurator history entering effective dates 68
creating 197 order fulfillment reports 184 entering item information 66
described 194 starting to track for shipping 75 excluding items from MRP 70
exporting hours per shift, described 20 specifying item status 69
inventory items to PLM 158 specifying shipping weight unit of
selecting item class 158 I measure 68
selecting item numbers 159 icons, used in manual 3 Item Maintenance window, rules for
importing, BOM from PLM 160 removing items 77
F inclusions in Sales Configurator item number, selecting to export 159
finished goods, described 50 creating 197 Item Option Assignment window
finished parts and components, described described 194 assigning option categories to items
93 incoming inspection 200
fixed overhead destructive testing 69 changing order of assignments 200
for labor codes 14 earmarking items 69 displaying 200
for machines 11 incremental spacing generating reports 201
for materials default values 101 removing options 201
changing 87 for position numbers, described 94 Item Resource Planning Maintenance
entering 81 position numbers 101 window, manufacturing fixed lead time
entering scenarios 85 specified values 102 73
overriding 82 integration, overview 157 item statuses
rolling up 83 inventory described 50
updating reconciling, effect of Manufacturing specifying 68
for labor codes 15 77 item types
for machines 15 inventory accounts, described 61 bills of materials 116
fixed quantities, bills of materials 117 Inventory Available to Promise Inquiry effect on backflushing 98
Flat Fee items window, calculating manufacturing items
backflushing 98 date 73 see also alternate items, buy items,
bills of materials 116 Inventory Year-End Closing window, make or buy items, item classes, lot
floor stock rules for removing items 77 numbers, serial numbers, standard
apply costs invoices, described 166 costing
to expense account 117 issue-from sites accounts 62
to manufacturing order 117 described 95 Active status 51
how costs are applied 117 rules for default values 97 alternates
Freight and Misc Adjustments window issue-to sites described 75
displaying 184 described 95 removing 76
editing freight costs 184 rules for default values 97 specifying 76

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 247

IN DEX

items (continued) Labor Code/Machine Overhead Defaults machines

and Sales Configurator option window changing IDs 12
categories displaying 16 creating IDs 10
assigning 199 entering default overhead described 9
overview 199 calculations 16 modifying 11
removing 201 labor codes operating costs 11
attaching files 71 adding pay codes 17 operations 38
average quantities 67 changing 14 posting accounts
backflushing 116 changing costs 15 entering 10
back-order quantities 168 deleting 18 updating 15
customer part numbers 174 described 9 removing records 12
designating for inspection 69 entering 13 terms 9
drawing size 67 fixed overhead 14 work centers
effective dates 68 posting accounts assigning to 23
engineering information 66 entering 14 removing from 25
fulfillment methods 67 updating 15 make items
Inactive status 51 relationship to pay codes 9 described 51
including in MRP calculations 70 removing pay codes 17 fulfillment methods 52
Obsolete status 51 shop rate 14 make or buy items, described 52
Prerelease status 51 terms 9 Make to Order - Manual
reconciling 77 variable overhead 14 described 52
Released status 51 labor times 37 effects 169
rules for removing 77 lead time Make to Order - Silent
rules to backflush 98 calculations 99 configured items 207
Service status 51 described 50 described 52
setup for components 72 effects 169
accounts 62 for manufacturing time 71 Make to Stock
alternates 76 for parent items 72 configured items 207
fulfillment method 67 offset 95 described 52
requires inspection 69 viewing for average quantities 72 effects 168
shipping history 75 viewing for one item 71 Manufacturing Order Entry window,
shipping unit of measure 68 lead time offset tracking orders for configured items 224
status 68 described 95 manufacturing orders
shipping history used in calculations 99 configured
procedure 177 legend, standard costing tree view 88 deleting 225
setup 75 lessons, accessing 5 effect of options on material costs
shipping weight linking 213
calculating 175 components and routing sequences material costs 223
unit of measure 68 123 scheduling 224
standard costs for materials for Sales Configurator 209 tracking progress 224
entering 81 lookup window, displaying 4 from sales orders
overriding 82 lot numbers adjusting due dates 173
standard quantities 89 items 50 back order options 170
statuses 68 sales orders 188 entering due dates 171
terms 50 specifying for sales orders 186 from quotes 173
viewing lead time generating 168
average quantities 72 M implications of generating 169
one unit 71 Machine Definition window modifying 172
item-site combinations, excluding from changing IDs 12 Manufacturing Sales Item Detail window,
MRP 70 changing machine records 11 modifying manufacturing order details
changing operating costs 11 172
L displaying 10 Manufacturing Series Item Class Extras
Labor Code Definition window entering machine records 10 window
displaying 13 removing records 13 displaying 58
labor codes machine efficiency, described 20 setting fulfillment options for a class
adding pay codes to 17 machine hours 20 58
changing 14 machine times, described 37 where to find documentation 165
changing costs 15 machine utilization Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail
deleting 18 described 20 window
entering 13 work centers 23 adding customer numbers 175
removing pay codes from 17 adjusting due dates 174

248 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 I N D E X

Manufacturing Series Sales Item Detail operations order fulfillment (continued)

window (continued) attaching drawings 39 modifying 182
displaying 171 changing 39 reports
generating orders creating 38 for a range 184
for back orders 171 deleting 40 for a single order 184
for quotes 173 described 37 shipping history 177
where to find documentation 165 relationship to routing sequences 37 viewing history 181
Manufacturing Series Sales Order terms 37 Order Fulfillment History window
Preferences window, where to find Operations Setup window displaying 181
documentation 165 attaching drawings 40 viewing order fulfillment information
manufacturing windows, changing deleting 40 181
position numbers 102 displaying 38 Order Fulfillment Setup window, where
markdowns, Sales Configurator 220 entering 38 to find documentation 165
mass updates modifying operations 39 Order Fulfillment–Bin Inquiry window
adding an item 146 option categories displaying 187
changing default values 153 assigning to items viewing bins for sales 187
default values for items 153 overview 199 Order Fulfillment–Lot Inquiry window
overview 145 procedure 199 displaying 189
removing an item from bills 149 creating 195 viewing lot numbers for sold items
replacing an item 151 deleting 198 189
terms 146 described 194 where to find documentation 165
updating an item in bills 150 modifying 198 Order Fulfillment–Serial Inquiry window
Material Overhead Applied accounts, preference order 200 displaying 188
described 61 removing from items 201 viewing serial numbers for sales 188
Material Requirements Planning (MRP) removing items 198 where to find documentation 165
and sales orders reports Orientation training, accessing 5
effects of orders 175 basic option information 199 Outsourced Work Center Setup window
limiting effect of allocations 176 option assignments 201 creating an outsourced work center
bill of materials and routing links 123 Option Category Maintenance window 26
including items 70 creating an exclusion 197 displaying 26
materials creating an inclusion 197 outsourced work centers
fixed overhead creating option categories 195 see also work centers
entering 81 deleting an option category 199 changing outsourcing status 27
entering scenarios 85 displaying 195 defining 25
overriding 82 generating reports 199 described 19
variable overhead modifying an option category 198 vendors 26
entering 81 removing an item from an option outsourcing
entering scenarios 85 category 198 changing status of work centers 27
overriding 82 Option Inquiry window labor codes 14
MFG/Lead Times window displaying 219 overhead
displaying 71 viewing options for a sales line 219 default values for standard cost item
viewing lead time 71 Option Promotion Maintenance window classes 59
miscellaneous charges, modifying 183 203 labor code 14
Miscellaneous items creating promotions 202 machine 11
backflushing 98 deleting promotions 204 overtime
bills of materials 116 displaying 202 employees 23
move times, described 38 modifying promotions 203 machines 24
MRP Exclusion List window, excluding options in Sales Configurator
items from MRP 70 deleting all promotions 203 P
multicurrency, in Sales Configurator 212 described 194 page orientation 235
multi-level bills of materials, described 94 effect on material costs 213 parent parts 93
viewing selections 218 pay codes
N order fulfillment adding to labor codes 17
navigation, symbols used for 3 see also fulfillment methods relationship to labor codes 9
new component position number deleting 183 removing from labor codes 17
incremental spacing 101, described 94 document types setup 178 periodic valuation, see standard costing
new features, information about 5 entry 179 phantom bills of materials
for make items 52 backflushing 116
O freight charges 183 described 97
operating costs, machines 11 history requirements 177 entering 112
miscellaneous charges 183

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 249

IN DEX

phantom items Q reports (continued)

backflushing 116 quality assurance, earmarking items for ranges
backflushing components 98 inspection 69 described 230
position number incremental spacing 101, queries Sales Configurator
described 94 bills of materials basic option category report 199
position numbers components 133 item option assignment report
changing 106 types 133 201
configured bill of materials 103 where used 133 samples of customized reports 230
displaying 102 queue times, described 37 samples of reports 230
duplicate 103 quotes samples with technical names 230
duplicates assigned to components described 166 sorting methods 230
104 generating manufacturing orders 173 terms 229
examples 104 text 230
examples of exceeding allowed limits R types 230
105 raw materials, see components where used 230
for bills of materials components, reconciling inventory, effect of required fields, described 4
described 95 Manufacturing 77 resources, documentation 4
guidelines 103 Reference Designator Assignment returns, described 166
limits 105 window revaluing
phantom bill of materials 103 displaying 138 all inventory 89
requirements 103 entering reference designators 138 described 53, 81
rules for changing 102 modifying or deleting reference some inventory 88
special circumstances in windows 102 designators 138 revision levels
super bill of materials 103 Reference Designator Inquiry window described 141
values 103 displaying 139 entering 142
posting accounts viewing reference designators 139 viewing 142
for labor codes reference designators Roll Up and Revalue Inventory window
entering 14 deleting 138 displaying 84
updating 15 described 95 revaluing 89
for machines entering 137 rolling up changes 84
entering 10 modifying 138 rollups
updating 15 viewing 139 described 53, 80
item classes 55 Remove Archived BOMs window effective dates 84
pricing displaying 144 standard costing 83
promotions 212 removing archived bills 144 verifying 84
Sales Configurator replenishment methods, described 51 rounding, issues in bills of materials 121
calculations 211 report options Routing Sequence Entry window, viewing
effects of Multicurrency creating 231 drawings 44
Management 212 deleting 235 routing sequences, relationship to
primary routings, described 50 described 229 operations 37
printing reports 233 ranges Routing View Closeup window, viewing
promotions adding 232 drawings 44
calculations 203 deleting 233 routings
creating 202 using 233 configured 193
deleting all for an option 203 reports described 208
deleting one 203 generating 233 primary 50
described 194 graphic 230 super bills of materials 209
effect on pricing 212 Item Cost Revaluation 84 unlinking from bills of materials 126
effective dates 202 option categories 199 viewing, links 127
modifying 203 options run labor codes, described 37
Proposed Material Fixed Overhead Entry creating 231
window deleting 235 S
changing fixed overhead calculations described 229 Sales Configurator
87 order fulfillment bills of materials
displaying 87 range of documents 184 described 193
Proposed Material Variable Overhead single order 184 modifying 219
Entry window page orientation 235 blank fields 215
changing variable overhead printing 233 configured routings
calculations 88 ranges described 193
displaying 88 adding 232 overview 208
purchase lead time, see lead time deleting 233 costs 193

250 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS

 I N D E X

Sales Configurator (continued) Sales Lot Number Entry window Set Amount window
exclusions (continued) changing link amounts 126
creating 197 entering lot numbers for sold items displaying 126
described 194 186 setup
fulfillment methods 207 Sales Order Fulfillment window document types 178
inclusions Fulfill All button 178 item accounts 62
creating 197 where to find documentation 165 item classes
described 194 Sales Order Processing Setup window, accounts 55
manufacturing orders where to find documentation 165 default standard cost overhead
deleting 225 Sales Order Setup window, where to find values 59
tracking progress 224 documentation 165 fulfillment methods 58
markdowns 220 sales orders shipping history 58
material costs and manufacturing orders Sales Configurator
actual versus standard 223 generating 170 exclusions 197
effect of options 213 generating with quote status 173 inclusions 197
multicurrency 212 implications of generating 169 option categories 195
option categories overview of generating 168 work centers 20
assigning to items 199 back-order quantities 168 setup costs, described 50
creating 195 bills of lading 180 setup labor codes, described 37
deleting 198 customer part numbers 174 setup times, described 37
modifying 198 described 166 shift information, work centers 22
overview 199 documentation 165 shipping history
preference order 200 due dates see also order fulfillment
unassigning 201 adjusting 173 setup for item classes 58
options 194 entering 171 setup for items 75
price methods 211 effects shipping weight
prices for configured items 193 of allocations on MRP 176 calculating 175
pricing calculations 211 of orders on MRP 175 specifying
promotions freight charges 183 for sales order 180
creating 202 lot-numbered items unit of measure for an item 68
deleting all 203 assigning 186 shop calendars
deleting single 203 viewing 188 work center calendars, relationship to
described 194 miscellaneous charges 183 30
effect on pricing 212 modifying 172 shop rates
modifying 203 process security 169 described 10
reports quantities 169 entering 14
basic option category report 199 serial-numbered items 185 shrinkage, bills of materials components
option assignment report 201 shipping weight 180 116
requirements 194 terms 166 single-level bills of materials, described 94
scheduling 224 viewing Site Maintenance window, excluding a
super bills of materials bins 187 site from MRP 70
creating 205 lot-numbered items 188 sites
modifying 208 serial numbers 187 excluding from MRP 70
terms 193 Sales Serial Number Entry window issue-from
using displaying 185 described 95
sales of existing configurations entering serial numbers for sold items rules 97
217 185 issue-to
sales of new configurations 215 Sales Transaction Entry window described 95
to configure an item 213 order fulfillment differences 178 rules 97
viewing where to find documentation 165 relationship to work centers 20
drawings 221 scheduling, manufacturing orders for rules for deleting 29
options 218 configured items 224 skill sets
Sales Configurator window Separate Fulfillment Process option 177 assigning to work centers 34
adjusting markdowns 220 serial numbers described 34
configuring an item 214 for sales orders Standard Cost Changes window
displaying 214 specifying 185 displaying 85
verifying dates for configured items viewing 187 entering scenarios for standard costs
224 items 50 85
viewing drawings 44 Services items revaluing 88
Sales Lot Number Entry window backflushing 98 specifying standard quantity 89
displaying 186 bills of materials 116 standard cost items, described 62

MANUFACTURING CORE FUNCTIONS 251

IN DEX

Standard Cost Maintenance window Total Estimated Weight window Work Center Setup window (continued)
displaying 82 (continued) outsourced
overriding pending changes 82 where to find documentation creating 25
verifying rollup results 84 window 165 work centers
viewing costs for standard cost made tree views, standard costing 88 adjusting capacity 27
items 136 tutorial, accessing 5 assigning employees 22
standard costing assigning machines 23
bills of materials 115 U deleting 29
described 52 units of measure entering 21
effective dates 84 rounding issues in bills of materials removing employees 25
item class overhead 59 121 removing machines 25
material costs shipping weight 68 Work Center Skill Assignment window,
entering 81 unlinking, bills of materials and routings assigning skill sets 35
entering scenarios 85 126 work centers
overriding 82 user-defined fields see also outsourced work centers
overview 52 bills of materials, entering adjusting capacity 27
revaluing information 120 alternates
all items 89 work centers, entering information 39 described 19
described 81 designating 32
some items 88 V preferred order 33
rollup valuation methods removing 34
described 80 overview 62 calendars
procedure 83 rules for bills of materials 115 adjusting 32
verifying results 84 variable overhead described 30
terms 80 labor codes entering 31
tree view 88 entering 14 relationship to shop calendar 30
Standard Item Class Overhead Defaults updating 15 creating 20
window machines deleting
displaying 59 entering 11 procedure 29
specifying overhead amounts for a updating 15 requirements 28
standard item class 59 materials described 19
Standard Item Material Costs window changing 87 display dates 24
displaying 81 entering 81 effective dates 22
entering pending changes 81 overriding 82 employees
standard labor rates, shop rate 10 using scenarios 85 assigning 22
standard order quantity, for prorating rolling up changes 83 removing 25
setup costs 89 variance accounts, described 61 machines
statuses vendors assigning 23
items for machines 10 removing 25
described 50 outsourcing, specifying for work outsourced
specifying 68 centers 26 changing status 27
subassemblies View Drawings window described 19
bills of materials 114 displaying 44 overload percentage
described 50 viewing drawings 44 employee 22
substitutes, see alternate items machine 23
super bills of materials
W overtime
what’s new, accessing 5
creating 205 employees 23
where-used queries, described 230
described 193 machines 24
WIP accounts, described 61
effect of fulfillment methods 207 relationship
Work Center Calendar window
modifying 208 to CRP 19
adjusting 32
routings 209 to sites 20
defining 31
super BOM, see super bills of materials setup 20
displaying 31
symbols shift information 22
work center calendars
standard costing tree view 88 skill sets
adjusting 32
used in manual 3 overview 34
defining 31
procedure 34
T described 30
terms 19
Total Estimated Weight window relationship to shop calendars 30
timing for changes 24
calculating shipping weight 175 Work Center Setup window
work in process accounts, described 61
displaying 175 displaying 21
outsourced
changing status 27

252 MANU FAC TUR ING CORE FUNCTIONS